Actros Kezelesi Konyv Angol

ACTROS Operating Instructions

Order no. 6462 0338 02 Part no. 930 584 01 81 EN Edition A, 09/02

A C T R O S O p e r a t i n g I n s t r u c t i o n s

Buchrücken (Versalhöhe zentrisch)

Thank you for choosing Mercedes-Benz.

We recommend that you familiarise your-self with the vehicle, its operation and the driving, control and comfort systems be-fore starting your first journey.

Please ensure that you read the Operating Instructions before starting your first jour-ney. This will help to avoid endangering yourself and others.

Since the scope of delivery depends on the order, certain descriptions and illustra-tions may differ from the equipment actu-ally installed on the vehicle. The Operating Instructions also describe items of option-al equipment, if their operation needs ex-planation.

Country-specific vehicle equipment, limit-ed availability of optional equipment or var-ying product designations are possible in certain countries.

DaimlerChrysler reserves the right to intro-duce changes in design, equipment and technical features at any time. You cannot, therefore, base any claims on the data, il-lustrations or descriptions in these Operat-ing Instructions.

Please consult your Mercedes-Benz Serv-ice Centre should you have any questions.

The Operating Instructions, Summary of control elements, Maintenance Booklet and equipment-dependent supplements are an integral part of your vehicle. You should therefore always keep them in the vehicle and pass them on to the new owner if you sell the vehicle.

The technical documentation team at DaimlerChrysler AG wishes you pleasant and safe motoring.

Contents

1 Introduction

The aim of these Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Protection of the environment . . . . 10Operating safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Mercedes-Benz original parts . . . . 11Correct use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

2 At a glance

Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Cockpit switch units . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Multi-function steering wheel . . . . . 25Gearshift unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Telligent® gearshift unit . . . . . . . . 26Telligent® automatic gearshift unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Instrument panel switch units, centre section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Co-driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Above windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Berth control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

3 Getting started

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Opening with the key . . . . . . . . . . . 34Opening using the radio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Opening the door from the outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Ignition lock positions . . . . . . . . . . 37

Preparing for a journey . . . . . . . . . . 38Checks before starting a journey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Before starting the engine . . . . . . . 40

Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Adjusting the steering wheel . . . . . 44Adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . 45Tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Wearing seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 49After the engine has been started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Releasing the parking brake . . . . . 52Pulling away and changing gear . . . 52Switching on the headlamps . . . . . 59Indicating a turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Parking and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Applying the parking brake . . . . . . 62Stopping – Hydro-pneumatic gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Stopping – Telligent® gearshift . . . 63Stopping – Telligent® automatic gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Opening the door from the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Locking with the key . . . . . . . . . . . 65Locking using the radio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Contents

4 Safety

Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Operation of audio and mobile communication equipment . . . . . . 73Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . 76Anti-lock braking system (ABS) . . . 76Telligent® brake system (BS) . . . . . 77ABS deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Acceleration skid control (ASR) . . . 87Telligent® stability control (SR) . . . 90Telligent® roll control (WR) . . . . . . 95Lane assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Reversing warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Underride guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Folding underride guard . . . . . . . . 100

5 Controls in detail

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Opening and closing doors . . . . . 102Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Unlocking/locking door using the "Door lock" switch . . . . . . . . . 104Opening the door from inside . . . 105Central locking with anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Enhanced central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Radio remote control . . . . . . . . . . 109Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . 111

Seats and berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Upper berth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Lower berth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125ADR emergency-off switch . . . . . . 126Flame-start system . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Hillholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Headlamp range control . . . . . . . . 133Switching on the front foglamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Combination switch . . . . . . . . . . . 134Light switch unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Hazard warning lamps . . . . . . . . . 137Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Adjustable reading lamp . . . . . . . 143

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Total distance recorder . . . . . . . . 144Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Outside temperature display . . . . 147Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Reservoir pressure for brake circuits 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Contents

Driver information system . . . . . . . 150Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Driver information system menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152User guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Multi-function display . . . . . . . . . 156Event message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Actros Info menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Monitoring info menu . . . . . . . . . 161Trip computer menu . . . . . . . . . . 166Audio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Telephone menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169New SMS menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Maintenance menu . . . . . . . . . . . 171Event info menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Auxiliary heating menu . . . . . . . . 177Alarm menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Language menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Transmission control back-up mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 207MB item number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Events menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Binary values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Gear change methods . . . . . . . . . 215Pulling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Selecting the splitter group . . . . . 217Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Selecting reverse gear . . . . . . . . . 218Telligent® gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . 218Gear indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Telligent® gearshift unit . . . . . . . . 220Selecting neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Pulling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Selecting reverse gear . . . . . . . . . 229Construction-site mode . . . . . . . . 229Rapid change of direction . . . . . . 230Telligent® automatic gearshift . . . 231Gear indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Telligent® automatic gearshift unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Engaging forward gears . . . . . . . . 235Selecting neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Selecting reverse gear . . . . . . . . . 237Rapid change of direction . . . . . . 238Automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Parking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Transfer case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Differential locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Power take-offs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Continuous brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Idling speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Switching between various driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Cruise control (combined acceleration/braking control) . . . 275Telligent® distance control (ART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Telligent® level control . . . . . . . . 290

Contents

Starting-off aid, three-axle vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Hendrickson leading axle . . . . . . . 297Trailing axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Telligent® trailing axle . . . . . . . . . 300

Good visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Windscreen cleaning platform . . . 305

Climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Heating/heater air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Automatic air conditioning . . . . . . 315Auxiliary air conditioning . . . . . . . 323Fresh air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Open-air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Opening and closing the side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Opening and closing the sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Opening and closing the tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Opening and closing the roof hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Cab stowage compartments (interior) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345Cab stowage compartments (exterior) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356Operating audio equipment . . . . . 359

6 Operation

Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . 370The first 1,250 miles (2,000 km) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372Trailer/semitrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Trailer/semitrailer coupling . . . . . 373Coupling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373Trailer/semitrailer monitoring . . . 378Loading platform approach aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Wind deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Wind deflector on cab . . . . . . . . . 381Side wind deflector on the cab . . 384

Tippers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385Tipper operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Contents

Tyres and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390Checking the tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . 390Changing the tyre size . . . . . . . . . 391Tightening wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . 392

Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . 397Caring for the exterior of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398Caring for the interior of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Telligent® maintenance system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Reconditioned components/ reconditioned parts . . . . . . . . . . . 409High-pressure grease guns . . . . . 410Regular checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410Maintenance flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417Engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418Topping up the windscreen washer/ headlamp cleaning system . . . . . 419Coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

7 Practical advice

Where will I find...? . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430Vehicle tool kit and emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434Hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434Electronic-pneumatic gearshift (EPS III S/EPS III SA) . . . . . . . . . . 437Opening and closing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444Mechanical-hydraulic cab tilting system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448Electro-hydraulic cab tilting system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449STOP lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453Tilting the cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453Starting and stopping the enginewith the cab tilted . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462Engine emergency running mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462Poly-V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462Electromagnetic fan clutch lock-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

Fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468Bleeding the fuel system . . . . . . . 468

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470Hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470Transmission control back-up mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473Teach-in procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 478Emergency gearshift (NMV) . . . . . 481

Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483Releasing the spring-loaded parking brake if there is a failure of charge pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483Releasing the spring-loaded brake with an external source of compressed air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Contents

Compressed-air system . . . . . . . . . 486Charging the compressed-air system via the front coupling head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486Charging the compressed-air system via the tyre inflator connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

Pneumatic suspension . . . . . . . . . . 488Charging the pneumatic suspensionfrom an external compressed-air source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Trailing axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489Trailing axle, pneumatic . . . . . . . . 489Nummek trailing axle, hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

Steering system/Telligent® steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

Spare wheel location . . . . . . . . . . 491Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494Tyre inflator connection . . . . . . . . 502

Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504Headlamp setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515Partially masking headlamps – driving on left/right . . . . . . . . . . . 517Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522

Unlocking and locking in an emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

Radio remote control . . . . . . . . . . 534Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof mechanically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535Closing the tilting sunroof mechanically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537Retrofitting the towing coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

8 Technical data

Type plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552Vehicle type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . 552Engine type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

Service products and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556

Service products and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569

Operating data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575Operating data – overview . . . . . . 575

Tyre pressure table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579Single tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579Twin tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584Compressed-air reservoir . . . . . . . . 585

Compressed-air reservoir information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585Aluminium tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586Steel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586

Radio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . 589Radio type approvals . . . . . . . . . . 589

9 Glossary and index

Technical terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603Editorial office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

7

The aim of these Operating Instructions

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Introduction

� The aim of these Operating Instructions

These Operating Instructions are intended to assist you in all situations with your ve-hicle. Each section has its own print regis-ter to help you find the information you require quickly.

1 Introduction

This section explains the aim of these Operating Instructions. Details about the means of representation and the symbols used will help you to find your way about quickly.

2 At a glance

Here you will find an overview of all the controls you can operate from the driver's seat.

3 Getting started

Here you will find all the information you will need when you are driving the vehicle for the first time. You should read this sec-tion first if this is your first Mercedes-Benz or if you have hired the vehicle.

4 Safety

This section describes all the safety fea-tures of the vehicle.

5 Controls in detail

This is where you will find more detailed in-formation about the equipment in your ve-hicle. This section expands on the "Getting started" section and also describes techni-cal innovations. If you are already familiar with the basic functions of the vehicle, you will find this section particularly interest-ing.

6 Operation

Here you will find all the information you will need when you are driving the vehicle.

7 Practical advice

Here you will find practical help for possi-ble problems.

8

Introduction

The aim of these Operating Instructions

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

8 Technical data

All the important technical data for the vehicle is listed here.

9 Glossary and index

The glossary of technical terms explains the most important technical concepts.

The table of contents and the index are intended to help you find information quickly.

9

Introduction

Symbols

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Symbols

You will find the following symbols used in these Operating Instructions:

� This symbol means that you have to do something.

� A number of these symbols one after the other indicates a sequence of ac-tions.

� page This symbol indicates the page on which you will find further in-formation on the subject.

This continuation symbol indi-cates an interrupted sequence of actions that will be continued on the next page.

-> This symbol in the glossary of technical terms means that the term following the arrow is also explained.

Display Displays in the multi-function display are printed in this font.

Warning GA warning draws your attention to possible risks to safety, the human body, health and life.

Environmental note HAn environmental note gives you tips on the protection of the environment.

!This note draws your attention to possi-ble hazards to your vehicle.

iThis tip contains advice or further infor-mation you may find useful.

��

10

Introduction

Protection of the environment

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Protection of the environment

Environmental note HDaimlerChrysler's declared policy is one of integrated environmental protection. This policy starts at the root causes and encom-passes in its management decisions all the consequences for the environment which could arise from production processes or the products themselves.

The objectives are for the natural resources which form the basis for our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account.

Operate your vehicle in an environmentally compatible manner, and you will help to pro-tect the environment.

As fuel consumption and engine, brake and tyre wear depend heavily on the style of driv-ing and operating conditions, please bear the following in mind:

� Make sure that the tyre pressures are al-ways correct.

� Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration.

� Do not warm the engine up when the ve-hicle is stationary.

� Change gear in good time and use each gear only up to 2/3 of its maximum en-gine speed.

� Keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel con-sumption.

� Switch off the engine in stationary traf-fic.

A regularly serviced vehicle contributes to environmental protection. The driver infor-mation system indicates the service due dates in the multi-function display.

Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work rele-vant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop.

11

Introduction

Operating safety

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Operating safety

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you:

Use only Mercedes-Benz original parts and conversion parts or accessories that have been expressly approved by Mercedes-Benz for your type of vehicle.These parts have been specially tested to ensure their safety, reliability and suitabili-ty.

Risk of accident GWork incorrectly carried out on electronic equipment and its software could stop this equipment working. Since the electronic systems are networked, this might also af-fect systems that have not been modified.

Faults in the electronic systems could seri-ously impair the operational safety of your vehicle.

Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.


The operating safety can be affected by oth-er, unauthorised work or modifications to the vehicle.

Some of the safety systems only work when the engine is running. Therefore, do not switch the engine off when the vehicle is in motion.

Mercedes-Benz original parts

12

Introduction

Operating safety

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

So that Mercedes-Benz can vouch for reli-ability, safety and suitability, the following should be observed:

� Do not exchange Mercedes-Benz origi-nal parts or authorised conversion parts or accessories for other parts

� Do not modify the vehicle in any other way

� Only manufacture and assemble con-version parts in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Body and Implement Mounting Directives

� Authorisation from Mercedes-Benz should be sought should there be any deviation from the Mercedes-Benz Body and Implement Mounting Direc-tives

Observe the following information when using your vehicle:

� the entire Operating Instructions, safe-ty notes

� the "Technical data" section in these Operating Instructions

� national road traffic regulations

� national road traffic licensing regula-tions

!Acceptance or approval granted by offi-cial test centres or the issue of official permits does not rule out safety risks.

iFurther information is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Correct use

Risk of injury GVarious warning stickers are attached to your vehicle. Their purpose is to make you and others aware of various risks. You should not, therefore, remove any of these warning stickers unless expressly instructed to do so by information on the sticker itself.

If you remove these warning stickers, you or others may fail to recognise certain risks. The result of this could be injury to yourself or others.

13

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

At a glance

Cockpit

Instrument panel

Cockpit switch units

Multi-function steering wheel

Telligent® gearshift unit

Telligent® automatic gearshift unit

Instrument panel switches, centre section

Driver's door

Co-driver's door

Above windscreen

Berth control panel

14

At a glance

Cockpit

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Cockpit

15

At a glance

Cockpit

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Function Page

1 Side sun visor

2 Loudspeaker

3 Sun visor

4 Switch unit above wind-screen

31

5 Tachograph 251

6 Audio equipment/navigation system

359

7 Stowage compartments 346

Function Page

8 Interior lighting switch unit 31

9 Telephone bracket with mi-crophone for hands-free system

350

a FleetBoard® receiver

b FleetBoard® monitor

c FleetBoard® computer

d Stowage compartments

Function Page

e Light switch/headlamp range control

59

f Combination switch

� Turn signals 60

� Windscreen wipers 61

� Main-beam headlamps 60

� Horn ��

16

At a glance

Cockpit

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Function Page

g Instrument panel 144

� Speedometer and trip meter

144

� Multi-function display

� Rev counter 144

� Fuel gauge 148

� Reservoir pressure display for brake cir-cuits 1 + 2

149

h Multi-function steering wheel

25

Function Page

j Multi-function lever

� Continuous brake 261

� Limiter 269

� Telligent® distance control

280

� Idling speed governor 265

k Cockpit switch units 22

Function Page

l Heating/air conditioning control panel

309

� Airflow

� Air distribution/ recirculation

� Temperature

17

At a glance

Cockpit

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Function Page

m Switch unit 252

Transfer case

� On-road selector posi-tion

� Off-road selector posi-tion

Differential locks 253

� Inter-axle lock, transfer case

� Cross-axle lock, rear axle

� Cross-axle lock, front axle

Function Page

n Ventilation and heating vents

307

o Lane assist camera 96

p Driver's door control panel 29

q Light switch unit 135

r Parking brake 52

s Telligent® automatic gear-shift unit

231

� Driving mode selector switch

Telligent® gearshift unit 220

Function Page

t Instrument panel switch units, centre section

28

u Ashtray 344

v FleetBoard® switch unit

w 12 V socket 357

x Electrical equipment com-partment

522

y Co-driver's door control panel

30

18

At a glance

Instrument panel

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Instrument panel

19

At a glance

Instrument panel

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Function Page

Turn signal indicator lamp

1 Tractor vehicle

2 Trailer, semitrailer

3 Indicator lamps 20

4 STOP lamp 451

5 Speedometer with

� Trip meter 144

� Total distance recorder

144

6 Multi-function display 156

Function Page

7 Rev counter with 144

� Econometer 145

� Clock 148

� Ambient temperature display

147

8 Fuel gauge 148

9 Brake circuit 1 and 2 reservoir pressure dis-play with

149

� Brake circuit 1 indica-tor lamp

� Brake circuit 2 indica-tor lamp

Function Page

a Instrument panel func-tion buttons

Í Reset trip meter 144

º Acknowledge event message

159

G Reset button

Instrument panel lighting 143

æ Brighter

ç Darker

b Indicator lamps, de-pending on equipment

20

c Additional indicator lamps

20

20

At a glance

Instrument panel

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Indicator lamps

21

At a glance

Instrument panel

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Function Page

Turn signal indicator lamps

60

1 Tractor vehicle, left

2 Trailer/semitrailer, left

3 Trailer/semitrailer, right

4 Tractor vehicle, right

5 Main-beam headlamps 60

6 Continuous brake 261

7 Parking brake 130

8 STOP lamp 451

9 Tilting cab lock 453

a Acceleration skid control (ASR)/Telligent® stability control (SR)

87, 90

Function Page

b Continuous brake; Telligent® automatic gear-shift

262

c Indicator lamps, de-pending on equipment

� Flame-start system 129

� Lane assist (SPA) 96

� Converter and clutch unit (WSK)

� Telligent® steering system

� Hillholder 130

� Tipper body 385

� Loading tailgate

� Auxiliary air-condition-ing

323

22

At a glance


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Cockpit switch units

Function Page

1 � Switches ABS on/off 85

� Switches ASR/SR on/off

87

� Switches lane assist on/off

96

� Raised travel position 295

� Starting-off aid 296

� Raises/lowers the trailing axle

298

� Raises/lowers Nummek axle

299

� Telligent® steering system lock

300

2 Controls the heating/air conditioning

307

Function Page

3 � Anti-theft alarm sys-tem panic switch

116

� Activates the anti-theft alarm system

111

� ADR/GGVS emergen-cy-off switch

126

� Switches the electro-hydraulic cab tilt on/off

453

� Switches the 12 V socket on/off

356

4 � Constant engine speed

255

� Engages/disengages power take-off

255

23

At a glance


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Function Page

5 � Changes horn to air horn

� Switches the hazard warning lamps on/off

137

� Switches the hillholder on/off

130

Function Page

6 � Switches the air condi-tioning on/off

309,316

� Switches the auxiliary heating on/off

327

� Charges the refriger-ant accumulator

324

� Switches the refrigera-tor on/off

315

Function Page

7 Engages/disengages the transfer case for on-road or off-road selection

252

8 Engages/disengages the differential locks

253

24

At a glance


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Switch unit on left of multi-function steering wheel

Function Page

1 Switches the work-area lamp on/off

135

2 Switches the load com-partment light on/off

135

3 Switches the rotating bea-con lamp on/off

136

4 Cleans the headlamps 136

iThe layout of the switches can differ depending on the vehicle equipment level.

25

At a glance

Multi-function steering wheel

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Multi-function steering wheel

1 FIS navigation buttons

FIS navigation

è Forwards

ÿ Back

Navigation within a menu

j Forwards

k Back

2 Audio/telephone buttons

Adjusting volume of active audio source e.g. telephone, audio equipment or navigat-ing within a menu list or mak-ing a selection.

æ Up/increases the volume

ç Down/decreases the volume

Making a telephone call

í Accepts a telephone call/direct entry into Redial list

ì Hangs up/direct entry into Telephone menu

26

At a glance

Gearshift unit

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Gearshift unit

Gearshift unit

Telligent® gearshift (� page 220)

Telligent® gearshift unit 1 Function button

2 Gear lever

3 Neutral button

4 Half-gear rocker switch

27

At a glance

Gearshift unit

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Gearshift unit

Telligent® automatic gearshift (� page 231)

Telligent® automatic gearshift unit 1 Function button

2 Gear lever

3 Neutral button

4 Half-gear rocker switch

5 Driving mode selector switch

28

At a glance

Instrument panel switch units, centre section

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Instrument panel switch units, centre section

Function

1 � Switches the heated wind-screen on/off

� Switches the battery heating on/off

� Switches the loading tailgate on/off

2 � FleetBoard® emergency call

� Sends FleetBoard® service info

� Sends FleetBoard® message to vehicle pool

� User-definable FleetBoard® function


29

At a glance

Driver's door

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Driver's door

Function Page

1 Adjusts the airflow 307

2 Adjusts the airflow direc-tion

307

3 Heated exterior mirrors in-dicator lamp

302

4 Switches the exterior mir-ror heating on/off

302

5 Adjusts the exterior mir-rors

302

6 Selects the left-hand exte-rior mirror

302

7 Selects the right-hand ex-terior mirror

302

8 Locks the doors 104

9 Unlocks the doors 104

a Opens/closes the driver's door window

338

b Opens/closes the co-driver's door window

338

c Opens the door 105

30

At a glance

Co-driver's door

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Co-driver's door

Function Page

1 Adjusts the airflow direc-tion

307

2 Adjusts the airflow 307

3 Unlocks the doors 104

4 Locks the doors 104

5 Switches the co-driver's reading lamp on/off

140

6 Opens/closes the co-driver's door window

338

7 Switches the interior light-ing on/off

138

8 Opens the door 105

31

At a glance

Above windscreen

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Above windscreen

Function Page

1 � Opens/closes the left-hand sun blind

� Opens/closes the right-hand sun blind

� Activates/deactivates the sliding/tilting sun-roof lock

341

� Opens/closes the sliding/tilting sunroof

340

2 Stowage space, installa-tion space for CB radio

3 � Switches the interior lighting on/off

138

� Switches the driver's reading lamp on/off

140

� Switches the nightlight on/off

141

� Switches the ambient lighting on/off

142

Function Page

4 Audio equipment 73

5 Tachograph 251


32

At a glance

Berth control panel

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Berth control panel

Function Page

1 Berth reading lamp 138

2 Switches the auxiliary heating on/off

327

Audio equipment

3 Press briefly: Increases the volume Press and hold: Function parallel with function on audio equipment – see the manufacturer's operating instructions

359

4 Press briefly: Decreases the volume Press and hold: Audio equipment ON/OFF

359

Function Page

5 Opens the sliding/tilting sunroof

340

6 Closes the sliding/tilting sunroof

340

7 Switches the interior light-ing on/off

138

8 Switches the interior light-ing off centrally

138

9 Switches the auxiliary air conditioning on/off

323

33

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Getting started

Opening

Preparing for a journey

Adjusting

Driving

Parking and closing

34

Getting started

Opening

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Opening

The "Getting started" section contains summarised information. This information refers not only to the basic functions of the vehicle but also to the steps that need to be followed before starting a journey. You should read this section in particular if this is your first Mercedes-Benz vehicle.

Left-hand door

1 To unlock2 To lock

Opening with the key iUnlockingOnly the driver's and the co-driver's doors can be unlocked with the key.

35

Getting started

Opening

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The radio remote control will work regard-less of the direction in which it is pointed.

It is also possible to unlock the vehicle from some distance. To prevent theft, the radio remote control should only be used in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.

The radio remote control unlocks the driv-er's door first and then the co-driver's door.

Radio remote control

1 ‹ Locking button2 Œ Unlocking button

� Press and hold the locking/unlocking button for approximately one second.

Unlocking the driver's door

� Press the Œ button once.

The turn signals flash once.

Vehicles with anti-theft alarm system:The anti-theft alarm system is deacti-vated.

Unlocking the driver's and co-driver's doors

� Press the Œ button twice.

The turn signals flash once.


Opening using the radio remote control

36

Getting started

Opening

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Pull the door handle on the outside to open the door.

Further information can be found in the "Controls in detail" section (� page 102).

Entrance (example)

1 Grab handles

Getting in and out of the vehicle

� Lower the driver's suspension seat completely (� page 43).

� Swing the armrest up.

� Use the grab handles and steps provid-ed.


Opening the door from the outside

Entrance

Risk of injury GThere can be no guarantee that you can get in and out of the vehicle safely if the grab handles and the steps are not used. Do not jump out of the cab.

There is a risk of slipping if the steps are not kept clean.

!Do not use the seat armrest as a grab handle. It is not designed to support such a load.

37

Getting started

Opening

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Ignition lock positionsRisk of accident GUnder no circumstances should the ignition lock be turned to position 0 when the vehi-cle is in motion. The ignition lock locks the steering and the vehicle can no longer be steered.

Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving for a short time. Children or unauthorised persons could otherwise start the engine and set the vehicle in motion.

0 To insert or remove the key, to lock the steering

1 To unlock the steering

Some consumers are operational

2 Drive position

3 To start the engine

38

Getting started


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Preparing for a journey

Driver's vehicle checks

� Inspect the vehicle outside and inside before starting a journey.

� Rectify identified faults before starting a journey.

Vehicle exterior Vehicle interiorChecks before starting a journey

Risk of fire and accident GInsufficient tyre pressure

� jeopardises operating safety

� damages or destroys the tyres

� causes the tyres to overheat until they ignite

Check tyre pressures regularly before start-ing a journey and correct as necessary.

Check tyres for foreign objects and for dam-age before starting a journey.

Page

Check function of lighting, turn signals and brake lamps

40

Tyres and wheels 390

Secure fastening of side trim and quick-release locks

Semitrailer coupling1

1 Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer

Trailer coupling1

Page

Cab tilt lock 453

Steering wheel play 51

Disc inserted in tachograph 251

39

Getting started


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Emergency equipment/first-aid kit

The first-aid kit and breakdown equipment can be found in the cab or in the exterior stowage compartments (� page 430).

� Check that the equipment can be ac-cessed easily, and that it is complete and intact.

� Check at regular intervals that the first-aid kit is complete and usable.

� Note the use-by dates of the contents.

� Have the fire extinguisher checked every 1 to 2 years. Otherwise it could fail in an emergency.

First-aid

First-aid equipment:

� First-aid kit

� Warning triangle

� Fire extinguisher

� Warning lamp

� Reflective safety jacket

Breakdown equipment

� Special tools in the vehicle tool bag and vehicle document wallet

� Jack

� Wheel wrench

� Chocks

� Tyre inflator hose!Have the fire extinguisher refilled after every use.

40

Getting started


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Trailer/semitrailer coupling

The trailer or semitrailer coupling is one of the vehicle components which is particu-larly important to road safety. Please com-ply with the manufacturer's operating instructions with regard to operation, care and maintenance.

Further notes (� page 373).

Fuel level

� Turn the key to position 2 in the igni-tion lock. Check the fuel level in the fuel gauge. If necessary, refuel the vehicle.

Vehicle check using the driver informa-tion system (FIS)

� Turn the key to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gearshift: The FIS shows the selected mode of operation auto or man. (� page 232) in the multi-function dis-play.

Any faults will be indicated in the multi-function display by means of an event message (� page 156).

� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to ac-knowledge the event message (� page 159).

� Rectify the faults indicated.

Vehicle lighting, turn signals and brake lamps

Following the function check, the driver in-formation system checks the function of the exterior lighting bulbs.

� Check exterior lighting for cleanliness and damage.

� Rectify identified faults before starting a journey.

Risk of accident GThere should be no longitudinal play in the trailer coupling. Otherwise there is a danger of the trailer breaking free. Check the trailer coupling daily for longitudinal play by mov-ing the towbar firmly backwards and for-wards. Do not hold the coupling jaws when doing this. If any longitudinal play is detect-ed, have it rectified immediately.

Before starting the engine

41

Getting started

Adjusting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Adjusting

Adjusting the driver's suspension seat (example)

Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

� Pull adjusting bar 1 upwards.

� Slide the seat forwards or backwards. Adjust the distance to the pedals so that you can depress them fully.

� Release adjusting bar and engage it au-dibly.

Seat 1 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

2 Seat cushion forwards/backwards

3 n Vertical seat suspension

4 = Seat cushion angle

5 Ò Seat height

6 o Seat lowering, easy-exit fea-ture

7 Backrest

8 Armrest

42

Getting started

Adjusting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Seat cushion

� Pull adjusting handle 2 upwards.

� Slide seat cushion forwards or back-wards.

� Release the adjusting handle and en-gage it audibly.

Vertical seat suspension

� Pull lever 3 up to select a softer sus-pension setting.

� Push lever 3 down to select a harder suspension setting.

Seat cushion angle

� Pull lever 4 up,

� adjust the seat by leaning backwards or forwards on the seat cushion or backrest,

� release the lever.

Seat height

� Pull lever 5 up,

the seat is raised.

� Push lever 5 down,

the seat lowers.

iThe seat suspension adjustment is infi-nitely adjustable.

Adjust the seat suspension so that it does not bottom out, even on poor road surfaces.

iThe seat height is infinitely adjustable.

43

Getting started

Adjusting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Seat lowering, easy-exit feature

� Push lever 6 down, the seat will lower.

� Pull lever 6 up, the seat will return to the stored height setting.

Backrest

� Pull lever 7 up.

The backrest is pushed forwards in the normal direction of travel under spring loading.

� Adjust the backrest by leaning back-wards or forwards on the backrest – infinitely adjustable.

� Release the lever.

Armrest

� Turn rotary button 8 beneath the arm-rest,

the armrest rises/lowers.


iThe backrest is infinitely adjustable.

44

Getting started

Adjusting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

You can adjust the height and angle of the steering column.

1 Steering column lock switch

With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied:

� Press the lower section of the steering column lock switch.

The steering column is released.

� Adjust the steering wheel to the de-sired position.

� Press the upper section of the steering column lock switch.

The steering column locks.

Adjusting the steering wheelRisk of accident GAn unlocked steering column could cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

� Adjust the steering column only when the vehicle is stationary and the parking brake is applied.

� Do not unlock the steering column when the vehicle is in motion.

iIf the steering column is unlocked, it will relock itself automatically after ten seconds.

45

Getting started

Adjusting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1 To select the left-hand exterior mirror2 To select the right-hand exterior mirror3 To adjust the exterior mirrors



� Select the exterior mirror you wish to adjust by pressing button 1 or 2.

� Adjust the exterior mirror by pressing button 3.

Further information can be found in the "Controls in detail" section (� page 302)

Adjusting the exterior mirrors Tachograph

iA correctly filled out disc must always be inserted in the tachograph for any journey (� page 251). Observe the op-erating instructions issued by the man-ufacturer.

46

Getting started

Adjusting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Ensure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly for every journey.

1 Belt tongue2 Buckle3 Release button

Wearing seat belts

Risk of accident GAn incorrectly worn seat belt will not provide the necessary degree of protection and could even cause injury. For this reason, make sure that all occupants, especially pregnant women, wear their seat belts cor-rectly for every trip. Always fasten your seat belt before starting the vehicle. Airbags and belt tensioners will only be able to perform their protective function if the occupants are wearing their seat belts properly.

Persons less than 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belt properly. They therefore re-quire additional restraint systems for pro-tection in an accident.

Under no circumstances should the seat belts be modified. They will not be able to function as intended.

iThe legal requirements for the use of seat belts and restraint systems should be observed at all times.

47

Getting started

Adjusting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Wearing seat belts correctly

� Pull the belt smoothly from the seat belt reel and route it over the shoulder.

� Do not twist the belt when fastening.

� Pass the belt over the middle of the shoulder.

� The belt must not pass around the neck or under the arm.

� If necessary, pull the belt upwards in front of the chest so that it rests tightly against the chest.

� The belt must cross over the hips as low down as possible, i.e. over the hip joint and not across the abdomen.

� Click belt tongue 1 into buckle 2 (it must audibly engage).

� Adjust the backrest to an almost verti-cal position.

� Check the seat belt during the journey to ensure that it is still correctly routed.

Releasing the seat belt

� Press release button 3 in buckle.

� Guide belt tongue 1 back to its out-of-use position.

Seat belt warning system

Optional extra


A warning buzzer will sound for approx-imately 10 seconds if the driver's seat belt is not engaged.

Risk of injury GOnly one person should use each seat belt at any one time.

Do not use seat belts to secure both objects and persons.

The seat belt should always pass closely over the body. Avoid wearing bulky clothing.

Under no circumstances should the seat belts be modified. They might no longer function correctly.

48

Getting started

Adjusting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Risk of injury GReplace the following items

� seat belts

� belt tensioners

� airbags

if these have been subjected to a load in an accident. The restraint systems should be checked and replaced if necessary if they have been subjected to a load or damaged in an accident.

The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.


49

Getting started

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Driving

The starter inhibitor prevents the engine from being started if a gear is selected and the clutch pedal not fully depressed.

Transmission neutral position N

� Turn the key to position 2 in the igni-tion lock and wait at least one second until the immobiliser is deactivated.

� Shift the transmission to neutral.

Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift or Telligent® automatic gearshift: The transmission neutral position N must be shown in the multi-function display.

� Disengage power take-off.

The J power take-off display or the c tipper body indicator lamp must not light up.

� Vehicles with flame-start system: Wait until the q indicator lamp goes out (� page 129).

� Without depressing the accelerator pedal, turn the key to position 3 and hold it in this position until the engine starts.

� Release the key when the engine has started.

Starting the engine !Do not drive off straight away. Leave the engine to idle for a short time until sufficient oil pressure has built up. This prevents wear and potential damage to the engine.

Quickly warm up the engine by driving in the middle range of the engine speed. Observe the green section in the rev counter as you do this. Depending on the ambient tempera-ture, the engine will reach its operating temperature after approximately 10 –20 minutes. The engine's full pow-er output becomes available once the operating temperature has been reached.

50

Getting started

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Reservoir pressure in the compressed-air system

There must be sufficient reservoir pressure in the following pressure circuits before a journey is started:

� in brake circuit 1 or 2 3 – the event message with red status display must go out

� in the spring actuator pressure circuit – the ! indicator lamp in the instru-ment panel must go out

� in the auxiliary consumers circuit Œ – the event message with yellow status display must go out

Event messages in the multi-function dis-play indicate insufficient reservoir pres-sures. At the same time the STOP lamp will light up.

iVehicles with hot-water auxiliary heat-ing: At ambient temperatures below –20 °C, pre-heat the engine before starting (� page 327).

After the engine has been started

Risk of accident GIf the reservoir pressure in the compressed-air system is too low it will not be possible to brake the vehicle or to change gear. The op-erating reliability and road safety of the ve-hicle are jeopardised. Do not start off until the reservoir pressures have been reached and the STOP lamp goes out.

51

Getting started

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Checking steering wheel play

With the engine running

� turn the front wheels to the straight-ahead position.

� Turn the steering wheel to left and right. The front wheels must begin to move when the steering wheel is turned by not more than 30 mm (1.2 in), measured at the steering wheel rim.

� If this is not the case, have the steering and steering linkage checked immedi-ately.

Cab tilt lock

The Ÿ cab tilt lock indicator lamp in the instrument panel must go out once the en-gine has been started.

If the indicator lamp does not go out:

� Tilt the cab back to the driving position (� page 453).

Risk of accident GIf the steering wheel play is greater than 30 mm, the vehicle can no longer safely maintain a straight line. The direction of travel will need to be corrected continually. The operating reliability and road safety of the vehicle are jeopardised. Have the steer-ing system inspected.



Risk of accident GAn unlocked cab could tilt forwards if the ve-hicle is braked sharply. Only start off once the cab is tilted fully back and locked in this position.

52

Getting started

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1 Brake fully applied, lever engaged2 To raise the lever3 Released position

� If necessary, wait until sufficient reser-voir pressure has built up in the brake circuits and the STOP lamp has gone out.

� Raise parking brake lever 2 out of fully applied position 1.

� Move the lever to release position 3.

The ! parking brake indicator lamp in the instrument panel will go out.

Releasing the parking brake

iIf the reservoir pressure in the parking brake circuit is too low and the engine cannot be started to charge the reser-voirs, it is possible to release the parking brake mechanically or pneu-matically (� page 483).

Pulling away and changing gear

Risk of accident GThe movement of the pedals must not be ob-structed.

� If floormats and carpets are fitted, en-sure these are secured correctly and cannot slip and that there is sufficient pedal clearance.

� Do not place any loose objects in the driver's footwell. Such objects could in-terfere with the pedals in the event of sudden acceleration or braking manoeu-vres. The objects could block the pedals and it might be impossible to brake, de-press the clutch or accelerate.

� Store all loose objects or secure them so they cannot get into the driver's foot-well during a journey.

53

Getting started

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Brake circuit 1 and 2 reservoir pressure dis-play

1 Brake circuit indicator lamp 12 Brake circuit indicator lamp 2

Do not start off if:

� the reservoir pressure in brake circuit 1 or 2 3 is below 6.8 bar (event mes-sage with red status indicator)

� the auxiliary consumer reservoir pressure Œ is too low (event mes-sage with yellow status indicator)

� there is insufficient oil pressure

� the STOP lamp is lit.

� on vehicles with pneumatic suspension: the chassis frame is not in the ‘ drive position.

!Do not drive off straight away. Leave engine to idle for a short time until suf-ficient oil pressure has built up. This prevents wear and potential damage to the engine.

Quickly warm up the engine by driving in the middle range of the engine speed. Observe the green section in the rev counter as you do this.Depending on the ambient tempera-ture, the engine will reach its operating temperature after approximately 10 – 20 minutes. The engine's full pow-er output becomes available once the operating temperature has been reached. ��

54

Getting started

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Pulling away – Hydro-pneumatic gearshift

DaimlerChrysler recommends pulling away in 1st to 4th gear, depending on load and gradient.

� Depress the clutch pedal.

� Move the gear lever to the desired gear, but without using force.

� Release the parking brake.

� Slowly release the clutch pedal and slowly depress the accelerator.

� Immediately after pulling away, test the service and parking brakes. Pay atten-tion to the traffic situation as you do this.

Ensure that the vehicle does not pull to the left or right and that it slows down in a controlled manner.


If the warning signal sounds when shift-ing to a lower gear, do not engage the clutch but select a higher gear instead. There is a risk of engine damage from overrevving.

If the vehicle is driven at too high or too low an engine speed, the engine will be damaged.

� Do not rely on hearing to judge when to change gear. Observe the green range in the rev counter.

� Avoid the red range in the rev coun-ter.

� Under no circumstances should the engine speed exceed 2,500 rpm when the continuous brake is in op-eration.

Risk of accident GIf a brake or a brake circuit fails, do not con-tinue the journey. Stop the vehicle at once (road and traffic conditions permitting).

55

Getting started

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Changing gear – Hydro-pneumatic gearshift


� Apply slightly increased pressure on the gear lever to overcome the lock be-tween the gear ranges.

� Move the gear lever to the desired gear, but without using force.


Pulling away – Telligent® gearshift

If you wish to pull away from stationary in transmission neutral position N, the Telligent® gearshift will only permit selec-tion of the 1st to 4th gears or reverse gear.

!A warning signal heard when changing down indicates that the target gear is too low. To avoid overrevving the en-gine, do not engage the clutch. Select the next highest gear instead. There is a risk of engine damage.

iTo change between gear ranges L and H, e.g. when changing from 4th to 5th gear, the clutch pedal must remain depressed.

Risk of accident GIf the clutch pedal is released before a gear is selected, the transmission remains in neu-tral.

Depress the clutch pedal again within two seconds and wait until the gear is selected.

56

Getting started

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


� Press and hold down function button 1 and push gear lever forwards 2 un-til a resistance can be felt and hold in this position.

The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator.

� Wait until the selected gear is engaged.

A selection sound is heard over the central loudspeaker.

The gear engaged flashes briefly on the left in the gear indicator.







57

Getting started

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Changing gear – Telligent® gearshift

1 To shift up2 To shift down


� Guide the gear lever in the direction of gear engagement until a resistance can be felt.

The optimum gear selected by the Telligent® system flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator.


A selection sound is heard in the cen-tral loudspeaker.


� Release the gear lever.


Pulling away – Telligent® automatic gearshift


M Manual mode

A Automatic mode

� Press automatic mode A on the driving mode selector switch.

The driver information system shows auto in the multi-function display.

58

Getting started

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Press function button 1.

� Push gear lever 2 forwards.

Telligent® automatic gearshift engages a suitable gear.The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator and then changes to the left position.

� Release the parking brake and slowly depress the accelerator.

The vehicle pulls away.




iIf a gear is selected when the auxiliary consumer reservoir pressure Œ is too low, a system fault will result. The engine must be stopped and restarted.


59

Getting started

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Changing gear Accelerating

� Depress the accelerator pedal.

When the maximum speed is reached for the driving situation and the gear engaged, Telligent® automatic gear-shift selects the next highest optimum gear.

Decelerating

� Release the accelerator pedal.

� Slowly depress the brake pedal.

Telligent® automatic gearshift changes down to the optimum gear.

Light switch

M Lights off

B Dipped-beam headlamps on

� Turn the light switch to B.


Risk of accident GIf the engine speed drops below 550 rpm, Telligent® automatic gearshift will switch off. This could lead to critical driving situa-tions when driving up or downhill. Do not let the engine speed drop below 550 rpm.

Switching on the headlamps

60

Getting started

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Main-beam headlamps

� Switch on the lights.

� Push the combination switch on the left of the steering column forwards and engage.

The A main-beam headlamps indi-cator lamp lights up in the instrument panel.

The combination switch can be found on the left of the steering column.

Combination switch

1 To indicate a right turn2 To indicate a left turn

Indicating a right turn

� Engage combination switch in position 1.

The / right turn signal indicator lamp flashes in the instrument panel.

If a trailer is attached, the right-hand ( trailer/semitrailer indicator lamp also flashes.

Indicating a left turn

� Engage combination switch in position 2.

The & left turn signal indicator lamp flashes in the instrument panel.

If a trailer is attached, the left-hand ) trailer/semitrailer indicator lamp also flashes.

Indicating a turn

61

Getting started

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The combination switch can be found on the left of the steering column.

To switch the windscreen wipers on/off

Switching the windscreen wipers on

� Turn rotary switch to the required posi-tion depending on the intensity of the rain.

Ä Windscreen wipers off

5 Intermittent wipe

Æ Normal wipe

Ç Rapid wipe

È Windscreen washer system

Single wipe

� Turn the rotary switch briefly towards the steering column up to the pressure point.

The windscreen wiper wipes once with-out windscreen washer fluid.

Wiping with windscreen washer fluid

� Turn the rotary switch to the stop to-wards the steering column and hold in this position.

Washer fluid will be sprayed onto the windscreen as long as the rotary switch is in the rearmost position.


Windscreen wipers iCheck at regular intervals that the wip-er blades are clean and undamaged.

62

Getting started

Parking and closing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Parking and closing

1 Released position2 Fully-applied position3 Test position

� Swing lever out of released position 1 to fully-applied position 2.

� Press lever downwards, swing into test position 3 and hold.

The vehicle must not move. If the brak-ing force of the spring actuators on the towing vehicle is not sufficient to hold the vehicle, chock the wheels as an ad-ditional safety measure.

� Allow lever to swing back from test po-sition 3 to fully-applied position 2 and engage in this position.

The ! parking brake indicator lamp lights up in the instrument panel.

Applying the parking brake

Risk of accident GThe braking efficiency of the parking brake may not be sufficient on uphill or downhill gradients to prevent the laden vehicle from rolling away. In the test position, check whether the braking force of the spring actu-ators is adequate to hold the vehicle. If nec-essary, the vehicle's wheels should be chocked as an additional safety measure.

The vehicle could start moving spontane-ously. Always check that the lever has en-gaged correctly in the fully applied position, or else it may move back automatically to the released position.

63

Getting started

Parking and closing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Brake the vehicle.

� Depress the clutch pedal fully.

� Shift the transmission into neutral.

� Hold the vehicle using the service brake or the parking brake (� see page 62).

� Release the clutch pedal.


� If necessary, change down a gear.


� Press neutral button on gear lever.

N flashes on the right in the gear indica-tor.

Telligent® gearshift engages neutral.

� Hold the vehicle using the service brake or the parking brake (� see page 62).



Telligent® automatic gearshift disen-gages automatically just before the idle speed is reached.

Automatic mode (A):

When the vehicle is stationary, a pull-away gear is selected.

Stopping – Hydro-pneumatic gearshift

iWhen the transmission is in neutral, the gear lever is in the gate between 3rd and 4th gear, or between 5th and 6th gear.

Stopping – Telligent® gearshift Stopping – Telligent® automatic gearshift

Risk of accident GThe vehicle could roll away with the engine running and a gear engaged. Telligent® au-tomatic gearshift disengages automatically when the idle speed is reached.

Always hold the vehicle using the service brake or the parking brake when you stop.

��

64

Getting started

Parking and closing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Stopping the engine – Telligent® auto-matic gearshift

� Stop the vehicle.

� Apply the parking brake (� see page 62).

� Press neutral button 1 on the gear le-ver.


Telligent® gearshift engages neutral.

� Switch off the engine.

� Leave engine running for approximate-ly one to two minutes at idle if

� the coolant temperature is above 95 °C

� it had been run at maximum output, e.g. uphill.

� Release the accelerator pedal.


� Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock.


iManual mode (M):

When the vehicle is stationary, the se-lected gear remains engaged.

Risk of accident GA parked vehicle could roll away as the Telligent® automatic gearshift always en-gages neutral position once the engine has been switched off. You cannot park the vehi-cle with a gear engaged. Always hold the ve-hicle using the parking brake.

Stopping the engine

65

Getting started

Parking and closing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1 Interior door handle

� Pull interior door handle 1 to open door

Left-hand door

1 To unlock2 To lock

The radio remote control will work regard-less of the direction in which it is pointed.

It is also possible to unlock the vehicle from some distance. To avoid theft, the ra-dio remote control should only be used in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.

The radio remote control

� Locks the driver's and co-driver's door centrally

� Locks the side windows automatically on vehicles with enhanced central lock-ing system

� Locks the sliding/tilting sunroof auto-matically on vehicles with enhanced central locking system, depending on the position of the lock switch

Opening the door from the inside

iA locked door can always be opened from the inside using the interior door handle.

Locking with the key

iThe driver's and co-driver's door al-ways lock simultaneously.

Locking using the radio remote control

��

66

Getting started

Parking and closing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Activates/deactivates the anti-theft alarm system.



� Press ‹ locking button 1 for ap-proximately one second.

The driver's and co-driver's door will lock.

The turn signals will flash 3 times.

Vehicles with enhanced central locking system:

� Opened side windows close automati-cally.

� The sliding/tilting sunroof closes auto-matically, depending on the position of the lock switch.

� Vehicles with anti-theft alarm system: The anti-theft alarm system is activat-ed.


Risk of injury GTake care when closing the power windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof that nobody becomes trapped in them.

Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving for a short time. Children or unauthorised persons could otherwise start the vehicle.

Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open a locked door from the inside and endanger themselves and others.

iTurn signals only flash if the locking procedure is successful.

67

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Safety

Occupant safety

General

Driving safety systems

Underride guard

68

Safety

Occupant safety

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Occupant safety

This section describes the most important aspects of the restraint systems of the ve-hicle.

Depending on the vehicle equipment level, the restraint systems consist of:

� seat belts

� belt tensioners

� airbag

Seat belts, belt tensioners and the airbag are supplementary restraint systems whose protective functions complement one another.

Always fasten your seat belt before start-ing off. Airbags and belt tensioners will only be able to perform their protective function if the occupants are wearing their seat belts properly.

Restraint systems iThe driver's airbag and belt tensioners are always installed together in a vehi-cle.

Risk of injury GDo not modify components of the restraint systems or interfere with restraint system wiring. The belt tensioners or airbag could be triggered accidentally or fail to function and therefore no longer protect in the event of an accident.

Replace the following items

� seat belts

� belt tensioners

� airbags

if these have been subjected to a load in an accident. The restraint systems should be checked and replaced if necessary if they have been subjected to a load or damaged in an accident.



69

Safety

Occupant safety

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Seat belt

Wearing seat belts is a legal requirement in many countries – observe the legal re-quirements in all countries concerned.

Regardless of such requirements, all occu-pants should wear a seat belt for every journey.

Information about wearing seat belts can be found in the "Getting started" section (� page 46).

This information applies only to seat belts fitted at the plant in which the vehicle was manufactured.

Inertia reel – How it works

The inertia reel will prevent the belt strap from being pulled out further if

� the vehicle is decelerated suddenly in any direction and

� if the belt is pulled out sharply

Seat belt warning system

Optional extra


A warning buzzer will sound for approx-imately 10 seconds if the driver's seat belt is not engaged.

iThe locking action of the inertia reel can be checked by pulling sharply on the belt.

Risk of injury GAlways fasten your seat belt before starting off. Airbags and belt tensioners will only be able to perform their protective function if the occupants are wearing their seat belts properly.

Seat belts which have been subjected to a heavy load in an accident must be replaced.



70

Safety

Occupant safety

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Belt tensioners

In an impact, the belt tensioner tightens the belt to pull it close to the body thus op-timising the protective function of the seat belt.

Driver's airbag

The airbag offers additional protection against injury and complements the pro-tective functions of the belt tensioner and seat belt.

The airbag is located beneath the padded boss of the steering wheel.Risk of injury G

Damage or accident-related stress to the re-straint system (seat belt, anchor points, belt tensioner or airbag) may mean that the sys-tem will not be able to provide the protec-tion for the occupants. For this reason, damage or accident-related stress to re-straint systems should be inspected imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop and, if necessary, the system should be re-placed.


Risk of injury GAirbags and belt tensioners will only be able to perform their protective function effec-tively if the occupants are wearing their seat belts properly and are sitting properly.

Because the airbag inflates in a matter of milliseconds, there is a risk of serious injury or death.

71

Safety

Occupant safety

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Risk of injury GTo reduce the risk of serious or fatal injury caused by inflation of the airbag in milli-seconds, observe the following:

� Choose a seat position that allows you to sit as far back from the airbag as pos-sible, but still allows you to drive the ve-hicle safely.

� Only hold the steering wheel by the rim. Do not lean over the padded boss of the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion or when the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. This allows the air-bag to inflate fully.

� Do not cover the padded boss of the steering wheel or affix badges or stick-ers to it. Otherwise correct functioning of the airbag cannot be guaranteed.

� Because the airbag inflates in a matter of milliseconds, there is a high risk of in-jury.

� Severe injuries could be caused by be-ing very near the point where the airbag is triggered.

� Do not touch any parts of the airbag once it has been triggered. Parts of the airbag could be hot.

Correct operation of the airbag module is no longer guaranteed after 15 years of service. For safety reasons, the airbag module should be replaced after 15 years at the lat-est.



If you sell the vehicle, you should pass the Operating Instructions on to the new owner. The buyer or others would otherwise not be aware of and be able to reduce the risks of injury.

72

Safety

Occupant safety

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Function of airbag and belt tensioner

The airbag and belt tensioners are only op-erational once the key has been turned to position 2 in the ignition lock.

The airbag and belt tensioners will be trig-gered from a certain degree of vehicle de-celeration, e.g. in a frontal collision.

The seat belt will tension automatically so that the strap is close to the body.

iAlthough smoke is released, this neither constitutes a health hazard nor implies that fire has broken out in the vehicle.

Risk of injury GTo reduce the risk of serious or fatal injury caused by inflation of the airbag in millisec-onds, observe the following:

� Choose a seat position that allows you to sit a far back from the airbag as pos-sible, but still allows you to drive the ve-hicle safely.

� Ensure that small children are kept away from the airbag inflation point as serious or fatal injuries could otherwise result.

73

Safety

General

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� General

e.g. telephone, two-way radio, fax ma-chine, etc.

Navigation system

Risk of accident GStop the vehicle to enter data into the navi-gation system. Attention would otherwise be drawn away from the traffic.

The navigation system is unable to take ac-count of the load-bearing capacity of bridg-es or the permissible headroom in tunnels or under bridges. The driver is responsible for ensuring that bridge load-bearing capacities and maximum headroom capacities are not exceeded.

iObserve the legal requirements in all countries concerned.

Operation of audio and mobile communication equipment

Risk of accident GOperate the audio or mobile communication equipment only when road and traffic condi-tions permit. Attention would otherwise be drawn away from the traffic.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle is covering a distance of some 50 feet (ap-proximately 14 m) every second.

iIn the Federal Republic of Germany it is forbidden to use mobile telephones without a permanently installed hands-free system while the vehicle is in mo-tion or while the engine is running.

Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned.

74

Safety

General

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Operation and retrofitting of mobile te-lephones, two-way radios and fax ma-chines

Risk of accident GOperating mobile telephones, two-way radi-os and fax machines that have an aerial in-side the vehicle can lead to malfunctions in the vehicle's electronic systems.

As a result, the operating reliability and vehi-cle safety are considerably jeopardised.

Only use the telephone with a permanently installed hands-free system and if the traffic conditions allow it. Attention would other-wise be drawn away from the traffic.

iIn the Federal Republic of Germany it is forbidden to use mobile telephones without a permanently installed hands-free system while the vehicle is in mo-tion or while the engine is running.

Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned.

When retrofitting

� mobile telephones

� two-way radios

� fax machines

the relevant installation specifications issued by Mercedes-Benz are to be ob-served. Contravention of these specifi-cations could invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit (EU Directive 95/54/EC).

!Bank cards, credit cards or other cards with magnetic strips should not be kept near the telephone bracket and loud-speaker.

If a magnetic strip is kept in the vicinity of this equipment, the data stored on the card could be deleted or modified.

75

Safety

General

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Safety requirements

Specialist knowledge is required for serv-ice and repair work to the air conditioning. For this reason, such work should only be carried out by a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Tyres

Risk of accident GTyres age from the influence of sunlight and the environment. The rubber of the tyre gradually loses its elasticity. Tyres become harder and more brittle and they begin to split through age.

Tyres more than six years old are no longer safe for use.

Replace the tyres, irrespective of wear, after six years at the latest. This also applies to the spare wheel.

Checking the age of tyres (� page 390).

Air conditioning

Risk of injury GLeaking refrigerant from the air conditioning can cause frostbite. Avoid all contact with refrigerant. If refrigerant comes into contact with the skin, consult a doctor immediately.

!If the air conditioning is damaged in an accident, do not switch the system on. This could result in damage to the air conditioning system.

Have the air conditioning system checked.

The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work re-quired. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in par-ticular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

76

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Driving safety systems

The following driving safety systems are described in this section:

� Telligent® brake system (BS) with ABS

� Telligent® brake system (BS) with ABS and ASR

� Telligent® stability control (SR)

� Telligent® roll control

� Lane assist (SPA)

� Reversing warning

ABS prevents the wheels from locking when the brakes are applied. The vehicle thus remains steerable.

It is operational from walking pace, regard-less of road surface conditions.

iDuring the winter, the best perform-ance is only attained from the driving safety systems in conjunction with M+S tyres (winter tyres).

Risk of accident GThe risk of an accident is higher:

� at high speeds, especially when corner-ing

� on wet or slippery road surfaces

� if a safe distance is not kept from the ve-hicle in front

The driving safety systems are unable to overcome the laws of physics. For this rea-son, adapt your driving style to current road and weather conditions.

Anti-lock braking system (ABS)

77

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The Telligent® brake system features all the control functions of ABS, ASR and SR. The Telligent® brake system ensures par-ticularly good braking efficiency with an even shorter braking distance. The Telligent® brake system can detect emer-gency braking situations via the integrated brake assist system. To conserve the wheel brakes, the Telligent® brake system can also employ the vehicle's engine brake/retarder, depending on the laden weight of the vehicle and the weather con-ditions.

Function check

Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. The multi-function display will light up for approximately two seconds. At the same time, the warning buzzer sounds.

Function check of brake systems

1 ABS on tractor vehicle2 ABS on tractor vehicle and ABS

on trailer/semitrailer

Telligent® brake system (BS) iThe Telligent® brake system imparts control over the trailer that results in the vehicle and trailer/semitrailer au-tomatically contributing to the braking effort of the entire vehicle and trailer combination in accordance with their weight. This means the vehicle and trailer combination has improved brak-ing characteristics. On 4 x 2 vehicle and semitrailer combinations, the Telligent® brake system monitors the temperature of the wheel brakes.

��

78

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The multi-function display will then show:

� ABS on tractor vehicle

or

� ABS on tractor vehicle and ABS on trailer/semitrailer

Risk of accident G� If there is no display or

� the display does not go out after three seconds or

� the display does not go out when the ve-hicle pulls away,

anti-lock protection is not guaranteed. The vehicle cannot be steered if the wheels lock during braking. The vehicle could skid due to locked wheels. The vehicle can still be slowed down using the normal brakes. Drive with particular care. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible.



79

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Event messages

Vehicles with Telligent® brake system (BS)

Risk of accident GAn event message with a yellow status indi-cator means the braking characteristics could be affected. Drive with particular care.

Have the brake system checked and re-paired as soon as possible by a qualified specialist workshop.


Risk of accident GAn event message with a red status indica-tor means the braking characteristics are af-fected.

� The pedal travel and pedal force re-quired to brake the vehicle/vehicle and trailer combination may be increased.

� The anti-lock function may be deactivat-ed.

The vehicle can still be slowed down using the normal brakes. Drive with particular care. Have the brake system checked and repaired immediately by a qualified special-ist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Cen-tre as it has the necessary specialist knowl-edge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

80

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicles with Telligent® brake system (BS)

An event message from the tractor vehicle brake system is shown by the multi-func-tion display with:

� function restriction

� instructions

� fault location and

� system abbreviation "BS"

or

� without function restriction

� without instructions

� but with fault location and

� system abbreviation "BS"

At the same time, the status indicator will light up yellow or red.

Tractor vehicle BS event message (example)

1 System abbreviation2 Status indicator (yellow or red)3 Function restriction4 Instructions5 Fault location

L Tractor vehicleA Trailer/semitrailer

iMalfunctions in the Telligent® stability control (SR) are shown by the multi-function display as a Telligent® brake system (BS) event message.

81

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

An event message from the trailer or semi-trailer brake system is shown by the multi-function display:

� with fault location and

� the system abbreviation "ABS trailer/semitrailer"

� or for trailer/semitrailer and electro-pneumatic brake system with the sys-tem abbreviation "EAB".

At the same time, the status indicator will light up yellow or red.

"ABS/EBS trailer" event message with ABS fault message (example)



"EBS trailer" event message (example)



82

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To drive the tractor unit without semitrailer or with semitrailer without ABS:

� Insert the connector of connecting ca-ble in the "blank socket".

To drive the tractor vehicle with a semitrail-er having ABS or electronic trailer brake:

� Remove connector of connecting cable from empty socket and insert in trailer socket.

Semitrailer tractor vehicle (example)

Semitrailer tractor vehicle (example)

1 Blank socket2 ABS/BS connector, 7-pin

Memory function of Telligent® brake system (BS)

When the key is turned to position 2 in the ignition lock and there had been a dynamic fault in the Telligent® brake system the last time the vehicle was driven, an event message will indicate this.

Brake system memory function (example)



83

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Excessive wheel brake temperature

4 x 2 semitrailer tractor vehicles

An event message with yellow status indi-cator will indicate excessive temperatures in the wheel brakes.

1 Excessive wheel brake temperature event message

2 Status indicator (yellow)

� Drive with particular care. Adapt driv-ing style and try to use the continuous brake (exhaust brake/retarder) to brake the vehicle where possible.

Once the wheel brake temperature drops back below the critical level, the display will go out.

iThe system is unable to detect and dis-play increases in temperature caused by defects in the wheel brakes (seized calliper, reduced air gap etc.).

Risk of accident GAn event message with a yellow status indi-cator means the braking characteristics could be affected. Drive with particular care.

84

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Braking with anti-lock protection

In an emergency, apply full pressure to brake pedal. This guarantees optimum de-celeration of the vehicle.

If the multi-function display shows the event message

� ABS on trailer/semitrailer

or

� ABS on tractor vehicle and ABS on trailer/semitrailer

the anti-lock protection for the trailer/ semitrailer or for the tractor vehicle and trailer/semitrailer is not operational.

Risk of accident GIf a trailer/semitrailer without ABS is at-tached, this could be over-braked if the brakes are applied fully. There is a danger that control over the vehicle could be lost. Avoid applying brakes fully unless it is an emergency to prevent the wheels of the trailer/semitrailer from locking.

The BS or ABS anti-lock braking systems do not relieve you of the responsibility for adopting a driving style which suits traffic and road conditions. True running and steer-ability of the vehicle/vehicle and trailer combination under braking is improved. The anti-lock protection is not capable, however, of overcoming the laws of physics and can-not protect against the consequences of not keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front or excessive speed when cornering, for instance.

85

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

If ABS is switched off, it may be possible to achieve shorter stopping distances on rough terrain and on unmade roads (e.g. soft or extremely corrugated surfaces and on downhill slopes).

Risk of accident GIf the multi-function display shows just the event message "ABS trailer/semitrailer", there is a danger of the trailer/semitrailer over-braking.

There is a danger of control over the vehicle being lost if full braking effort is applied. Avoid applying brakes fully unless it is an emergency to prevent the wheels of the trailer/semitrailer from locking.

Vehicles without Telligent® automatic gear-shift: On a slippery road surface, declutch as well so that the ABS control system is not af-fected by the engine braking effect.

iThe continuous brake switches itself off automatically during ABS interven-tion. The b indicator lamp does not go out.

ABS deactivation

Risk of accident GThe vehicle could skid due to locked wheels.

If ABS is switched off, the wheels may lock and skid under braking. The vehicle cannot be steered if the wheels lock during braking.

ABS must always be switched on when driv-ing on public roads.

86

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1 ABS OFF switch

Deactivating ABS

1 Display for tractor vehicle ABS off2 Status indicator (yellow)3 Display for tractor vehicle and trailer/

semitrailer ABS off

� Press upper section of switch 1.

ABS is deactivated.

The multi-function display shows trac-tor vehicle ABS off.

On trailers/semitrailers with EBS, the multi-function display shows tractor vehicle and trailer/semitrailer ABS off.

At the same time, the status indicator will light up yellow.

iOn vehicles with ABS deactivation:

Deactivate ABS for off-road travel.

The next time the engine is started, ABS is automatically activated.

Switch ABS off again for off-road driv-ing.

iThe "Tractor vehicle and trailer/ semi-trailer ABS off" display is only available on trailers/semitrailers with EBS

87

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Reactivating ABS


ABS is reactivated.

The display in the multi-function dis-play must go out.

Acceleration skid control prevents the drive wheels from spinning when the vehi-cle pulls away or during acceleration, re-gardless of the road conditions.

1 ASR OFF switch

Activating ASR


The v ASR indicator lamp in the in-strument panel lights up and then goes out after two seconds.

Acceleration skid control (ASR)

Risk of accident GIf the ASR is switched off and the wheels slip, the vehicle could skid.

Acceleration skid control does not relieve you of the responsibility of driving the vehi-cle in a manner which suits road and traffic conditions.

If the indicator lamp does not go out, have ASR checked. ��

88

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Driving with ASR

If the drive wheels start to spin on one or both sides of the vehicle, ASR switches it-self on automatically.

The v ASR indicator lamp lights up in the instrument panel.

� If the drive wheels spin on one side, ASR brakes them automatically.

� If the drive wheels spin on both sides, ASR automatically reduces engine power output.

Vehicles with two driven rear axles: On a slippery road, engage the "inter-axle" differential lock (� page 253).

Risk of accident GThe maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.


!During the winter, the best perform-ance is only attained from ASR in con-junction with winter tyres.

If traction problems occur when the ve-hicle is driven with chains or driven on loose ground (e.g. sand or gravel), switch off acceleration skid control.

89

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Deactivating ASR

1 ASR OFF switch


ASR is deactivated. The v ASR indi-cator lamp in the instrument panel will flash.

Reactivating ASR

� Press upper section of switch 1 again. ASR is activated. The v ASR indica-tor lamp in the instrument panel will go out.

iCruise control or the cruise control continuous brake cannot be activated during skid control.

If cruise control was already switched on, it will remain active. It is not possi-ble to accelerate or decelerate using the cruise control function.

90

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

4 x 2 semitrailer tractor vehicles

Telligent® stability control only operates within physical limitations. In critical driv-ing situations, such as sudden evasive ma-noeuvres or increased speed in corners, it reduces skidding, jack-knifing or tipping of the semitrailer. This is independent of the load condition of the semitrailer or the type of road surface.

Handling characteristics

Understeering

The vehicle moves off the correct path 1 over the front axle to the outer edge of the carriageway 2.

Path correction (understeering)

1 Intended2 Actual

Oversteering

The vehicle breaks away through the rear axle. Moving off the intended path 3, the vehicle turns toward the inner edge of the carriageway 4.

Path correction (oversteering)

3 Intended4 Actual

Telligent® stability control (SR)

iTelligent® stability control is operation-al regardless of whether or not the service brake and continuous brake are engaged.

91

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Activating SR


The v SR/ASR indicator lamp lights up and should go out after two seconds. This indicates that Telli-gent® stability control is active.

Deactivating SR

1 SR OFF switch


The stability control and acceleration skid control functions are deactivated.

The v SR/ASR indicator lamp in the instrument panel will flash.

Reactivating SR

� Press upper section of switch 1 again.

The stability control and acceleration skid control functions are active.

The flashing SR/ASR indicator lamp v in the instrument panel will go out.

Driving with SR

Telligent® stability control is an extension of the Telligent® brake system (BS), which already incorporates both ABS and ASR.

iWhen the key is turned to position 2 in the ignition lock, Telligent® stability control is activated automatically.

92

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

If Telligent® stability control recognises a critical driving situation, the following au-tomatic control interventions will stabilise the tractor and trailer combination:

� Reduction in engine power output

� Targeted intervention in the brake sys-tem on each wheel of the tractor vehi-cle individually

� Actuation of the semitrailer brake sys-tem

� Braking of the entire vehicle and trailer combination

iDuring automatic control, the v SR/ASR indicator lamp in the instru-ment panel will light up.

Risk of accident GTelligent® stability control does not relieve you of the responsibility of driving the vehi-cle in a manner appropriate to the loading of the vehicle and the road and traffic condi-tions. Stability control is not capable, for ex-ample, of overcoming the laws of physics and cannot protect against the consequenc-es of the semitrailer vehicle being driven at excessive speed in corners.

Excessive speed in corners could lead to control over the vehicle being lost. There-fore, brake the vehicle in good time when approaching corners, so that there is no danger when cornering.

93

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

SR event message

Telligent® stability control messages are shown by the multi-function display as a Telligent® brake system (BS) event mes-sage.

At the same time, the multi-function dis-play indicates any function restriction and the status indicator lights up yellow.

Telligent® stability control is then deacti-vated.

iTelligent® stability control is only ac-tive when the vehicle is moving at a speed of at least 6 mph (10 km/h). If reverse gear is engaged, stability con-trol will be deactivated.

!During the winter, the best perform-ance is only obtained from Telligent® stability control in conjunction with M+S tyres (winter tyres).

Switch off Telligent® stability control if traction problems occur when driving with snow chains or on loose surfaces (e.g. sand and gravel).

Telligent® stability control is automati-cally deactivated:

� if there is a malfunction in Telligent® stability control

� if there is a malfunction in Telligent® brake system which af-fects Telligent® stability control.

Risk of accident GExcessive speed when cornering could lead to control over the vehicle being lost. Drive with particular care. Therefore, brake the ve-hicle in good time when approaching cor-ners, so that there is no danger when cornering.

94

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Acknowledging event message

� Press the ÿ or è button on the multi-function steering wheel.

or

� Press the º button on the instru-ment panel.

The message is cleared. The system abbreviation is shown in the reminder section.

!Have Telligent® stability control in-spected.



iIf the cause of the malfunction is not rectified when the engine is started again, the event message is shown again in the multi-function display.

95

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

4x2 and 6x2 vehicles with steel/air-sprung front axle and air-sprung rear axle:

Telligent® roll control controls the chassis suspension electronically. Depending on the laden weight of the vehicle, the driving situation and the road properties, the chassis suspension regulates itself auto-matically.

When driving,

� rolling movements of bodies with a high centre of gravity e.g. box bodies, are reduced

� safety in critical driving situations is in-creased, e.g. lane change or sudden evasive manoeuvres

� ride comfort is improved on poor road surfaces

� Telligent® roll control is gentle on sen-sitive freight

� pitching movements are reduced when the vehicle pulls away or brakes

Telligent® roll control (WR) iMalfunctions in Telligent® roll control are shown in the multi-function display. An event message in the multi-function display is indicated by the system ab-breviation HM.

96

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Lane assist is a convenience system which continuously monitors the position of the vehicle in relation to the roadside markings through a camera behind the windscreen.

If the road lane markings are driven on or crossed, an audible warning in the form of a "rumble strip" noise will sound in the left-hand or right-hand cab loudspeaker.

1 "Lane assist" camera

Risk of accident GIf there is a Telligent® roll control event message, the risk of the vehicle tipping over in corners is increased. The suspension's damping characteristics may be affected. Drive with particular care. Slow down in particular when approaching corners. Telligent® roll control should be repaired as soon as possible.



Lane assist

97

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Risk of accident GLane assist is merely a tool to assist the driv-er. When driving, you are responsible for keeping the vehicle on the correct lane and in the correct direction.

Lane assist can only give a warning when the road lane markings are driven over or crossed if these are easily detectable.

Active Lane assist will not give a warning if:

� the speed of the vehicle is below 40 mph (60 km/h)

� a turn signal is on

� the vehicle is decelerating

Risk of accident GAdverse weather conditions, such as:

� snow

� slush

� heavy rain

� and a very dirty windscreen

can impair the function of Lane assist. You should therefore switch on the windscreen wiper, for example, to keep the area around the camera free from dirt.

Risk of accident GNote that the function of Lane assist is lim-ited:

� if the lane markings are difficult to de-tect (e.g. if the road is covered by snow, sand or debris)

� if there are shadows or several markings on the road (e.g. roadworks)

� when the main-beam headlamps are switched on

� in tight corners

98

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Switching on Lane assist

1 Lane assist switch



Lane assist is activated.

The indicator lamp in the switch lights up. A brief crackling noise will be heard from the loudspeakers in the cab.

Switching off Lane assist


Lane assist is deactivated.

The indicator lamp in the switch will go out.

iIf Lane assist was already activated be-fore the engine was started, the crack-ling noise will be heard as the engine is started.

The radio is automatically muted when a Lane assist warning is being given.

iIf a Lane assist warning is not possible, the f "Lane assist" indicator lamp will light up in the instrument panel.

99

Safety


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The reversing warning1 is an audible warn-ing device built into the rear lamp cluster of the vehicle. The reversing warning is ac-tivated and emits a warning tone when re-verse gear is engaged.

1 Reversing warning

Reversing warning

1. Legal requirement in Austria

Risk of accident GThe reversing warning does not relieve you of your duty to make sure that there are no persons/obstacles behind the vehicle.

If necessary, a second person should assist during manoeuvring.

100

Safety

Underride guard

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Underride guard

The underride guard can be folded up for off-road journeys, for example.

Underride guard (example)

1 Unlocked2 Locked

Underride guard (example)

1 Unlocked2 Locked3 Folded down4 Folded up

Folding underride guardRisk of accident GThe underride guard must be folded down and locked in this position when the vehicle is driven on public roads. Only this way can a vehicle be prevented from becoming jammed beneath the frame in the event of a collision.

101

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Controls in detail

Opening and closing

Seats and berths

Starting and stopping the engine

Brakes

Lighting

Instrument panel

Driver information system

Gear selection

Driving

Driving systems

Good visibility

Climate control

Open-air

Features

102

Controls in detail

Opening and closing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Opening and closing

The "Controls in detail" section contains detailed information about the functions of the vehicle.

Do not read this section until you are fully conversant with the basic functions of the vehicle.

You can read about the basic functions in the "Getting started" section.

Opening and closing doors

Risk of accident and injury GOnly drive with the doors properly closed. If you open or close the doors while the vehi-cle is in motion there is a risk of injury.


Do not leave children alone in the vehicle. They could open a locked door from the in-side and endanger themselves and others.

iIf you unlock the vehicle using the radio remote control, you must open one of the doors within 25 seconds. Other-wise the electronics system relocks the vehicle.

A locked door can always be opened from the inside using the interior door handle.

Before the vehicle can be locked, all doors must be closed. The lock-out pro-tection prevents opened doors from being locked.

103

Controls in detail

Opening and closing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicle key

The vehicle is equipped with a special key system. You can only start the engine us-ing the keys coded to the vehicle.

Included with the vehicle are two keys.

Locking/unlocking driver's door

Unlocking/locking doors using the key

Left-hand door

1 unlocked2 locked

iWhen you unlock the vehicle using the radio remote control, the interior light lights up for approximately ten seconds. The interior light goes out when the key in the steering lock is turned to po-sition 1. If a door is open, the interior light goes out after approximately five minutes.

When pressing the buttons of the radio remote control, always hold for approxi-mately one second. This avoids mal-functions.

iIf a key is lost, obtaining a replacement is a time-consuming process which only a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can perform for you.

For this reason, DaimlerChrysler recom-mends that you always keep an easily accessible spare key with you for emer-gencies.

Central locking

104

Controls in detail

Opening and closing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Exterior door release mechanism

� To open the door, pull the door handle on the outside.

You can lock and unlock the vehicle cen-trally via the door lock switch in the control panel of the driver's and co-driver's door.

This is useful, for example, to unlock the co-driver's door from inside or to lock the vehicle before driving off.

Door lock switch in driver's door

To lock

� Press switch 1.

Indicator lamp 2 in the switch goes out.

All doors must be closed. The vehicle locks centrally.

Unlocking

� Press switch 3.

Indicator lamp 2 in the switch flashes.

The vehicle unlocks centrally.

iUnlockingOnly the driver's and the co-driver's door can be opened using the key.

To lockThe driver's and co-driver's door al-ways lock simultaneously.

Unlocking/locking doors using the "Door lock" switch i

Vehicles with anti-theft alarm system:

If the vehicle was locked from the out-side, the anti-theft alarm system is ac-tivated if switch 3 is pressed.

105

Controls in detail

Opening and closing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1 Interior door handle

� To open the door, pull door handle 1 on the inside.

Included with the vehicle are:

� two keys

� two radio remote controls

Unlocking/locking doors using key

The locking and unlocking function is the same as on vehicles with central locking (� page 103).

� To activate the anti-theft alarm system at the same time, hold the key in the locked position for longer than two seconds.

The vehicle is locked. The turn signals flash 3 times1.The anti-theft alarm system is primed.

Opening the door from inside

iA locked door can always be opened from the inside using the interior door handle.

Central locking with anti-theft alarm system

1. Great Britain: and the horn sounds briefly.

iIf there is no visual confirmation, the anti-theft alarm system is activated but at least one of the components that are monitored is not in an operational con-dition and is not being monitored.

106

Controls in detail

Opening and closing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Locking and unlocking doors using the radio remote control

Unlocking driver's door


The turn signals flash once1.

The anti-theft alarm system is deacti-vated.

Unlocking driver's and co-driver's door




Locking driver's and co-driver's door

� Press the ‹ button once.

Driver's and co-driver's door locks.

The turn signals flash 3 times.

The anti-theft alarm system is primed.

Included with the vehicle are

� two keys

� two radio remote controls

The enhanced central locking system is an extension of the central locking system.


The vehicle should be locked using the key in the same way as any standard central locking system (� page 103).

If you lock a vehicle with enhanced central locking system, the following also have to be closed

� the driver's and co-driver's door win-dows

� the sliding/tilting sunroof


iThe turn signals only flash if the locking procedure is successful. If there is no confirmation from the turn signals1, not all components/vehicle access points monitored by the anti-theft alarm sys-tem are in the ready position (� page 111).

1 Great Britain: and the horn sounds briefly

Enhanced central locking system

107

Controls in detail

Opening and closing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The enhanced central locking system is only effective if

� the key in the steering lock is in position 0 or removed

� you lock or unlock the vehicle using the key in the driver's door or if you use the radio remote control

� both doors are closed


The vehicle should be locked using the key in the same way as any standard central locking system (� page 103).

Convenience opening

� Hold key in driver's door lock for longer than three seconds in the "unlock" po-sition.

� The driver's door unlocks

� The turn signals flash once1

� The side windows open

� The sliding/tilting sunroof moves into the raised position

Locking and unlocking the doors using the radio remote control

Unlocking the driver's door




Unlocking driver's and co-driver's door




iThe power windows feature protection against entrapment.

The closing function is interrupted if an object prevents the side window from closing fully.

The sliding/tilting sunroof remains open if the closure lock is activated be-fore you lock the vehicle (� page 341).


iWhen you release the key, the side win-dows and the sliding/tilting sunroof stop moving.

108

Controls in detail

Opening and closing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Locking driver's and co-driver's door



The driver's and co-driver's door lock.

Opened side windows close automati-cally.

The sliding/tilting sunroof closes auto-matically, depending on the position of the lock switch.

The turn signals flash three times1.

Vehicles with anti-theft alarm system:The anti-theft alarm system is primed.

Sliding/tilting sunroof closure lock

� Before locking, select position of sliding/tilting sunroof on closure lock switch.

1 Closure lock switch


iTurn signals only flash if the locking procedure is successful.

iProtection against entrapment feature in power windows.

Opened windows close automatically when the vehicle is locked. The closing function is interrupted if an object pre-vents the side window from closing ful-ly.

109

Controls in detail

Opening and closing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Activating

� Press the upper section of the P closure lock switch.

The indicator lamp in the switch lights up.

The next time the vehicle is locked, the sliding/tilting sunroof remains open.

Deactivating

� Press the upper section of the P closure lock switch.

The indicator lamp in the switch should go out.

The sliding/tilting sunroof closes when the vehicle is locked.

The radio remote control works regardless of the direction in which it is pointed.

It is also possible to unlock the vehicle from some distance. To avoid theft, the ra-dio remote control should only be used in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.

The radio remote control

� Unlocks the driver's and co-driver's door in succession

� Locks the driver's and co-driver's door centrally

� Closes the side windows automatically on vehicles with the enhanced central locking system

� Closes the sliding/tilting sunroof automatically on vehicles with the en-hanced central locking system, de-pending on the position of the closure lock

� Activates/deactivates the anti-theft alarm system




��

110

Controls in detail

Opening and closing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Press and hold locking/unlocking but-ton for approximately one second.

Loss of a radio remote control

If a radio remote control is lost, a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can pre-vent further use by deactivating all of the radio remote control units.

� Be prepared to hand over all available radio remote control units to the Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for re-coding.

The vehicle can then only be locked/ unlocked with the recoded radio re-mote control units.

iIf you unlock the vehicle using the radio remote control and none of the doors are opened within 25 seconds, the ve-hicle locks itself again automatically.

Risk of injury GWhen closing the power windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof, ensure that nobody becomes trapped in them.

iThe driver information system shows when the battery in the radio remote control needs to be replaced.

Replacing the battery (� page 534).

111

Controls in detail

Opening and closing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The anti-theft alarm system protects the tractor vehicle and the attached trailer/ semitrailer against break-in and theft.

The activated anti-theft alarm system trig-gers an optical and acoustic alarm if:

� a door is opened

� the maintenance flap is opened

� the cab is tilted

� a stowage compartment is opened on the driver's or co-driver's side

� a connecting cable to the trailer or semitrailer is disconnected

� the driver's door is unlocked using the "Lock door" switch in the driver's door control panel if the vehicle was locked from the outside

� the voltage supply is interrupted due to the battery terminal clamps being un-done, for example.

� supply to the anti-theft alarms is inter-rupted

� the panic switch in the cab interior is pressed

� a signal is set off by sensors fitted by the body manufacturer.

To activate the anti-theft alarm system with monitoring of all sensors, the follow-ing must be observed:

� Only those components that were in the ready position, i.e. locked or at-tached, when the alarm was activated will trigger an alarm.

The anti-theft alarm system only moni-tors closed or attached components.

The turn signals1 confirm the locking procedure with activated anti-theft alarm system only when all compo-nents are in the ready position.

On vehicles with enhanced central locking system, the side windows close first and then the sliding/tilting sun-roof before the turn signals confirm completion of the locking procedure.

� It is possible to place a component in the ready position up to ten seconds after the anti-theft alarm system has been activated. The anti-theft alarm system then monitors this component.

� The anti-theft alarm system cannot monitor trailers or semitrailers with LED tail lamps.The multi-function display shows Trailer cannot be monitored!.

Anti-theft alarm system

1. Great Britain: and the horn sounds briefly

112

Controls in detail

Opening and closing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Anti-theft alarm system for vehicles for the transport of hazardous goods

The functional differences in the anti-theft alarm system are listed as follows:

� If the anti-theft alarm system is activat-ed and the voltage supply is interrupted via the emergency-off switch, an alarm sounds.

� If the voltage supply has been inter-rupted via the emergency-off switch, the anti-theft alarm system cannot be activated as the anti-theft alarm sys-tem will then sound an alarm.

� Lock the vehicle using the key in the driver's door to prevent an alarm.

Do not hold the key in the locked position for longer than one sec-ond. The anti-theft alarm system is not primed.

Activating or deactivating the anti-theft alarm system from outside the vehicle

To lock the vehicle centrally and to activate or deactivate the anti-theft alarm system:

� the radio remote control or

� the key (in driver's door only)

should be used.

Activating using the key

� When locking the vehicle, hold key in the locked position for approximately two seconds.

Vehicles with enhanced central locking system: opened side windows and sliding/tilting sunroof close automati-cally.

The vehicle locks and at the same time the anti-theft alarm system is activat-ed.

Deactivating using the key

� Unlock the vehicle by turning the key to the unlock position (� page 103).

The vehicle is unlocked. The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.

iThe key in the ignition lock must be in the 0 position or removed.

113

Controls in detail

Opening and closing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Deactivating using the radio remote control


All turn signals and the indicator lamp in the anti-theft alarm system switch flash once1.


Activating using the radio remote control


Vehicles with enhanced central locking system:Opened side windows close automati-cally.

The driver's and co-driver's door lock.

The turn signals flash three times1.

The indicator lamp in the anti-theft alarm system switch flashes if all mon-itored components are in the ready po-sition.

The anti-theft alarm system is activat-ed.


iIf none of the doors are opened within 25 seconds,

� the vehicle locks itself again auto-matically

� the anti-theft alarm system that was previously deactivated is acti-vated once again

114

Controls in detail

Opening and closing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Anti-theft alarm system indicator lamp

The indicator lamp in anti-theft alarm sys-tem switch 1 indicates to the driver the status of the anti-theft alarm system in its various stages of operation.

1 Anti-theft alarm system switch

If the anti-theft alarm system is activated: The indicator lamp in switch 1 flashes.

If the anti-theft alarm system is deactivat-ed:The indicator lamp in switch 1 is off.

Activating or deactivating the anti-theft alarm system from inside the vehicle

If the anti-theft alarm system is switched on from inside the vehicle, it can only be switched off in this way.

Activating from inside the vehicle

� Press the upper section of switch 1 once.

The anti-theft alarm system is activat-ed.

The indicator lamp in switch 1 flash-es.

Both doors lock at the same time.

Deactivating from inside the vehicle

� Press the upper section of switch 1 once.


The indicator lamp in switch 1 goes out.

iVehicles with immobiliser:

If you activated the anti-theft alarm system from inside the vehicle, you can deactivate it by starting the engine.

The prerequisite is that the immobiliser can recognise the key.

115

Controls in detail

Opening and closing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The multi-function display indicates

� a malfunction

� an alarm source that is not in the ready position (closed or attached) when the anti-theft alarm system is activated from inside the vehicle (� page 111).

The event message indicates the alarm sources to be checked and, if necessary, an instruction on what to do.

Anti-theft alarm system event message (example)

1 Alarm source2 Instructions

Anti-theft alarm

If an alarm is activated, all turn signals and the dipped-beam headlamps flash and the alarm sounds.

After a predetermined period of approxi-mately five minutes, the alarm switches off.

The acoustic alarm switches off after ap-proximately 30 seconds.

After the anti-theft alarm system is deacti-vated, the multi-function display shows an alarm message when the ignition key is turned to position 1 in the steering lock.

116

Controls in detail

Opening and closing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The multi-function display shows the source of the alarm or the reason it was ac-tivated.

The message must be acknowledged by the driver.

� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel.

Alarm message (example)

1 Source or reason why alarm was acti-vated

Cancelling the alarm

If an alarm is activated, it is possible to cancel it by:

� Unlocking the vehicle using the radio remote control

� Pressing the Œ button once.

� Unlocking the vehicle using the key in the driver's door

� Turn the key in driver's door to the "unlock" position and hold for two seconds (� page 103)

� If the alarm system has been activated from inside the vehicle:

� Press the upper section of the anti-theft alarm system switch in the switch panel once (� page 114)

Panic alarm

You can activate the panic alarm at any time by pressing the anti-theft alarm sys-tem switch.

If the alarm is activated, all turn signals and the dipped-beam headlamps flash and the alarm horn sounds1.

1 Anti-theft alarm system switch

iIf more than one alarm was set off, the multi-function display shows the first alarm.

1. Great Britain: If the alarm is activated, only the alarm horn sounds.

117

Controls in detail

Opening and closing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Activating

� Press the lower section of anti-theft alarm system switch 1 once.

The panic alarm is activated.

Both doors lock.

On vehicles with enhanced central locking system: Both side windows close.

To release

� Press the lower section of anti-theft alarm system switch 1 once.

The panic alarm switches off.

The doors remain locked.

The anti-theft alarm system maintains its previous status.

iThe closing function is interrupted if an object prevents a side window from closing fully.

Risk of injury GTake care when closing the power windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof that nobody becomes trapped in them.


Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open a locked door from the inside and endanger themselves and others.

iThe panic alarm switches off automati-cally after a maximum of 30 seconds. The optical alarm terminates after a maximum of five minutes. During this period, the doors remain locked and the anti-theft alarm system maintains its previous status.

118

Controls in detail

Seats and berths

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Seats and berths

The vehicle may be equipped with different types of seats depending on the equip-ment level.

Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.

Seats

Risk of accident and injury GAdjust the driver's seat only when the vehi-cle is stationary and with the parking brake applied. The movement of the seat could otherwise lead to you losing control over the vehicle and causing an accident.

Adjusting the seat while driving would also divert your attention away from the road and traffic conditions.

Ensure, when adjusting the seat, that you select a relaxed position that does not pro-mote body fatigue.

The seat catches must audibly engage.

Make sure that none of the occupants or you yourself become caught in the seat when it is being adjusted.

Ensure that all occupants have secured their seat belts before commencing any journey (� page 46).

Before exiting the vehicle, lower the suspen-sion seat fully, otherwise the seat could rise and trap your legs between the steering wheel and the seat.

!Vehicles with upper berth:To avoid damage to the berth and seats.

� Fold up the berth before adjusting the seat (� page 121).

� Move the backrest forwards before folding down the berth.

iAdjust backrest into vertical position, if possible.

Set the distance to the pedals so that you can comfortably depress them ful-ly.

With both hands on the steering wheel, the arms should be slightly bent.

Adjust height adjustable head re-straints so that the back of the head is supported approximately at eye level.

Do not operate several control ele-ments for seat adjustment at the same time.

To prevent noises while driving, the co-driver's seat should be fully lowered if it is not being used.

119

Controls in detail

Seats and berths

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Seat adjustment, driver's suspension seat

Further information can be found in the "Getting started" section (� page 41).

Seat adjustment, co-driver's function seat (example)

1 Backrest adjustment lever2 Seat cushion

Adjusting the backrest

� Sit down on the seat and pull the ad-justment lever 1 upwards.

The backrest moves forwards.

� Apply or release pressure to/from backrest to adjust backrest to desired position.

� Release adjustment lever.

Folding up the seat cushion

� Push seat cushion 2 towards the backrest until the seat cushion audibly engages (click).

Folding down the seat cushion

� Push seat cushion 2 towards the backrest again until the seat cushion audibly disengages.

� Fold down seat cushion 2.

120

Controls in detail

Seats and berths

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Centre seat head restraint

Head restraint

1 Safety retainers

Removing the head restraint

� Pull the head restraint up to the stop.

� Simultaneously press in and hold the retainers 1.

� Pull the head restraint sharply up and out.

Installing head restraints

� Insert head restraint in guides.

� Push head restraint down to the stop.The head restraint locks in place auto-matically.

� Adjust to the desired position.

Risk of injury GOnly drive the vehicle with head restraints fitted so that occupants are protected against critical injuries should an accident occur.

Adjust the head restraints so that they sup-port the back of the head at approximately eye level. This reduces the risk of injury to the head and neck area in case of an acci-dent or similar situation.

121

Controls in detail

Seats and berths

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Folding the berth up

1 Belt buckles

� Fold berth up and hold in place,

� Push the securing belt tongues 1 into the belt buckles until they audibly en-gage,

� If necessary, adjust the seats back into position.

Folding the berth down (sleeping position)

2 Belt buckle release button

Upper berth

Risk of injury GOnly use the berth when the vehicle is sta-tionary. It is forbidden for anyone to be in or on the upper berth while the vehicle is in motion.

Do not drive the vehicle unless the berth has been folded up and is secured by the belts.

When folding the berth in/out, take care to ensure that your fingers do not get trapped between the parts of the berth.

iBefore adjusting the seats, fold the up-per berth up. When doing this, avoid damage to the berth and the backrest.

iTo prevent damage to the berth and seats, ensure that there is enough space for the upper berth before it is folded down. Move the backrests of the driver's and co-driver's seats forward.

��

122

Controls in detail

Seats and berths

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Lift berth up slightly, hold in place and press the red release button of the belt latches 2,

� Release securing belt,

� Fold the berth down.

Upper berth access step

The access step is there to assist you in ac-cessing the upper berth and is integrated in the instrument panel.

1 Release lever

Folding out the access step

� Press against access step and then re-lease.

The access step folds out and engages audibly.

Folding in the access step

� Push release lever 1 downwards.Push access step down onto stop.

� Take hand away from release lever 1.

Lower berth

Risk of injury GA person on the lower berth should be se-cured in place with the restraint system when the vehicle is in motion.

When folding the berth in/out, take care to ensure that your fingers do not get trapped between the parts of the berth.

123

Controls in detail

Seats and berths

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Lower berth restraint system

Use when the vehicle is in motion

� Hook restraint system 2 in eye 1 on cab roof.

Recliner

The recliner seat in the single cab is not de-signed to be used permanently as a co-driver's seat. However, for exceptional cases, it can be used as a seat for passen-gers.

Recliner

iThe covers for the stowage compart-ments can be found beneath the mat-tress (� page 348).

��

124

Controls in detail

Seats and berths

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Lower berth with two-part mattress

1 Swivel bar

Conversion to berth

� Fold backrest of co-driver's seat down towards the seat cushion,

� Position swivel bar 1 vertically and engage downwards,

� Fold up 1/3 part of mattress onto backrest.

Conversion to recliner

� Fold 1/3 part of mattress onto 2/3 part,

� Pull swivel bar 1 upwards vertically, release and fold up towards the back-rest,

� Set up backrest towards cab backwall.

Risk of injury GMake sure, before commencing any journey, that the person occupying the recliner seat has his/her seat belt applied (� page 46).

When converting the recliner into a berth, make sure that no one can become caught in the seat.

When the seat is being used as a berth, the person occupying it must be secured by:

� the seat belt (� page 122)

� the locked backrest securing bar

when the vehicle is in motion.

125

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Starting and stopping the engine

The immobiliser prevents the engine from being started by unauthorised persons.

You can only start the engine using the keys supplied with the vehicle.

The vehicle is equipped with a special key system.

Activating the immobiliser

� Remove the key from the ignition lock.

The immobiliser electronics are activat-ed.

Deactivating the immobiliser

� Turn the key in ignition lock to position 2. Hold in position 2 for approximately 0.5 seconds.

If the immobiliser recognises the coded key, the immobiliser switches off. The engine can be started.

For the waiting period, the key must be in position 2 in the steering lock.

Immobiliser

iIf you do not hold the key in position for the specified duration or an incorrect key is used, the multi-function display shows CODE.

If five unsuccessful attempts are made with an incorrect key, the waiting peri-od is extended by one minute every time the key is used in an attempt to start the engine.

iAfter four unsuccessful attempts, it may be necessary to use the spare key.

Slowly turn the key. Wait briefly (approximately 0.5 seconds) in between positions 2 and 3 in the steer-ing lock.

If a key is lost, obtaining a replacement is a time-consuming process which only a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can perform for you.

For this reason, DaimlerChrysler rec-ommends that you always keep an eas-ily accessible spare key with you for emergencies.

126

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicles used for the transportation of haz-ardous goods:

Vehicles used for the transportation of haz-ardous goods are equipped with two emer-gency-off switches. The switches are intended to allow isolation of the power supply and to prevent spark generating short circuits that could set off a fire or ex-plosion.

The following components are supplied with electricity even if the isolation switch has been pressed:

� Tachograph

� Anti-theft alarm system

ADR emergency-off switch iIf the voltage supply is interrupted by actuation of the emergency-off switch if the anti-theft alarm system is active, the anti-theft alarm system sounds an alarm. Ensure the anti-theft alarm sys-tem is deactivated before interrupting the power supply using the emergency-off switch.

Risk of accident GThe switch interrupts the power supply to all main electrical consumers.

The engine switches off automatically.

The following have no function:

� Power steering

� Vehicle lighting

� Anti-lock protection

� Electronic gear selection

The vehicle can no longer be kept under con-trol.

Only operate the emergency-off switch if there is imminent danger and the vehicle is stationary. It must never be operated while the vehicle is in motion.

127

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Emergency-off switch in cockpit

The switch is located in the cockpit on the left or right-hand side next to the heater control panel.

1 Emergency-off switch (example)

Activating

� Fold cover upwards.

� Remove switch pin 1.

All electrical consumers apart from the tachograph and the anti-theft alarm system are isolated from the power supply system.

Deactivating

� Push down cover until it audibly engag-es.

The voltage supply for all electrical con-sumers is reinstated.

128

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Emergency-off switch on outside of vehicle

The switch is on the co-driver's side behind the cab.

1 Emergency-off switch

Activating

� Open cover,

� Push lever 1 upwards.

All electrical consumers apart from the tachograph and the anti-theft alarm system are isolated from the power supply system.

Deactivating

� Push down cover until it audibly engag-es.

The voltage supply for all electrical con-sumers is reinstated.

129

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

At low ambient temperatures, the flame-start system makes it possible to quickly and easily start the engine.

The electronics system activates the flame-start system at a temperature below –4 °C as soon as the ignition lock is in position 2. The q indicator lamp in the instrument panel shows that the flame-start system is being primed.

When the engine has been started, the sys-tem remains active until the coolant tem-perature is at 0 °C.

Flame-start system

Environmental note HThe advantages of the flame-start system are:

� Optimal combustion which leads to

� A considerable reduction in harmful ex-haust emissions while the engine is warming up

� Avoidance of poor cold running proper-ties

� Less load on battery and starter

iAt coolant temperatures above –4 °C, the q indicator lamp lights up to show the function check of the flame-start system.

!The electronic system switches the flame-start system off initially

� if you start the engine while the q indicator lamp is on.Do not start the engine until the in-dicator lamp has gone out.

� if you do not start the engine within 30 seconds after the q indica-tor lamp has gone out.Activate the flame-start system again before starting the engine.

130

Controls in detail

Brakes

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Brakes

The parking brake is designed to prevent a parked vehicle from rolling away. It actu-ates the spring-loaded cylinders.

Applying (� page 62) or releasing (� page 52) parking brake.

The hillholder is an extension of the Telligent® brake system and offers pulling away assistance.

� When pulling away on hills, the hillhold-er prevents the vehicle from rolling backwards

� When reversing up gradients, the hill-holder prevents the vehicle from rolling forwards

Activating hillholder

1 Hillholder switch

� Press the upper section of hillholder switch 1.The hillholder is primed but not active.

� Bring the vehicle to a halt using the brakes.The hillholder is active automatically. The k hillholder indicator lamp lights up in the instrument panel.

Parking brake

iTrailer/semitrailer parking brake, see manufacturer's operating instructions.

Trailer/semitrailer with EU brake sys-tem:If the trailer is attached, the parking brake also has an effect on the service brakes of the trailer/semitrailer.

Hillholder

131

Controls in detail

Brakes

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Deactivating hillholder

When you drive off in your vehicle, the hill-holder is deactivated automatically. The k hillholder indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes out.

Switching off hillholder

� Press the lower section of hillholder switch 1.The k hillholder indicator lamp goes out and the function of the hill-holder is deactivated.

iAs long as you maintain even the slight-est of pressure on the brake, clutch or accelerator pedal, the hillholder re-mains active.

Risk of accident GIf none of the pedals are pressed when the hillholder is active (accelerator, clutch or brake pedal), a warning buzzer sounds brief-ly. The hillholder is deactivated and the k hillholder indicator lamp in the instru-ment panel goes out. The vehicle could roll away unintentionally.

iThe hillholder remains primed as long as upper section of switch 1 is latched.

When you apply the parking brake, the k hillholder indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes out. The hill-holder function is no longer active but remains in the primed state.

132

Controls in detail

Lighting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Lighting

Information about switching on lights and turn signals (� page 59).

Light switch

iThere may be a slight deviation in the function of the light switches described here due to legal requirements in all countries concerned.

M Lights off

C Side lamps, switch illumination

B Dipped or main-beam head-lamps on

¥ Front foglamp indicator lamp (green)

¨ Rear foglamp indicator lamp (yellow)

iIn countries where traffic drives on the side of the road opposite to that which is normal in the country where the vehi-cle was registered, there is a danger of oncoming vehicles becoming dazzled due to the symmetry of the dipped-beam headlamps.

For journeys in these countries, mask the headlamps (� page 517).

133

Controls in detail

Lighting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Depending on the laden state of the vehi-cle, the focus of the dipped-beam head-lamps can rise or fall. Always adjust the headlamp range control in such a way that oncoming vehicles are not dazzled.

Reducing headlamp range

� Turn thumbwheel from position 0 downwards until the dipped-beam headlamps no longer dazzle oncoming vehicles.

Setting headlamp range to neutral

� Turn thumbwheel to position 0.

With dipped-beam headlamps on:

� Pull light switch out onto first stop.

The ¥ green indicator lamp in the light switch lights up.

Headlamp range control Switching on the front foglamps

134

Controls in detail

Lighting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Switching on rear foglamps

With dipped-beam headlamps and front foglamps on:

� Pull light switch out onto second stop.

The ¨ yellow indicator lamp in the indicator lamp lights up.

The combination switch is located to the left of the steering column.

Indicating change of direction (� see page 60).

1 Main-beam headlamps2 Headlamp flasher

Switching on main-beam headlamps

� Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.

� Turn the light switch to position B.

The dipped-beam headlamps are on.

� Push the combination switch in direc-tion 1 onto detent.

The A main-beam headlamp indica-tor lamp in the instrument panel lights up.

Headlamp flasher

� Pull the light switch in direction 2.

Combination switch

135

Controls in detail

Lighting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The light switch unit is equipped for vari-ous lighting functions. The light switch unit is located on the left next to the multi-func-tion steering wheel.

1 Work-area lamp2 Load compartment light3 Rotating beacon lamp4 Headlamp cleaning system

Work-area lamp

Switching on

� Press the upper section of switch 1 1.


Switching off

� Press the upper section of switch 1 1.

The indicator lamp in the switch goes out.

Load compartment light

Switching on


� Press the upper section of switch 2 F.


Switching off

� Press the upper section of switch 2 F.


Light switch unit

iThe work-area lamp switches off auto-matically if the vehicle accelerates.

136

Controls in detail

Lighting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1 Work-area lamp2 Load compartment light3 Rotating beacon lamp4 Headlamp cleaning system

Rotating beacon lamp

Switching on


� Press the upper section of switch 3 D.


Switching off

� Press the upper section of switch 3 D.


Headlamp cleaning system


� Press the upper section of switch 4 Y.

The headlamp cleaning system sprays washer fluid onto both headlamps for approximately 0.3 seconds.

137

Controls in detail

Lighting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The hazard warning lamps will still operate if the steering lock is in position 0.

1 Hazard warning lamp switch

Switching on hazard warning lamps

� Press switch 1.

The indicator lamp in the hazard warn-ing lamp switch, the turn signal indica-tor lamps in the instrument panel and all turn signals on the vehicle flash.

Switching off hazard warning lamps

� Press switch 1 again.

The indicator lamp in the hazard warn-ing lamp switch, the turn signal indica-tor lamps in the instrument panel and all turn signals on the vehicle go out.

Hazard warning lamps

138

Controls in detail

Lighting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

In the vehicle interior there are four differ-ent types of lighting:

� Interior lighting

� Reading lamp

� Nightlight (green)

� Ambient lighting (blue)

The different modes of lighting can be switched on and regulated individually.

Interior lighting switches

Switch unit above windscreen

1 Ambient lighting2 Driver's reading lamp3 Interior lighting4 No interior lighting when door open5 Nightlight

Co-driver's door control panel

3 Interior lighting6 Co-driver's reading lamp

Interior lighting

iIf the voltage supply drops below 22 V, the electronics system switches the in-terior lighting off.

139

Controls in detail

Lighting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Berth switch unit

3 Interior lighting7 Central interior lighting off switch

Switching on interior lighting

� Briefly touch switch 3 U.

Switching lighting on when vehicle is in motion


The electronics system switches the in-terior lighting on with reduced bright-ness.

Dimming interior lighting

� Hold down switch 3 U.

The brightness is reduced. Dimming continues for as long as the switch is held down. Once dimming is reduced to the minimum level, the function is re-versed. Brightness increases.

iFrom a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h), the electronics system dims the cab lighting.

When you open a door, the interior and entry lights light up. The lighting goes out after approximately 30 minutes, even if one of the doors is still open.

iThe level of brightness can be adjusted while the vehicle is motion.

140

Controls in detail

Lighting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Switching off interior lighting


The interior lighting goes out.

or

� Press switch 7 I in berth switch unit.

Activating "no interior lighting when door open" function

If the interior and entry lights are to remain off when the doors are opened:

� Press and hold switch 4 L in the switch unit above the windscreen until a brief signal sounds.

Deactivating "no interior lighting when door open" function

� Press and hold switch 4 L in the switch unit above the windscreen until a brief signal sounds.

Driver's and co-driver's reading lamp

The switch for the driver's reading lamp 2 S is located in the switch unit above the windscreen. The switch for the co-driv-er's reading lamp 6 S is located in the control panel of the co-driver's door.

iWhen you start the engine, the interior lighting switches on by the door open-ing, is switched off by the electronics system.

iIf you switch the interior lights on be-fore opening the door, they remain on.

141

Controls in detail

Lighting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Switching on reading lamp

� Briefly touch switch 2 S or 6 S.

The respective reading lamp lights up.

Dimming reading lamp

� Press and hold switch 2 S or 6 S.


Switching off reading lamp

� Briefly touch switch 2 S or 6 S.

The respective reading lamp goes out.

Nightlight (green)

The nightlight or green light is dazzle-free and intended to aid orientation while the vehicle is in motion.

Switching on the nightlight

� Press switch 5 Q in the switch unit above the windscreen.

The nightlight lights up.

Switching off nightlight

� Press switch 5 Q in the switch unit above the windscreen.

The nightlight goes out.

142

Controls in detail

Lighting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Ambient lighting (blue)

The ambient lighting is intended for the ve-hicle when it is parked.

Switching on ambient lighting

� Briefly touch switch 1 O in the switch unit above the windscreen.

Dimming ambient lighting

� Press and hold switch 1 O in the switch unit above the windscreen.


Switching off ambient lighting

� Briefly touch switch 1 O in the switch unit above the windscreen.

The ambient lighting goes out.

143

Controls in detail

Lighting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The instrument lighting consists of the in-strument panel lighting and switch illumi-nation.

Dimming instrument lighting

The degree of instrument lighting bright-ness can be adjusted using the æ and ç buttons in the instrument panel.

Brighter

Press and hold the æ button until re-quired degree of brightness has been achieved.

Darker

Press and hold the ç button until re-quired degree of brightness has been achieved.

Reading lamp

Switching on

� Turn switch cover to position 1.

Switching off

� Turn switch cover to position 2.

Instrument lighting Adjustable reading lamp

144

Controls in detail

Instrument panel

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Instrument panel

Depending on the country, the speed and distance travelled are recorded in miles or kilometres.

Resetting the trip meter

� Press and hold button the Í button in the instrument panel until the trip meter is reset to zero.

1 Trip meter2 Total distance recorder

The rev counter shows the engine speed. The scale is split into three areas.

Total distance recorder Rev counter

145

Controls in detail

Instrument panel

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Economical operating range

Operation of the vehicle in the economical range has the following effects

� low fuel consumption

� low wear and tear

In some exceptional circumstances, opera-tion outside the economical range may be necessary, for example:

� on gradients

� when overtaking

Econometer

Several segments of the econometer light up depending on the how much the engine is placed under load. This range indicates the most economical rev range in terms of fuel consumption.

The econometer is active

� at speeds above 12 mph ( 20 km/h)

� if the relation between the engine speed and the selected gear does not appear to be correct at an almost con-stant speed

The econometer does not light up

� if the engine speed is at an economical level in terms of fuel consumption

� if the speed drops below 6 mph (10 km/h)

� Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gearshift:In the automatic mode of operation

1 Green Economical operat-ing range

2 Yellow Engine brake oper-ating range

3 Red Overrevving range

4 Green diode strip

Econometer

iOn vehicles that are used predominant-ly for long distance driving, the rev counter features an econometer.

!Avoid overrevving range.

This could lead to engine damage.

146

Controls in detail

Instrument panel

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The econometer goes out

� two seconds after the engine has reached the displayed speed range

� if high output is requested from the en-gine

� if the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than five seconds

� if neutral is selected at the transmis-sion for longer than five seconds.

Driving with the econometer

If the engine speed is higher than the eco-nomical speed range indicated:

� select a higher gear.

If the engine speed is lower than the eco-nomical speed range indicated:

� select a lower gear.

147

Controls in detail

Instrument panel

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The display in the rev counter can show the outside temperature in two temperature scales.

� Degrees Celsius (°C)

� Degrees Fahrenheit (°F)

Changing the unit of measurement for temperature (� page 205).

1 Outside temperature display

Outside temperature displayRisk of accident GEven if the outside temperature display shows temperatures that are just above freezing point, the roads could still be icy. This applies in particular to shaded areas or bridges.

Extreme temperature changes are not shown in the outside temperature display immediately. This prevents an incorrect reading as a result of the engine heat when the vehicle is stationary or moving slowly.

iExtreme temperature changes are not shown in the outside temperature dis-play immediately. This prevents an in-correct reading as a result of the engine heat when the vehicle is station-ary or moving slowly.

148

Controls in detail

Instrument panel

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The display in the rev counter can show the time in two different ways depending on requirement.

� 12 hour mode

� 24 hour mode

Changing clock mode (� page 206).

1 12 hour clock mode

The fuel gauge shows the quantity of fuel in all fuel tanks of the vehicle.

If the fuel volume drops to 14% of the max-imum level, an event message is shown in the multi-function display indicating this.

Time Fuel gauge

149

Controls in detail

Instrument panel

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The instrument shows the pressure in the brake circuit with the least amount of pres-sure. The brake circuit in question is shown by an active indicator lamp.

If the reservoir pressure in one of the brake circuits drops below 6.8 bar, an event message is shown in the multi-function dis-play indicating this. 1 Brake circuit indicator lamp 1

2 Brake circuit indicator lamp 2

The reservoir pressure of both brake cir-cuits can be called up in the monitoring info menu (� page 162).

iThe volume of fuel in litres and the dis-tance that can be travelled with that amount of fuel can be called up in the driver information system in the trip computer menu (� page 166).

Reservoir pressure for brake circuits 1 and 2

150

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Driver information system

The driver information system is activated when the key in the ignition lock is in position 2.

The driver information system features the following functions:

Page

Information about vehicle operation

� Digital speedometer 160

� Monitoring info 161

� Trip computer 166

Control functions

� Navigation system

� Operating audio equipment 359

� Mobile telephone 350

� Reading Fleetboard® text message

169

� Auxiliary heating 177

� Wakeup call 178

Page

Maintenance

� Viewing/confirming service due dates

171

Settings

� Display configuration 183

� Activating menu 183

� Monitoring load 189

� Clock 197

� Service products 198

� Changing units of measure-ment

205

Page

Changing language 182

Transmission control back up mode

189

Diagnostics 207

Display of malfunctions – Event message

175

151

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The driver information system shows all in-formation in the multi-function display. If necessary, this information may be accom-panied by acoustic signals.

The driver information system features var-ious menus.

There are several functions combined in each of the menus under the main catego-ry. In the Audio menu, for example, there are functions for operating the radio or the CD player. In the Monitoring info menu, all the main information dealing with oper-ation can be called up. In the Settings menu, all functions are found for making adjustments to the display and for the ve-hicle.

Risk of accident GUse the driver information system only if the traffic situation permits it. Attention would otherwise be drawn away too much.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle is covering a distance of some 50 feet (ap-proximately 14 m) every second.

Structure iThe number of menus depends on

� the equipment level of the vehicle

� whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion

� which additional menus in the Set-tings menu, sub-menu Configura-tion have been activated

152

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Driver information system menus

153

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Menu Page

1 Actros info 160

2 Monitoring info 161

3 Trip computer 166

4 Navigation

5 Audio 169

6 Telephone 169

7 New SMS message (Fleetboard®)

169

8 Maintenance 171

9 Event info 175

a Auxiliary heating 177

b Alarm 178

c Language 182

Menu Page

d Settings 183

� Configuration 184

� Load 189

� Time 197

� Service products 198

� Units 205

e Transmission control 207

f Diagnostics 207

� MB item number 209

� Events 210

� Binary values1

1 For service personnel only

213

� Measured values1 213

154

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The user guidance at the top of the multi-function display shows where you are in the driver information system and which steering wheel buttons should be used for navigation.

� The name of the menu 3 is shown in the centre of the multi-function display

� The number 13 2 to the left of the menu name shows that the Settings menu is the 13th in the driver informa-tion system

� The number 1 5 to the right of the menu name shows that the list is the first display/function in the Settings menu

1 Symbol for steering wheel è and ÿ buttons

2 Menu number3 Menu name4 Symbol for steering wheel j and

k buttons5 Display/function number6 Symbol for steering wheel æ and

ç buttons

User guidance iIf the multi-function display shows the symbol ? 6, you can make a selec-tion or adjustment using the + and - buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. However, volume con-trol using the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel is then no long-er possible.

The quantity and numbering of the menus can differ depending on the ve-hicle equipment level.

155

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

System navigation

The structure of the driver information sys-tem is circular.


The display shows the next menu.

� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly.

Each time the button is pressed, the display shows the next menu until it re-turns to the start of the loop.

Menu navigation

The structure within the menus is usually circular as well.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel.

The driver information system shows the next function or item of informa-tion.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly.

Each time the button is pressed, the multi-function display shows the next function until it returns to the start of the loop.

iIn the Settings, Language and Diag-nostics menus, a menu list is displayed instead of the functions.

You can navigate in the menu list using the + and - steering wheel but-tons. The multi-function display shows the ? symbol next to the menu list.

156

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The multi-function display is split up into set areas. The gear indicator is always dis-played. All other displays show the func-tion of a vehicle system or information that is shown automatically by the driver infor-mation system.

Multi-function display Function Page

1 User guidance 154

2 Digital speed display 160

3 Level control display 186

4 Gear indicator1

1 Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift and Telligent® automatic gearshift

219

5 Reminder with system symbol

160

Function Page

6 Differential lock display 185

Starting-off aid switched on display (6x2 vehicles)

296

Starting-off aid switched on display (6x2/4 vehi-cles)

297

Hendrickson leading axle raised display

297

Trailing axle raised display (vehicles with pneumatic suspension)

298

Nummek axle raised dis-play (vehicles with pneu-matic suspension)

299

7 Cruise control/Limiter/ART display

267

157

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

If there are malfunctions on the vehicle, the driver information system informs the driver with an event message. The back-ground colour of the message indicates the degree of importance in terms of oper-ational and road safety of the vehicle. The driver must acknowledge this message (� page 159). If more than one message is displayed, the driver information system shows the messages in succession.

If the malfunctions are serious, a warning buzzer and a STOP lamp may accompany the event message.

� Rectify faults before starting a journey.

Event message with red status displayEvent messageRisk of accident GIf the STOP lamp lights up, the operational and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardised

� Bring the vehicle to a halt in all cases

� Stop the engine

When bringing the vehicle to a halt, take the traffic situation into consideration.

Risk of accident GThe operational and road safety of the vehi-cle is at risk if there is a message with red status display.

� The vehicle's driving and braking char-acteristics may change

� If it is possible to continue driving, ad-just driving style respectively

Red Adjust driving style as appropri-ate or bring vehicle to a halt.

Carry out action in accordance with the event message.

Rectify fault immediately. Have affected system checked. ��

158

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Event message with yellow status display

Red The maintenance work should al-ways be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the nec-essary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in par-ticular, it is essential that mainte-nance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Continuing the journey

� may lead in some circum-stances to vehicle damage

� may mean in some circum-stances that legal require-ments are not being adhered to

Yel-low

Adjust driving style.

Carry out action in accordance with the event message.

Have the fault rectified as soon as possible.

Maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the nec-essary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in par-ticular, it is essential that mainte-nance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

!The operational and road safety of the vehicle is impaired.

� The vehicle's driving and braking characteristics may change

� Adjust driving style

159

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Event message with action to be car-ried out

1 Red status display2 System abbreviation/Symbol

(� page 208)3 Fault location

L Tractor vehicleA Trailer/Semitrailer

4 Functional restriction5 Instructions6 Reminder (� page 160)

Event message with symbol

2 Coolant temperature symbol7 Yellow status display8 Reminder

Event message for acknowledgement


or

� Press the º button in the instru-ment panel.

The message is cleared. The system abbreviation is shown in the reminder section.

iIf the fault is not rectified the next time the engine is started, the driver infor-mation system repeats the event mes-sage.

160

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Reminder

In order that the acknowledged event mes-sage is not forgotten, the driver informa-tion system shows the relevant symbol or system abbreviation in the reminder sec-tion. If there are several messages that must be displayed due to legal require-ments, the reminder function shows these one after the other in the reminder section.

Symbols:

In the Actros Info menu you can choose be-tween three different displays:

� Neutral

� Digital speed display

� Date

Digital speed display

7 Collective symbol for malfunc-tions

BS There are faults that must be displayed due to legal require-ments. Example: ABS.

iFaults that must be displayed due to le-gal requirements have a red or yellow background.

The messages stored in the reminder section can be viewed in the Event-Info menu (� page 175).

Actros Info menu

161

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Calling up the Actros Info menu

With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied


� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel continu-ally until the Actros Info menu is shown in the multi-function display.

Changing Actros Info menu display

� Call up the Actros Info menu.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel continu-ally until the multi-function display shows the desired display.

In the Monitoring info menu you can call up information which is important for the op-eration of the vehicle.

iAfter the functional check, the multi-function display always shows the menu that was last selected.

Monitoring info menu

Page

Coolant temperature 162

Reservoir pressure 162

Engine oil level 163

Axle load indicator 163

Load info 165

Trailer ID 165

Converter and clutch unit tem-perature

166

iFurther information can be called up by selecting the Monitoring info sub-menu from the Diagnostics menu.

162

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Calling up the Monitoring info menu



� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel continu-ally until the multi-function display shows Monitoring info.

Calling up the coolant temperature

� Call up the Monitoring info menu.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel continu-ally until the multi-function display shows Coolant temperature.

Calling up the reservoir pressure

1 Reservoir pressure, brake circuit 12 Reservoir pressure, brake circuit 2


� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel continu-ally until the multi-function display shows Brake pressure.

163

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Calling up the engine oil level

Engine oil level display, oil level 3.5 l


� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel continu-ally until the multi-function display shows Oil level.

Topping up engine oil (� page 418).

Calling up the axle load indicator

Vehicles with axle load measurement de-vice:

The axle load measuring device deter-mines the axle load from the pressure in the air springs when the vehicle chassis is in the driving position.

Axle load indicator

� Set chassis to driving position (� page 294).

� Switch off starting-off aid (� page 296).


� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel continu-ally until the multi-function display shows Axle load Overall.

iDo not top up engine oil unless prompt-ed to do so.

164

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Setting the axle load indicator

Level control operating unit

� Drive vehicle onto single axle weigh-bridge.


� Set chassis to driving position (� page 294).

� Call up the axle load indicator.

� Press button 3 or 4 to switch off lev-el control operating unit.

Indicator lamps 1 and 2 should not light up.

� Press

� "M1" 5 for the 1st axle

� "M2" 6 for the 2nd axle

� "Driving position" 7 for the 3rd axle

and hold.

� To increase the displayed value, press and hold the "Raise" button 8 until the displayed value equals the value indi-cated by the weighbridge.

or

� To decrease the displayed value, press and hold the "Lower" button 9 until the displayed value equals the value in-dicated by the weighbridge

iThe axle load measuring device is not calibrated nor is it a system capable of calibration. The measured data only provides an approximate guide which is not suitable for official use.

If the chassis is not in the driving posi-tion when the axle load indicator is se-lected, the arrows in the level control display flash ‘ . The multi-function display does not show the axle loads.

If there is a notable difference between the axle load indicator and the weigh-bridge results, the axle load indicator can be adjusted.

165

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Calling up the load info

Trailer or semitrailer with telematics in ac-cordance with ISO 11992 and associated sensor technology:

The multi-function display can show the following information depending on the equipment level of the trailer or semitrail-er:

� Load temperature

� Load pressure

� Fluid load volume

� Trailer ID

Trailer/semitrailer monitoring (� page 378).

Load temperature


� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows Load.

Calling up the trailer ID

Trailer or semitrailer with telematics in ac-cordance with ISO 11992:

Trailer ID


� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows Trailer ID.

iThe trailer ID is the chassis number of the trailer.

166

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Calling up the converter and clutch unit temperature

Vehicles with converter and clutch unit:

Converter temperature display


� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows WSK temperature.

In the trip computer menu you can call up the following information

Calling up the trip computer


� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows Trip computer.

Trip data

The trip data comprises:

� distance travelled in kilometres

� duration of journey in hours

� average speed in kilometres per hour

� average fuel consumption in litres per 100 kilometres

Trip computer menu

Page

� Trip data 166

� Fuel level and range 168

167

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The trip data can be viewed

� After reset – from the point at which the data was last reset (� page 167)

� After start – if the key has been re-moved from the ignition lock for longer than four hours

Trip data after start

Calling up the trip data

� Call up the trip computer.

The trip data After reset is shown in the multi-function display.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows the trip data After start.

Resetting trip data

After start, automatically

The driver information system resets the trip data After start if

� the ignition lock is in position 0 for longer than four hours or

� the key has been removed from the ig-nition lock for longer than four hours

After start, manually


� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows Trip computer, After start.

� Press the l button in the instru-ment panel and hold until the trip data is reset After start.

iA Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can alter the reset time.

168

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

After reset, manually


The multi-function display shows the trip data After reset.

� Press the l button in the instru-ment panel and hold until the trip data After reset is reset.

Fuel level and range

This function shows the following informa-tion in the multi-function display:

� current tank contents in litres

� estimated range in kilometres with cur-rent fuel level

Calling up the fuel level and range

Fuel level and range


� Press the j button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly un-til the multi-function display shows Tank contents and Range.

Quitting trip computer

� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to select the next menu.

169

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Using the functions in the audio menu, you can operate the basic functions of the au-dio equipment (� page 359).

Vehicles with hands-free system:

Using the functions in the telephone menu, you can operate the basic functions of a mobile telephone connected to a hands-free system (� page 350).

Vehicles with FleetBoard®:

The driver information system indicates in the reminder section of the multi-function display when a text message has been re-ceived by FleetBoard®. If you wish to read the text message, call it up in the new SMS menu.

Receiving several text messages

Audio menu Telephone menu

Risk of accident GOperating mobile telephones that have an aerial inside the vehicle can lead to malfunc-tions in the vehicle's electronic systems.

As a result, the operating reliability and road safety is at considerable risk.

Only use the telephone with a permanently installed hands-free system and if the traffic conditions allow it. Attention would other-wise be drawn away too much.

New SMS menu

170

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Calling up the New SMS menu



� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows New SMS.

The multi-function display shows the first page of the text message.

� Press the k button on the multi-function steering wheel.

The multi-function display shows the next page of the text message.

Deleting SMS

The last page of a text message is the prompt to delete the message.

SMS delete command

Risk of accident GThe priority is to focus your attention on the traffic conditions. Only read the text mes-sages if the traffic situation permits it.

iEach text message consists of at least 2 pages.

The last page of the text message is the prompt to delete the message.

iThe multi-function display only shows the next text message once the current text message has been deleted.

171

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Press the æ button on the multi-function steering wheel.

The selection bar is on Yes.


The driver information system deletes the current text message and displays the next one.

If no other text messages are stored in the system, the multi-function display shows: No SMS message.

or


The driver information system deletes the current text message and moves on to the next menu.

The Maintenance menu serves as a means of

� calling up the service due dates for the vehicle and the assemblies calculated by the Telligent® maintenance system

� confirming the completion of service work

Calling up the Maintenance menu

1 Item that requires service2 Item designation3 Estimated service due date4 Distance remaining

Maintenance menu

iThe multi-function display shows the service due dates in individual sub-menus in the order they are due. The number 1 in the menu list shows which sub-menu you are in.

Further service information can be found in the Diagnostics menu, in the Service Info submenu.

!If you do not keep to the service due dates, this could lead to the vehicle or assemblies becoming damaged. Al-ways keep to the schedule for service work.

172

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9



� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows the Maintenance menu.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to select the service due dates for individual items.

Service note

The Telligent® maintenance system auto-matically indicates the service due dates 14 days in advance.

Furthermore, the maintenance system in-dicates

� current service due dates

� exceeded service due dates

� particularly late service due dates in the case of the brake system

iIf the Telligent® maintenance system is unable to calculate the service due date, the multi-function display shows --.--.-- instead of the service due date.

iEach time you turn the ignition lock to position 2, the multi-function display shows the service messages for ap-proaching or current service due dates.

If you do not acknowledge a service message (� page 173), the multi-func-tion display always show it for approxi-mately 20 seconds.

Risk of accident GIf you override a service note, you could be putting the operational reliability and road safety of the vehicle at risk. There is a dan-ger of important assemblies, such as the brake system, failing due to worn parts and this could lead to an accident. Always ad-here to the scheduled service due dates.

!If the service work is not carried out at the time specified, the result could be increased wear and damage to the ve-hicle or assemblies.

173

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Approaching service due date

Current service due date

Service due date passed

Particularly late service due date (brake system)

Acknowledging service message

� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel

or

� Press the º button in the instrument panel.

In the case of an approaching, current or late service due date, the service message is cleared. ��

174

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Confirming completed service work

1 Reset button

� Call up the Maintenance menu.

� Press and hold the j or k but-ton on the multi-function steering wheel until the driver information sys-tem in the multi-function display shows the desired service due date.

Risk of accident GThere is a danger of the brake system failing as a result of worn brake linings.

Have the brake system repaired immediate-ly by a qualified specialist workshop.


The service message for a particularly late service due date relating to the brake sys-tem cannot be acknowledged using the steering wheel buttons. The service mes-sage cannot be deleted. It remains in the multi-function display.

!If you

� confirm that service work has been carried out when this is not the case, increased wear and even damage to the vehicle or assem-blies could be the result

� confirm a current or an approaching service due date, the Telligent® maintenance system recalculates the date. To avoid damage to the vehicle or assemblies, the relevant service work may need to be car-ried out immediately.

Do not confirm service work until the specified service work has been carried out.

iUse a pointed object, such as a pen to press the reset button in the instrument panel.

175

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Press and hold reset button in the in-strument panel for one second.

The driver information system resets the displayed service due date. The multi-function display shows --.--.--.

Quitting maintenance menu


The Event info menu serves as a means of selecting the events stored in the reminder section. Unlike the display of a new event, only the control unit abbreviation/ symbol and the fault location have a red or yellow background.

If the cause of the event is no longer present while you are viewing the informa-tion, the driver information system re-moves the event from the display.

Calling up the Event info menu

1 Control unit abbreviation2 Functional restriction3 Reminder4 Instructions

!Once you have confirmed a service, check whether the oil grade and viscos-ity (SAE grade) is the same as that which has been used in the assembly. If necessary, adjust the setting (� page 198).

Event info menu

176

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9



� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows Event info.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to select further events.

Quitting event info menu


Risk of accident GThe priority is to focus your attention on the traffic conditions. Only read the event info if the traffic situation permits it.

iThe driver information system shows the last acknowledged event in the multi-function display.

The number in the menu list next to the arrow symbol shows the number of events.

If there is no new event, the multi-func-tion display shows No malfunctions.

177

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicles with auxiliary heating:

The Auxiliary heating menu serves as a means of

� Checking the operating data of the aux-iliary heating

� Activating the preselected heating re-quirements

� Adjustment

� of the heating temperature

� of the heating duration and

� the remaining time of the auxiliary heating on the timer or preselected operation

Switching on auxiliary heating

Continuous heating (� page 328),

Timed heating (� page 332),

Preselected heating (� page 334).

Auxiliary heating menuRisk of fire and poisoning GThe auxiliary heating may not be used in en-closed spaces such as garages or work-shops unless there is suitable extraction, whether in timer or preselected mode, due to the risk of poisoning and suffocation.

At filling stations and tanking systems, the auxiliary heating must be switched off due to the risk of explosion.

In places where vapours or dust can accu-mulate (e.g. in the vicinity of fuel, coal, wood dust and grain stores or similar), the auxilia-ry heating must be switched off.

Vehicles for the transportation of hazardous goods: Comply with relevant safety regula-tions.

178

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Calling up the auxiliary heating menu

Operating data for auxiliary heating, prese-lect 1



� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows Auxiliary heating.

or

� Press the lower section of auxiliary heating switch è.

The multi-function display shows the cur-rent operating data depending on the se-lected mode of operation (� page 327).

There is an alarm clock function integrated in the instrument panel.

The alarm menu comprises the following:

There are three modes available:

� Off

� Radio

� BuzzerRisk of accident GThe priority is to focus your attention on the traffic conditions. Only adjust the settings on the auxiliary heating when the vehicle is stationary.

Alarm menu

Page

Setting alarm mode 179

Setting alarm time memory 180

Setting alarm time 180

179

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Calling up the Alarm menu

Alarm menu



� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows Alarm.

Setting alarm mode/switching alarm off

� Call up the Alarm menu.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows Setting alarm mode.

The selected alarm mode can be seen in the change bar.

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the desired alarm mode can be seen in the highlight.

� Radio

� Buzzer

� Off


The driver information system accepts the selected settings and continues onto the next menu.


The driver information system accepts the selected settings and continues onto the next function.

Risk of accident GThe priority is to focus your attention on the traffic conditions. Only adjust the settings on the alarm when the vehicle is stationary.

180

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Setting alarm time memory

There are two memory slots for the alarm time.

1 Alarm time memory 2

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows Set memory.

The highlight is on the selected memo-ry slot.

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel to change between the memory slots.





Setting alarm time

� Call up the alarm menu.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows Set memory.

� Press the j button on the multi-function steering wheel.

The multi-function display shows Set hour. The highlight is on hours.

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the desired hour has been se-lected in the highlight.

iIf you would like to woken up by the ra-dio, the ignition lock must be in posi-tion 1.

181

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


The multi-function display shows Set minutes. The highlight is on minutes.

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the desired minutes are shown in the highlight.





Switching off alarm

� Press any button on the multi-function steering wheel.

The alarm is turned off.

182

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The language menu serves as a means of selecting the language for the multi-func-tion display.

The following languages are available in the driver information system as standard:

� German

� English

� Language of country in which vehicle was sold

Changing language

With the vehicle stationary and the hand brake applied


� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows Language.

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the highlight is on the desired language.


The driver information system accepts the chosen language and continues onto the next menu.

Language menu iThe Language menu can only be select-ed in the multi-function display when the vehicle is stationary.

If the language for the country in which the vehicle was sold is English, only English and German are available.

Other languages can be installed in the driver information system by a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

183

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The settings menu serves as a means of

Settings menu

Page

Activating/deactivating

� Cruise control sound 184

� Differential lock permanent display

185

� Level control permanent display

186

Page

Adjusting

� Load monitoring restrictions

189

� Clock 197

� Service fluid grades 198

� Unit of temperature measurement

205

� Clock mode12 h/24 h

206

Page

Activating menus

� Diagnostics 188

� Transmission control 189

iThe settings menu can only be selected in the multi-function display when the vehicle is stationary.

184

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Calling up the Settings menu



� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows Settings.

Cruise control sound menu

The Cruise control sound menu serves as a means of activating and deactivating the acoustic signal during operation of the var-ious driving systems:

� Limiter

� Cruise control

� Telligent® distance control (ART)

Calling up the Cruise control sound menu


� Call up the Settings menu.

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the highlight is on Configura-tion.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows Cruise control sound.

185

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Activating


Deactivating

� Press the ç button on the multi-function steering wheel.

Quitting Cruise control sound menu

� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the settings and to move on to the next menu.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the settings and to move on to the next function in the configuration menu.

Telligent® distance control (� page 280).

Permanent display of differential lock and additional equipment

The Differential lock permanent display menu serves as a means of activating the display when the locks are disengaged.

The differential lock display shows opera-tion of the following equipment:

� Transfer case/through-drive lock

� Differential lock

� Power take-off

� Leading/trailing axle

1 Differential lock permanent display

186

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Selecting differential lock permanent display


� Call up the Settings menu (� page 184).


� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows Differential lock permanent display.

Activating


Deactivating


Quitting differential lock permanent display



Level control permanent display

The Level control permanent display menu serves as a means of activating the display when the level control is switched off.

The level control display shows the status and operation of the Telligent® level con-trol.

Telligent® level control (� page 290).

1 Level control permanent display

187

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Selecting level control permanent display


� Call up the settings menu.


� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows Level control permanent dis-play.

Activating


Deactivating


Quitting level control permanent dis-play menu



Arrow buttons in radio mode menu

Truckline CC30, CC70 or CD70 audio equipment:

The Arrow buttons in radio mode menu serves as a means of assigning functions to the arrow keys for radio operation (� page 362).

188

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Arrow buttons in cassette mode menu

Truckline CC30, CC70 or CD70 audio equipment:

The Arrow buttons in cassette mode menu serves as a means of assigning functions to the arrow keys for cassette operation (� page 365).

Diagnostics menu activation

Diagnostics menu activation can be select-ed using the Display diagnostics menu function (� page 207).

Calling up diagnostics menu activation




� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows Display diagnostics menu.

Activating


Deactivating


Quitting diagnostics menu activation



Diagnostics menu (� page 207).

189

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Enabling transmission control back up mode menu

Transmission control back up mode serves as a means of activating the Transmission control back up mode menu (� page 207) for Telligent® gearshift/ automatic gear-shift.

Calling up the Transmission control back up mode menu




� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows Enable transmission control backup mode.

Activating


Deactivating


Quitting Transmission control back up mode menu



Transmission control back up mode (� page 207).

Load temperature monitoring in trailer/semitrailer, min./max. temper-ature

Trailer/semitrailer telematics with load temperature monitoring system:

The menu serves as means of adjusting the thresholds for the load temperature moni-toring system.

Setting range: –125 °C to +125 °C.

The driver information system monitors the load temperature. If the temperature rises or drops, an event message indicates the deviation.

190

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Calling up the Min. temperature menu



� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the highlight is on Load.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows Min. temperature. The highlight 3 is on the lower threshold tempera-ture.

Adjusting lower threshold temperature

1 Load temperature monitoring system2 Trailer 13 Highlight

� Call up the Min. temperature menu.


The minimum temperature increases in 1° increments.


The min. temperature decreases in 1° increments.

Quitting min. temperature menu

� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to quit the setting menu.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to move on to the max. temperature menu.

iTo change the setting quickly, press and hold the appropriate button.

191

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Calling up the maximum temperature menu



� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the highlight is on Load.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Max. tem-perature.

The highlight 3 is on the upper thresh-old temperature.

Adjusting the upper threshold tempera-ture

1 Load temperature monitoring system2 Trailer 13 Highlight

� Call up the max. temperature menu.


The maximum temperature increases in 1° increments.


The maximum temperature decreases in 1° increments.

Quitting the Max. temperature menu

� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to quit the Settings menu.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the settings.


192

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Load pressure monitoring in trailer/

semitrailer, min./max. pressure

Trailer/semitrailer telematics with cargo pressure monitoring:

The menu serves as means of adjusting the thresholds for the load pressure monitor-ing system.

Setting range: 0 bar to 25 bar.

The driver information system monitors the load pressure. If the pressure rises or drops, an event message indicates the de-viation.

Calling up the Min. pressure menu



� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on Load.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Min. pressure.

The highlight 3 is on the lower thresh-old pressure.

Adjusting the lower threshold pressure

1 Load pressure monitoring2 Trailer 13 Highlight

� Call up the Min. pressure menu.

193

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


The minimum pressure increases in 0.1 bar increments.


The minimum pressure decreases in 0.1 bar increments.

Quitting the Min. pressure menu


� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to move on to the Max. pressure menu.

Calling up the Max. pressure menu




� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Max. pressure.

The highlight 3 is on the upper pres-sure threshold.

Adjusting the upper threshold

1 Load pressure monitoring2 Trailer 13 Highlight

� Call up the Max. pressure menu.


194

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


The maximum pressure increases in 0.1 bar increments.


The maximum pressure decreases in 0.1 bar increments.

Quitting the Max. pressure menu


� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting.

Liquid load volume monitoring in trailer/semitrailer, min./max. quantity

Trailer/semitrailer telematics with liquid load volume monitoring:

The menu serves as means of adjusting the thresholds for the liquid load volume mon-itoring system.

Setting range: 0 l to 128,510 l

The driver information system monitors the liquid load volume. If the volume rises or drops, an event message indicates the deviation.

Selecting the minimum volume



� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on load.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Min. quantity.

The highlight 3 is on the lower thresh-old.


195

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Adjusting the lower threshold

1 Liquid load volume monitoring2 Trailer 13 Highlight

� Call up the Min. quantity menu.


The minimum quantity increases in 2 l increments.


The minimum quantity decreases in 2 l increments.

Quitting the Min. quantity menu


� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to move on to the Max. quantity menu.

Calling up the Max. quantity menu




� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Max. quantity.

The highlight 3 is on the upper thresh-old.


196

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Adjusting the upper threshold

1 Liquid load volume monitoring2 Trailer 13 Highlight

� Call up the Max. quantity menu.


The maximum quantity increases in 2 l increments.


The maximum quantity decreases in 2 l increments.

Quitting the Max. quantity menu


� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting.


197

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Clock menu

The Clock menu is used to set the time in the rev counter.

Setting time, hours



� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on Clock.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Setting clock, hours.

The highlight is on hours.

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows the desired hour.

Quitting menu for setting clock, hours

� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to select the previous or next menu.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to select the minutes setting or the start screen for the Set-tings menu.

Setting clock, minutes

� Call up the Settings menu.

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on Clock.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Setting clock, minutes.

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel repeat-edly until the multi-function display shows the desired minutes.

198

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Quitting the menu for setting clock, min-utes


� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and select the start screen of the Settings menu or the hours set-ting.

Fluids and lubricants menu

The fluids and lubricants menu serves as means of setting the properties of the flu-ids and lubricants.

The following settings are possible:

Observe the "Fluids, lubricants and capac-ities" section (� page 569).

!If you make changes to the properties of the fluids and lubricants, the Telli-gent® maintenance system modifies the service due dates accordingly.

To avoid damage to the vehicle assem-blies, the properties specified for the fluids and lubricants must be the same as those of the fluids and lubricants ac-tually used.

Page

Fuel sulphur content/

biodiesel fuel (FAME)199

Engine oil viscosity 200

Engine oil grade 202

Transmission oil grade 203

199

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Fuel sulphur content

For operation of the vehicle, the sulphur content of the diesel in the vehicle must be entered.

A higher sulphur level accelerates the ageing process of the engine oil. The Telligent® maintenance system calculates the date for engine oil change on the basic of the sulphur level specified.

Observe "Fuel sulphur content" chart (� page 567).

Biodiesel (FAME)

Selecting fuel sulphur content display



� Press the ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the high-light is on Fluids/ lubricants.

� Press the j button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Fuel sulphur content.

!If the sulphur content entered for the fluid/lubricant is not the same as the sulphur content of the fuel used, there is a danger of the engine becoming damaged.

!If you use biodiesel (FAME), you must select FAME in the fluids and lubricants/ fuel sulphur content menu. This is also required for a mixture of conventional diesel fuels and biodiesel fuels. The pe-riods for changing engine oil and en-gine oil filters are more frequent than for conventional diesel fuels with low sulphur content (� page 564).

200

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Changing fuel sulphur content � Select the fuel sulphur content display (� page 199).

� Press and hold the reset button (for ap-proximately one second) in the instru-ment panel until the desired fuel sulphur content is shown in the multi-function display or until FAME is shown if biodiesel is being used.

The fuel sulphur level or FAME (if biodiesel is used) as seen on the screen is then set.

Quitting the fuel sulphur level display

� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to select the previous or next menu

or

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to select the previous or next display.

Engine oil viscosity display

The engine oil viscosity value in the fluids/ lubricants menu must be the same as the viscosity class (SAE class) of the oil in the engine.

Engine oil grade display (� page 202).


iTo press the reset button in the instru-ment panel, use a pointed object, such as a pen.

Observe "Fuel sulphur content" chart (� page 567).

!Always use a viscosity class appropri-ate for the ambient temperature (� page 558).

201

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Select engine oil viscosity display



� Press the ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the high-light is on Fluids/lubricants.

� Press the j button until the multi-function display shows Engine oil viscosity.

Changing engine oil viscosity � Select engine oil viscosity display.

� Press and hold the reset button (for ap-proximately one second) in the instru-ment panel until the desired engine oil viscosity is shown in the multi-function display.

The engine oil viscosity displayed is set.

Quitting the engine oil viscosity display


or


iUse a pointed object, such as a pen, to press the reset button in the instru-ment panel.

Observe the "Fluids, lubricants and ca-pacities" section (� page 569).

202

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Engine oil grade display

The engine oil grade must be set in accord-ance with the data sheet values from Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products. The higher the data sheet value, the higher the engine oil grade level. The data sheet value in the fluids/ lubricants menu must be the same as that of the en-gine oil actually used.


Engine oil viscosity menu (� page 200).

Calling up the Engine oil grade menu



� Press the ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the high-light is on Fluids/lubricants.

� Press the j button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Engine oil grade.

Changing the engine oil grade

!Risk of engine damage. If possible, do not mix engine oils of different grades. If you mix engine oils of different grades, the data from the poorest grade must be entered in the fluids/ lu-bricants menu. The periods for chang-ing the engine oil are more frequent compared with those for engine oil of the same grade.


Observe the "Fluids, lubricants and ca-pacities" section (� page 556).

203

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Call up the Engine oil grade menu (� page 202).

� Press the reset button in the instru-ment panel until the multi-function dis-play shows the desired engine oil grade.

The engine oil grade shown in the multi-function display is now set.

Quitting the Engine oil grade menu

� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to select the previous or next menu.


Transmission oil grade menu

The transmission oil grade must be set in accordance with the data sheet values from Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products. The higher the data sheet value, the higher the transmission oil grade level. The data sheet value in the fluids/lubricants menu must be the same as that of the transmission oil actually used.


Call up the Transmission oil grade menu



� Press the ç button on the multi-function steering wheel continually un-til the highlight is on Fluids/lubrica-tions.

� Press the j button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Transmission oil grade.

!Danger of transmission damage. If pos-sible, do not mix transmission oils of different grades. If you mix transmis-sion oils of different grades, the data from the poorest grade must be en-tered in the Fluids/lubricants menu.

The periods for changing the transmis-sion oil are more frequent compared with those for transmission oil of the same quality.

204

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Changing the transmission oil grade � Call up the Transmission oil grade menu.

� Press and hold the reset button (for approximately one second) in the in-strument panel until the desired trans-mission oil grade is shown in the multi-function display.

The transmission oil grade shown in the multi-function display is now set.

Quitting the transmission oil grade menu


or



Observe the "Service products and ca-pacities" section (� page 569).

205

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Units menu

The units menu serves as a means of switching

� the unit of temperature measurement between °C/°F

� the clock mode between 12 h/24 h

Units menu, temperature unit

The menu is used to specify the way tem-perature is displayed for the entire instru-ment panel.

The following modes are available:

� Degrees Celsius (°C)

� Degrees Fahrenheit (°F)

Calling up the Units menu, Tempera-ture unit



� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on Units.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Units Temperature unit:.

The highlight 1 is on the current set-ting.

Changing the temperature unit

Degrees Celsius (°C) display


Degrees Fahrenheit (°F) display


206

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Quitting the temperature unit display

� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to move on to the next menu.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to quit the display.

12 h/24 h


� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on Units.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Units Clock mode.

The highlight 1 is on the current set-ting.

12 hour mode


The clock display in the instrument panel is in 12 hour mode

24 hour mode


The clock display in the instrument panel is in 24 hour mode

Quitting the menu for setting the clock mode


� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to quit the display.

207

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift/ auto-matic gearshift:

If there is a malfunction or complete failure of

� the gearbox electronics

� the drive control

� the gearshift unit

� the gearbox signal wire

you can still reach a workshop using the transmission control back up mode.

The Diagnostics menu is used in fault find-ing. It comprises a list of all the control units installed in the vehicle which will vary depending on the equipment level.

The following information is available for each control unit:

Transmission control back up mode menu

iThe Transmission control back up mode menu can only be selected once it has been activated in the Settings menu.

The gearshift detects if there is a need for substitute operation and indicates when transmission control back up mode is selected with an event mes-sage.

Diagnostics menu

Function Page

MB item number 209

Events 210

Binary values 213

Measured values 213

Deleting events 212

iThe Diagnostics menu can only be se-lected

� when the vehicle is stationary

� when the Settings menu/Configuration is activated (� page 184)

!Check event menus of all control units at regular intervals for events. Rectify any faults in the stored events before commencing a journey.

208

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Control unit abbreviations

Abbrevia-tions

System

AG Automatic gearshift

APU Air-Process-Unit

ART Telligent® distance control

BS Telligent® brake system

BTS Battery isolation switch

EAB Electronic trailer brake

EDW Anti-theft alarm system

FLA Flame-start system

FM Front module

FR Drive control

GM General module

Abbrevia-tions

System

GS Telligent® gearshift

HM Rear module

HPS Hydraulic-pneumatic gearshift

HZR Heating control/air conditioning

INS Instrument panel

KB Clutch mechanism

KOM Communication interface

KS Clutch control

KSA Convenience closing system

MR Telligent® engine control

Abbrevia-tions

System

MS Modular switch panel

NOX Exhaust emission treatment (DeNOx)

NR Telligent® level control

PFA Particulate filter system

PSM Programmable special module

RAD Radio

RS Retarder control

SPA Lane assist

SRS Safety restraint system

209

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Calling up the Diagnostics menu


� Turn the key in ignition lock to position 2.

� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Diag-nostics.

The MB item number identifies the control unit.

Selecting the MB item number


� Call up the Diagnostics menu.

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on the desired control unit abbreviation.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows the sys-tem abbreviation and the MB item no. menu list.

Abbrevia-tions

System

TCO Tachograph

TEL Telephone, hands-free system

TMB Door module, co-driver's door

TMF Door module, driver's door

TP Telematics platform

WR Telligent® active roll stabilizer

WS Telligent® maintenance system

WSK Converter and clutch unit

ZDS Central data memory

ZHE Auxiliary heating

ZL Telligent® trailing axle

MB item number

210

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on MB item no.


The multi-function display shows the MB item number.

In the Events menu, the driver information system stores all system malfunctions for a period of 2.5 days. A Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can carry out a diagnosis of the faults based on the stored events.

Selecting events


� Call up the Diagnostics menu (� page 209).

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on Diagnostics.


The multi-function display shows the list of control units.

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on the desired control unit abbreviation.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows the sys-tem abbreviation and the MB item no. menu list.

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on Events.


The multifunction display shows the first event in memory 1 of the control unit. If there is no new event, the multi-function display shows No events.Events menu

iA fault which has not been rectified is represented by 2 as being current.

The event priority 3 and the event code 4 assist the Mercedes-Benz Service Centre in rectifying the fault.

211

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1 Event number2 Current event3 Event priority (1st digit)4 Event code (digits 2 – 5)


The multi-function display shows the event text 5 and the action to be taken 6.

5 Event text6 Instructions


The multi-function display shows the next event.

Quitting the Event menu

If there are no further events, the multi-function display shows: Delete event?

The highlight is on No.

� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to move on to the next menu.

� Press the j button on the multi-function steering wheel to return to the menu list.

� Press the k button on the multi-function steering wheel to return to the previous display.

iIf there are no further events, the multi-function display shows: Delete event? The highlight is on No.

212

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Deleting events

The following options are available:

� You can delete the events from an indi-vidual control unit

� You can delete the events from all con-trol units

Deleting events from an individual con-trol unit

� Call up the event menu of the desired control unit.

If there are no further events, the multi-function display shows Delete events?


� Press button æ on the multi-func-tion steering wheel.

The highlight is on Yes.


The multi-function display shows Events deleted and returns to the Diagnostics menu.i

It is possible to carry out a fault diagno-sis based on the stored events.

The event memory should therefore only be deleted at a qualified specialist workshop.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work re-quired.

213

Controls in detail


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Deleting events from all control units

� Call up the Diagnostics menu (� page 209).

� Press the ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the high-light is on Diagnostics.

� Press the j button on the multi-function steering wheel to select the list of control units.

� Press the ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the high-light is on Delete events.


The multi-function display shows Delete events.



The highlight is on Yes.


The multi-function display shows the Event deleted message and returns to the Diagnostics menu.

Binary values

iThe binary values are intended to assist Mercedes-Benz Service Centres in ve-hicle diagnosis.

Measured values

iThe measured values are intended to assist Mercedes-Benz Service Centres in vehicle diagnosis.

214

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Gearshift

The vehicle is equipped with a fully syn-chronised 4 speed transmission. Half stag-es (post-selection) are also possible which doubles the number of gears. The pre-se-lection group provides a high and a low ra-tio for each of the gears. This means that there are 16 forward and 2 reverse gears available.

To select the gears, the vehicle is equipped with the following modes of gearshifting:

Reservoir pressure in auxiliary consumer circuit too low

1 Auxiliary consumer reservoir pressure2 Yellow status indicator

Page

HPS Hydro-pneumatic gearshift

215

EPS III S Telligent® gear-shift

218

EPS III SA Telligent® auto-matic gearshift

231

Risk of accident GIf the reservoir pressure is too low in the auxiliary consumer circuit, complete de-clutching and secure gear change cannot be guaranteed. The driver information system displays an event message. Under certain circumstances you may not be able to pull out of dangerous situations effectively. Do not accelerate or change gear until the res-ervoir pressure in the auxiliary consumer cir-cuit is sufficient and the message clears from the screen.

iTry to maintain the engine speed in the economic range. See also "Rev coun-ter".

Drive in the lowest possible gear.

215

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS) is de-signed with a double H layout and is split into a low and a high gear range. The low gear range "L" comprises the reverse gear and gears 1 to 4. The high gear range "H" comprises the gears 5 to 8. The split groups can be selected using the switch on the front of the gear lever.

HPS gearshift pattern

On vehicles with HPS there are three ways to operate the transmission:

� Gear selection in low ratio, e.g. for off-road driving

� Gear selection in high ratio e.g. for on-road driving

� Gear selection in either low or high ra-tio, e.g. when vehicle is fully laden

iChange gear in good time when ap-proaching steep gradients.

If possible, block change and avoid changing gear unless absolutely neces-sary.

Always fully depress the clutch pedal when changing gear.

Change gear smoothly without using force.

Only select reverse gear at idling speed and when the vehicle is stationary.

When the vehicle is stationary and the transmission is in neutral, the engine only speeds up after a delay.

Hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS) Gear change methods

216

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

DaimlerChrysler recommends pulling away in 1st to 4th gear, depending on load and gradient.


� Without using force, select desired gear using gear lever.



� Immediately after pulling away, test the service and parking brakes. When do-ing this, observe the traffic situation.

Ensure that the vehicle does not pull to the left or right and that it comes safely to a halt.


� Apply slightly increased pressure on the gear lever to overcome the lock be-tween the gear ranges.

� Without using force, select desired gear using gear lever.

Pulling awayRisk of accident GIf the vehicle pulls to the left or right during the brake test or it does not come to a halt safely, there is a danger that the brakes could fail and you could cause an accident. If continuing your journey is not possible, park the vehicle and have it towed away. If it is possible to continue your journey, drive at a suitable speed to a specialist workshop and have the brake system checked.


Changing gear

!A warning signal heard when changing down indicates that the target gear is too low. To avoid overrevving the en-gine, do not engage, select next high-est gear. There is a risk of engine damage.

217

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


The splitter group allows the vehicle to be driven in a higher or lower ratio in the se-lected gear without the need for gear change.

Split-shifter

1 High-range splitter group2 Low-range splitter group

High-range splitter group

� Place split-shifter in upper position 1.

� Keep clutch pedal depressed until the splitter group is selected.


Low-range splitter group

� Place split-shifter in lower position 2.

� Keep clutch pedal depressed until the splitter group is selected.


iWhen changing between gear ranges "L" and "H", e.g. from 4th to 5th gear, the clutch pedal must remain de-pressed.

Selecting the splitter group

218

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9




� Apply the parking brake (� see page 62).



� Wait for a period of three to six seconds until the layshaft has come to rest in the transmission.

� Guide gear lever to the left into the re-verse gear gate.

� Apply slightly increased pressure on the gear lever to overcome the lock.

� Engage reverse gear.

Vehicles with reversing horn:The reversing horn is activated.

� To proceed, release parking brake.


Telligent® gearshift (EPS III S) is an elec-tronic-pneumatic gear selection device. To change gear, the gear lever or the half-gear rocker on the gearshift unit must be moved in the desired direction.

Telligent® gearshift allows you to

� let the Telligent® gearshift select the optimum gears for you (Telligent® se-lection) or

� determine the point of gear change yourself (driver's choice)

Stopping

iWhen the transmission is in neutral, the gear lever is in the gate between 3rd and 4th gear, or between 5th and 6th gear.

Selecting reverse gear Telligent® gearshift

219

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

In both cases, the gear can be selected directly:

� Depress the clutch pedal

� Select a gear

� Release the clutch pedal

or

Gearshift with preselection:

� Select a gear

� Depress the clutch pedal

The Telligent® gearshift engages the gear

� Release the clutch pedal

This gear indicator shows the following in-formation in the multi-function display:

� the engaged gear and the selected splitter group on the left 1 and

� the recommended or preselected gear (flashing) with the appropriate splitter group on the right 2

1 Engaged: 8th gear, high splitter group2 Preselected: 7th gear, low splitter

group

Gear indicator

x High-range splitter group

y Low-range splitter group

N Transmission neutral posi-tion

R Reverse gear

220

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The gearshift unit is located on a separate folding armrest on the driver's seat.

Gearshift unit on right-hand drive vehicles

Telligent® gearshift unit Gear lever

1 Function button

2 Shift up

3 Shift down/select reverse

4 Neutral button

Half-gear rocker

5 Shift ½ gear up

6 Shift ½ gear down

221

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Apply the brakes and bring the vehicle to a halt.

� Press and hold neutral button 1.



As soon as neutral is engaged, N is shown on the left in the gear indicator.


Selecting neutral

iNeutral position N can be selected from any gear when the gear lever and the half-gear rocker are in the basic posi-tion.

Risk of accident GWhen you declutch or select transmission neutral, either engine braking or tractive power is interrupted. In certain circumstanc-es the vehicle cannot be brought to a halt. Never select transmission neutral when the vehicle is in motion.

222

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

If you wish to pull away from stationary with the transmission in neutral N, the Telligent® gearshift only permits selection of 1st to 4th gears or reverse gear.

Select the appropriate gear in which to pull away given

� the load

� uphill/downhill gradients

� the traction

Direct gearshift


� Press and hold function button 1, move gear lever forwards until a resist-ance can be felt 2 and hold in this po-sition.

Pulling away

iActivate the differential locks (� page 253) and the starting-off aid (� page 296) if you encounter traction difficulties.

iIf you move the gear lever with the function button forwards to drive away with the transmission in neutral, the Telligent® gearshift selects the second gear with fast splitter group.

If you move the gear lever forwards or backwards to the end position when the vehicle is in motion, gear selection is with Telligent® driver's choice.

Risk of accident GIf the clutch pedal is released before a gear is selected, the transmission remains in neu-tral.

Depress clutch pedal again within two sec-onds and wait until the gear is selected.

223

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator.


A selection sound can be heard in the central loudspeaker.






Shifting with preselection

Shifting a gear with preselection means that the gear you wish to select is prese-lected using the gear lever or the half-gear rocker and the gear change is initiated by depressing the clutch pedal.

Risk of accident GIf the vehicle pulls to the left or right during the brake test or it does not come to a halt safely, there is a danger that the brakes could fail and you could cause an accident. If continuing your journey is not possible, park the vehicle and have it recovered by a breakdown service. If it is possible to contin-ue your journey, drive at a suitable speed to a specialist workshop and have the brake system checked.


iIf you choose the direct gearshift op-tion, block changing with the vehicle in motion is limited to

� a half-gear using the half-gear rock-er and

� a full gear using the gear lever in conjunction with the applied func-tion button.

224

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The Telligent® gearshift stores the prese-lected gear

� for two minutes when the vehicle is stationary

� for ten seconds when the vehicle is in motion

� Construction-site vehicles:When the differential locks are activat-ed, the Telligent® gearshift stores the preselected gears for 30 seconds.

� Move gear lever and/or half-gear rock-er in the direction of the gear change continually until a resistance can be felt and until the relevant gear flashes on the right in the gear indicator.







Changing preselection

� Select a different gear during the peri-od allowed for preselection using the gear lever with function button or the half-gear rocker.

The newly selected gear flashes on the right in the gear indicator. The period allowed for preselection starts again.

Deleting preselection

� Press neutral button during period al-lowed for preselection.

The preselected gear shown in the right of the gear indicator is deleted.

iIf you choose the preselect gearshift option, block changing is limited to two gears.

During the period allowed for preselec-tion, the selected gear can be changed or deleted as required.

If the period for preselection has elapsed and no gear has been selected, the previously selected gear remains engaged.

225

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The Telligent® gearshift offers 4 ways in which to change gear when the vehicle is in motion:

� Direct gearshift with Telligent® driver's choice (� page 227)

� Preselected gearshift with Telligent® driver's choice and preselection (� page 227)

and

� Direct gearshift (� page 222)

� Preselected gearshift (� page 223)

Changing gear iThe Telligent® gearshift monitors gear selection. If the driver chooses a gear that would lead to overrevving of the engine, a warning signal sounds. The Telligent® gearshift selects a "safe" gear. The warning buzzer turns off as soon as the gear lever or the half-gear rocker is in the basic position.

Risk of accident GIf the clutch pedal is released before a gear is selected, the Telligent® gearshift selects transmission neutral.

Depress clutch pedal again within two sec-onds and wait until the gear is selected.

226

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Telligent® driver's choice

If you move the gear lever forwards to 1 or backwards to 2 when the vehicle is in motion without pressing the function but-ton, Telligent® driver's choice is activated. The Telligent® gearshift selects the opti-mum gear.

The influencing factors which aid the Telligent® gearshift in determining the op-timum gear are

� Road speed

� Accelerator pedal position

� Engine load

� Status of continuous brake

� Laden weight of vehicle

1 Shift up2 Downshift

iIf the optimum gear is already engaged, the Telligent® gearshift selects the next half-gear up or down as appropri-ate.

227

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Direct gearshift


� Move gear lever to change gear until a resistance can be felt.

The optimum gear selected by the Telligent® gearshift flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator.



The gear engaged is displayed on the left in the gear indicator.

� Release the gear lever.


Preselected gearshift

You decide whether gear change should be up or down by means of the gear lever. The Telligent® gearshift selects the optimum gear. The point of gear change is deter-mined by actuation of the clutch pedal.

The Telligent® gearshift stores the prese-lected gear

� for two minutes when the vehicle is stationary

� for ten seconds when the vehicle is in motion

� Construction-site vehicles:When the differential locks are activat-ed, the Telligent® gearshift stores the preselected gears for 30 seconds.

� Move gear lever to change gear until a resistance can be felt.

The gear selected by the Telligent® gearshift flashes on the right in the gear indicator.


iThe preselected gear can be changed or deleted during the period allowed for preselection.

If the Telligent® gearshift finds, during the period allowed for preselection, that the preselected gear is no longer optimum due to a change in driving conditions, it modifies the gear prese-lected.

If the period for preselection has elapsed and no gear has been selected, the previously selected gear remains engaged.

228

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9





Changing preselection

� Select a different gear during the peri-od allowed for preselection using the gear lever with function button or the half-gear rocker.

The newly selected gear flashes on the right in the gear indicator. The period allowed for preselection starts again.

Deleting preselection

� Press neutral button during period al-lowed for preselection.

The preselected gear shown in the right of the gear indicator is deleted.




� Press the neutral button.


The Telligent® gearshift selects neu-tral.

� Hold the vehicle using the service brake or the parking brake.


Stopping

229

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Press and hold function button 1 and move gear lever backwards until a re-sistance can be felt 2 and hold in this position.



Reverse gear is engaged when

� a selection sound is heard in the central loudspeaker.

� R can be seen on the left in the gear indicator.

� Release gear lever and function button.

� To proceed, release parking brake.


Construction-site vehicles:

When the differential locks are engaged (� page 253) the Telligent® gearshift se-lects construction-site mode. In construc-tion-site mode, the Telligent® gearshift shortens the period between gear changes and thus minimises any interruption in traction.

Selecting reverse gear

iYou can only select reverse gear R when the vehicle is stationary and neu-tral N is selected.

Reverse gear cannot be selected with the preselection feature (� page 223).

Construction-site mode

iWhen construction-site mode is acti-vated and you select a gear with Telligent® driver's choice, block chang-ing is limited to:

� Upshift: a maximum of one gear

� Downshift: a minimum of one gear

230

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

This procedure may be necessary to rock out a bogged-in vehicle for example.

� Engage reverse gear.


� Press function button 1 and move gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt 2 to preselect a forwards gear.

� As soon as you feel the vehicle driving backwards, depress the clutch pedal.

� Watch the gear indicator, when a for-wards gear has been engaged, release the clutch pedal and depress the accel-erator pedal.

� Press function button 1 and move gear lever backwards until a resistance can be felt 3 to preselect the reverse gear.

� As soon as you feel the vehicle driving forwards, depress the clutch pedal.

� Watch the gear indicator, when the re-verse gear has been engaged, release the clutch pedal and depress the accel-erator pedal.

Repeat the gear change procedure until the vehicle is free.

Rapid change of direction iTo rock out the vehicle, always start in reverse gear.

If necessary, engage the differential locks (� page 253).

231

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The Telligent® automatic gearshift (EPS III SA) is an electronic-pneumatic gear selec-tion device with automated clutch actua-tion. To change gear, the gear lever or the half-gear rocker on the gearshift unit must be moved in the desired direction.

This gear indicator shows the following in-formation in the multi-function display:

� the engaged gear and the selected splitter group on the left 1 and

� the recommended or preselected gear (flashes) with the appropriate splitter group on the right 2

1 Engaged: 8th gear, fast splitter group2 Preselected: 7th gear, slow splitter

group

Telligent® automatic gearshift Gear indicator

x High-range splitter group

y Low-range splitter group

N Transmission neutral posi-tion

R Reverse gear

232

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Modes of operation

The Telligent® automatic gearshift can be used in two modes of operation.

� Automatic mode "A" (� page 239).You select a gear in which to pull away. The Telligent® automatic gearshift se-lects the gear depending on the

� Road speed


� Engine load



� Manual mode "M" (� page 243).You select a gear in which to pull away and when the vehicle is in motion, you also determine the point and direction of gear change (up or down). The elec-tronics system engages the optimum gear.

The gearshift unit is located on a separate folding armrest on the driver's seat.

Gearshift unit

Telligent® automatic gearshift unit Gear lever

1 Function button

2 Shift up

3 Changing down/selecting re-verse

4 Neutral button

Half-gear rocker

5 Shift ½ gear up

6 Shift ½ gear down


M Manual mode

A Automatic mode

233

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Selecting operating mode The automatic and manual operating modes can be selected using the operating mode selector switch on the gearshift unit.

1 Operating mode selector switchM Manual modeA Automatic mode

Risk of accident GWhen the vehicle is being driven off-road or with engaged differential locks in automatic operating mode A, Telligent automatic gear-shift can lead to undesired interruptions in traction. The result of this could be danger-ous driving situations.

For such journeys, always select manual mode of operation M so that you can deter-mine yourself when gears should be select-ed in accordance with the driving situation.

iThe driver information system shows the current mode of operation in the multi-function display following the function check of the instruments.

The mode of operation can be changed at any time when the ignition lock is in position 2.

You can modify the gear chosen by the Telligent® automatic gearshift in both modes of operation.

234

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Selecting manual mode

� Press manual mode M on the operating mode selector switch.

The driver information system shows man. in the multi-function display.

Selecting automatic mode

� Press automatic mode A on the operat-ing mode selector switch.

The driver information system shows auto in the multi-function display.

iIf you change from manual to automat-ic mode

� when the vehicle is stationary and

� with 4th gear selected

the Telligent® automatic gearshift se-lects 2nd gear with fast splitter group.

235

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

In automatic mode you only need the gear-shift unit

� to pull away

� to select reverse gear

� to select transmission neutral

In manual mode you can determine the point and direction of gear change (up or down) for every gear using the gearshift unit.

Changing gear when the vehicle is in motion

� Move gear lever forwards until a resist-ance can be felt to change up or

� backwards to change down.

The Telligent® automatic gearshift en-gages the optimum gear for the operat-ing conditions.

Changing engaged gear

To change the gear engaged by the Telligent® automatic gearshift, you can

� change up 2 or down 3 a full gear using the gear lever or

� change up 4 or down 5 a half-gear using the half-gear rocker.

Selecting a gear


� Move gear lever forwards 2 or backwards 3.

Engaging forward gears

iYou can change the gear selected by the Telligent® automatic gearshift at any time.

236

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Selecting ½ gears

� Move half-gear rocker upwards 4 or downwards 5.

� Apply the brakes and bring the vehicle to a halt.

� Press and hold the neutral button 1.


As soon as neutral is engaged, N is shown on the left in the gear indicator.

iIn the neutral position N and with re-verse gear engaged, the transmission changes between slow and fast splitter groups or vice versa.

Selecting neutral

iNeutral position N can be selected from any gear when the gear lever and the half-gear rocker are in the basic posi-tion.

Risk of accident GWhen you select neutral, either engine brak-ing or traction is interrupted. In certain cir-cumstances the vehicle cannot be brought to a halt. Never select neutral when the ve-hicle is in motion.

237

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9



� Press function button 1 and move gear lever backwards 2 until a resist-ance can be felt.


� Reverse gear is engaged when

� a selection sound can be heard in the central loudspeaker

� R can be seen on the left in the gear indicator

� To proceed, release the parking brake.

� Slowly depress the accelerator.

Selecting reverse gear iReverse gear R can only be selected when

� the engine is running

� the vehicle is stationary

� neutral N is selected.

238

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

This procedure may be necessary to rock out a bogged-in vehicle for example.

� Select reverse gear and depress the ac-celerator.

� As soon as you notice the vehicle driv-ing backwards, press function button 1 and move the gear lever forwards 2 until a resistance can be felt.

The Telligent® automatic gearshift en-gages a forwards gear.

� As soon as you notice the vehicle driv-ing forwards, press function button 1 and move the gear lever backwards 3 until a resistance can be felt.

The Telligent® automatic gearshift en-gages the reverse gear.

� Repeat the gear change procedure un-til the vehicle is free.

Rapid change of direction iTo rock out the vehicle, always start in reverse gear.

If necessary, engage the differential locks (� page 253).

239

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Pulling away


� Move gear lever in desired direction of travel 2.

The Telligent® automatic gearshift en-gages a suitable gear.The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator and then changes to the left position.


The vehicle starts to move.



Automatic mode iIf a gear is selected when the auxiliary consumer reservoir pressure Œ is too low, a system fault occurs. The en-gine must be stopped and restarted.

240

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Changing the starting gear

� To block change up by two gears from the gear you have currently engaged, move the gear lever forwards until a re-sistance can be felt.

� To change up by one gear from the gear you have currently engaged, press the function button and move the gear le-ver forwards until a resistance can be felt.

� To change down by one gear from the gear you have currently engaged, press the function button and move the gear lever backwards until a resistance can be felt.

� To change up one half-gear, move the half-gear rocker upwards until a resist-ance can be felt.

� To change down one half-gear, move the half-gear rocker downwards until a resistance can be felt.

Changing gear

The influencing factors which aid the Telligent® automatic gearshift in determin-ing the optimum gear are

� Road speed


� Engine load



Risk of accident GIf the vehicle pulls to the left or right during the brake test or it does not come to a halt safely, there is a danger that the brakes could fail and you could cause an accident. Bring the vehicle to a halt and have it recov-ered by a breakdown service. The brake sys-tem should be checked at a specialist workshop.


Risk of accident GIf the engine speed drops below 550 rpm, the Telligent® automatic gearshift automat-ically disengages the gear. This could lead to critical driving situations when driving up or down hill. Do not allow the engine speed to drop below 550 rpm.

241

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Using the accelerator pedal you can active-ly influence the point of gear change and the target gear.

Accelerating

� Depress the accelerator pedal.

When the maximum speed is reached for the driving situation and the gear engaged, Telligent® automatic gear-shift selects the next highest optimum gear.

Manual gearshift

� To advance the point of gear change, move the gear lever forwards until a re-sistance can be felt.

The Telligent® automatic gearshift en-gages the next highest optimum gear.

Kickdown

The kickdown function provides maximum acceleration for the vehicle.

� Depress the accelerator past the pres-sure point until stop.

The Telligent® automatic gearshift en-gages a lower gear.

� Once the desired speed has been reached, ease back on the accelerator.

The Telligent® automatic gearshift en-gages a higher gear.

Decelerating

� Take your foot away from the accelera-tor pedal.

� Slowly depress the brake pedal.

The Telligent® automatic gearshift shifts down into an optimum gear.

or

� Activate the continuous brake (� page 262).


Easy on the accelerator

Shift up early

Heavy on the accelerator

Shift up late

242

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Shifting down manually

� Move gear lever backwards until a re-sistance can be felt.


or

� Press function button.

� Move gear lever backwards.

The Telligent® automatic gearshift shifts down a gear.

or

� Move half-gear rocker downwards.

The Telligent® automatic gearshift shifts down a half-gear.

Stopping

� Brake the vehicle

The Telligent® automatic gearshift dis-engages the gear just before idling speed is reached.

When the vehicle is stationary, a pull-away gear is selected.

iA warning signal heard when changing down indicates that the target gear is too low. To avoid overrevving of the en-gine, the Telligent® automatic gearshift only shifts down into a "safe" gear.

Risk of accident GThe vehicle could roll away with the engine running and a gear engaged. The Telligent® automatic gearshift disengages the gear when idling speed is reached.

When you bring the vehicle to a halt, always hold it using the service/or parking brake.

Environmental note HDo not allow the engine to run unnecessarily

243

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� To keep the transmission in the select-ed gear, briefly press the accelerator pedal or the function button within 90 seconds of the vehicle having been brought to a halt.

The pull away gear remains engaged for another 90 seconds.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you se-lect manual mode if you intend driving the vehicle off-road to avoid undesired upshift-ing, for example.

Manual mode has the following differences compared to automatic mode:

� The pull away gear is 2nd gear in the high splitter group

� The driver must actuate gear change

� The kickdown function is not available

� When the vehicle is brought to a halt, the Telligent® automatic gearshift does not select a pull away gear

� The options for changing gear with the vehicle in motion are

� using Telligent® automatic gear-shift by moving the gear lever (Telligent® driver's choice) or

� using the function button and gear lever for a full gear or via the half-gear rocker for a half-gear.

iIf the vehicle is left to stand for 60 sec-onds with a gear engaged, a warning signal sounds. N flashes on the right in the gear indicator.

After another 30 seconds, another warning signal sounds and the Telligent® automatic gearshift selects neutral.

Manual mode

244

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Pulling away � Press function button 1.

� Push the gear lever forwards 2.

The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator. The Telligent® automatic gearshift selects 2nd gear in the high splitter group. When the gear is engaged, the indica-tor shows the gear on the left.


The vehicle starts to move.

Changing the pull away gear

� To change up by one gear from the gear you have currently engaged, press the function button and move the gear le-ver forwards until a resistance can be felt.

� To change down by one gear from the gear you have currently engaged, press the function button and move the gear lever backwards until a resistance can be felt.

� To change up one half-gear, move the half-gear rocker upwards until a resist-ance can be felt.

� To change down one half-gear, move the half-gear rocker downwards until a resistance can be felt.

iIf a gear is selected when the auxiliary consumer reservoir pressure Œ is too low, a system fault could occur. The engine must be stopped and restarted.

!When you stop with manual mode acti-vated, the Telligent® automatic gear-shift will not engage a pull away gear. Select a suitable gear in which to pull away.

iIf the gear you select with the Telligent® automatic gearshift is un-suitable, change the pull away gear.

245

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Changing gear Upshifting with Telligent® driver's choice

� Move the gear lever forwards until a re-sistance can be felt 1.

The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator. The Telligent® automatic gearshift shifts into a higher optimum gear. It will shift up by at least a half-gear. When the gear is engaged, the indicator will show the gear on the left.

Risk of accident GIf the engine speed drops below 550 rpm, the Telligent® automatic gearshift automat-ically disengages the gear. The engine brak-ing effect will be lost or traction will be interrupted. This could lead to dangerous driving situations. Do not allow the engine speed to drop below 550 rpm.

246

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Downshifting with Telligent® driver's choice

� Move the gear lever backwards until a resistance can be felt 1.

The Telligent® automatic gearshift shifts into a lower optimum gear. It will shift down by at least a half-gear. The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator. When the gear is engaged, the indicator will show the gear on the left.

Upshifting by one gear

� Press and hold function button 1.

iA warning signal heard when changing down indicates that the target gear is too low. To avoid overrevving the en-gine, the Telligent® automatic gearshift will only shift down into a "safe" gear.

247

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Move the gear lever forwards until a re-sistance can be felt 2.

The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator. The Telligent® automatic gearshift shifts up by one gear. When the gear is engaged, the indicator will show the gear on the left.

Downshifting by one gear

� Press and hold function button 1.

� Move the gear lever backwards until a resistance can be felt 2.

The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator. The Telligent® automatic gearshift shifts up by one gear. When the gear is engaged, the indicator will show the gear on the left.


248

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Upshifting by one ½ gear

� Move the half-gear rocker upwards un-til a resistance can be felt 1.

The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator. The Telligent® automatic gearshift shifts up by one half-gear. When the gear is en-gaged, the indicator will show the gear on the left.

Downshifting by one ½ gear

� Move the half-gear rocker downwards until a resistance can be felt 2.

The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator. The Telligent® automatic gearshift shifts down by one half-gear. When the gear is engaged, the indicator will show the gear on the left.


249

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Stopping � Brake the vehicle.


The Telligent® automatic gearshift will disengage the gear just before idling speed is reached.

� To keep the transmission in the select-ed gear, briefly press the accelerator pedal or the function button within 90 seconds after the vehicle has been brought to a halt.

The gear will remain engaged for anoth-er 90 seconds.

Risk of accident GThe vehicle could roll away with the engine running and a gear engaged. The Telligent® automatic gearshift will disengage the gear when idling speed is reached.

Always hold the vehicle using the service brake or the parking brake when you stop.

Environmental note HDo not allow the engine to run unnecessarily

!When you stop with manual mode acti-vated, the Telligent® automatic gear-shift will not engage a pull away gear. Select a suitable gear in which to pull away.

iIf the vehicle stands still for longer than 60 seconds, a warning signal will sound and N will flash on the right in the gear indicator.

After another 30 seconds, another warning signal will sound and the Telligent® automatic gearshift selects neutral.

250

Controls in detail

Gearshift

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


� Apply the parking brake (� page 62).

� Select neutral 1.


Parking the vehicleRisk of accident GIf you do not use the parking brake to hold the vehicle, there is a risk of it rolling away. The Telligent® automatic gearshift always selects neutral when the engine has been switched off. You cannot park the vehicle with a gear engaged. Always hold the vehicle using the parking brake.

251

Controls in detail

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Driving

Use the tachograph to record and comply with the legal requirements in respect of

� Driving time

� Working time

� Short breaks

� Long breaks

� Speed limits.

Observe the separate Operating Instruc-tions in the vehicle document wallet.

Tachograph, SIEMENS VDO Automotive "KIENZLE"

Tachograph, TVI

Tachograph

Risk of injury GWhen you enter and exit the vehicle or move about in the cab, there is a danger of you in-juring yourself on the opened tachograph. Always keep the tachograph closed.

iA correctly filled out disc must always be inserted in the tachograph for any journey.

An event message is displayed in the multi-function display by the driver in-formation system if there are any faults in the tachograph or its equipment.

Tachograph discs with recorded infor-mation must be kept for at least 1 year.

Repair work and removal and install-ation of the tachograph may only be carried out by an authorised workshop.


252

Controls in detail

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Switch for transfer case

1 On-road selector position2 Off-road selector position

On vehicles with Telligent® automatic gearshift:

� Press operating mode selector switch M.

The multi-function display shows man.

3 Operating mode selector switchA – Automatic modeM – Manual mode

Selector positions of transfer case

On-road selector position

� Turn transfer case switch to position 1.

On-road operation is engaged.

Off-road selector position

� Turn transfer case switch to position 2.

Off-road operation is engaged.

Transfer case

!You can only engage the transfer case when the vehicle is stationary and in neutral.

253

Controls in detail

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

If necessary, engage differential locks on slippery roads or for off-road use for exam-ple.

Engaging differential locks

0 Off1 Inter-axle lock, transfer case/through-

drive2 Cross-axle lock, rear axle3 Cross-axle lock, front axle

� Turn differential lock switch to position 1.

The inter-axle lock/through-drive is engaged.

iThe transfer case off-road position is intended primarily for driving off-road or up steep slopes.

In neutral position 0, there will be no drive from the transfer case to the driv-ing axles. The neutral position 0 of the transfer case is only required for switching from position 1 to 2.

!When the vehicle is in motion, the transfer case switch must always be in on-road 1 or off-road position 2.

Differential locks iThe individual differential locks can only be operated in sequence.

Risk of accident GSteering is impaired when a differential lock is engaged. Never drive on a surface with high grip when the differential locks are en-gaged.

254

Controls in detail

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


The rear axle lateral lock is also en-gaged.


The front axle lateral lock is also en-gaged.

The multi-function display shows the rele-vant status once the switch process has completed.

1 Cross-axle lock, front axle2 Inter-axle lock, transfer case/through-

drive3 Cross-axle lock, rear axle

# Differential locks engaged

+ Differential locks disengaged

!If the driving wheels slip, do not engage the differential locks. There is a danger of the differential locks becoming dam-aged.

Engage only when the vehicle is sta-tionary or creeping forwards slowly.

Pull away carefully. In certain circum-stances, the locking function of the dif-ferential locks may not be fully engaged.

255

Controls in detail

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Disengaging differential locks

� Turn differential lock switch from 3 to position 2.

The lateral lock of the front axle is dis-engaged.


The lateral lock of the rear axle is disen-gaged.


The inter-axle lock/through-drive is disengaged.

The differential lock indicator in the multi-function display will be deactivated.

If the indicator is not deactivated when the lateral lock is disengaged:

� Drive the vehicle backwards and for-wards slightly.

If the indicator does not go out when the inter-axle lock is disengaged:

� Stop the vehicle and drive the vehicle backwards for a short distance.

The engine must run at a specified speed to drive auxiliary equipment (e.g. pumps).

The engine speed can be controlled with

� the accelerator pedal

� the multi-function lever on the steering column (� page 265)

� an overspeed switch

� or automatically with the constant en-gine speed switch

depending on the equipment level.

Power take-offs

256

Controls in detail

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Notes for vehicles with programmable special module (PSM)

If the parking brake is released, the power take-off cannot be engaged.

The multi-function display shows the Apply the parking brake ! event message.

� Apply the parking brake and repeat the selection process.

If the J power take-off symbol flashes in the multi-function display, the power take-off cannot be engaged. The electron-ics system has not automatically recog-nised the vehicle's operating state (transmission in neutral, vehicle station-ary, parking brake applied).

� Check the vehicle's operating state and repeat the selection process.

iVehicles with engine speed governor:

When the power take-off is activated, it is possible to exceed the governed en-gine speed.

!In the case of custom vehicle conver-sions, observe manufacturer's operat-ing instructions.

Do not switch on power take-off until


� the parking brake is applied

� neutral is selected

iIf the display flashes again, consult a workshop.

257

Controls in detail

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Engaging transmission-dependent power take-off

1 Power take-off switch 1

� Press the upper section of switch 1.

The indicator lamp in the switch and the J power take-off symbol flash in the multi-function display.

Note on power take-off symbol:

# Power take-off engaged

+ Power take-off disengaged

Disengaging transmission-dependent power take-off


The indicator lamp in the switch and the J power take-off symbol go out in the multi-function display.

iThe transmission-dependent power take-off can only be engaged when:




iTransmission with electronic gear change inhibitor:

� When the power take-off is en-gaged, the transmission cannot be operated

Transmission without electronic gear change inhibitor:

� PTO can be operated with vehicle stationary

� PTO can be operated only if 1st, 2nd or 3rd gear is selected with ve-hicle in motion

!If the power take-off is engaged, do not change gear when the vehicle is in mo-tion.

258

Controls in detail

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Engaging transmission-dependent power take-off with splitter group

The power take-off can be run at 2 differ-ent speeds by selecting the low or high splitter group.

Vehicles without Telligent® automatic gearshift

With the engine running at idling speed:

� preselect fast or slow speed using the split-shift on the gear lever or the half-gear rocker on the control panel of the Telligent® gearshift.

� Up = fast

� Down = slow


� After about ten seconds, press the up-per section of the power take-off switch 1. The PTO will be engaged or disengaged.


Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gearshift

With the engine running at idling speed:

� preselect fast or slow speed using the half-gear rocker on the control panel of the Telligent® gearshift.

� Press the upper section of power take-off switch 1. The PTO will be engaged or disengaged.

Engaging engine-dependent power take-off (NMW)


iClutch actuation is automatic with the Telligent® automatic gearshift.

iThe engine-dependent power take-off can only be engaged when:




259

Controls in detail

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Press the upper section of switch 1 with the engine running at a maximum speed of 1,700 rpm.

The indicator lamp in the switch and the J power take-off symbol in the multi-function display flash.

Power take-off display:

# PTO engaged

+ PTO disengaged

Disengaging engine-dependent power take-off (NMW)


The indicator lamp in the switch and the J power take-off symbol in the multi-function display go out.

Transmission with electronic gear change inhibitor:

� The transmission cannot be operated when the power take-off is engaged.

Transmission without gear change inhibi-tor:

� The power take-off can be engaged whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion.

Engaging engine-resident power take-off

The engine-resident power take-off can only be engaged when:






The indicator lamp in the switch and the J power take-off symbol in the multi-function display flash.

Power take-off symbol:

# PTO engaged

+ PTO disengaged

260

Controls in detail

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Disengaging engine-resident power take-off


The indicator lamp in the switch and the J power take-off symbol in the multi-function display go out.

Switching on constant engine speed function

The constant engine speed function can only be switched on when:




1 Constant engine speed switch

� Press the upper section of switch 1.The indicator lamp in the switch lights up.

Switching off constant engine speed function

� Press the lower section of switch 1.The indicator lamp in the switch goes out.

iWhen the constant engine speed func-tion is switched on, the working speed will remain constant regardless of the engine load.

261

Controls in detail

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Continuous brake

Risk of accident GDo not operate the engine brake or retarder on a slippery road surface. The wheels could lock. The vehicle could skid.

iOn long downhill stretches, downshift in good time and operate the engine brake to make use of the engine brak-ing effect. Note the effective engine braking range (yellow section) marked on the rpm counter.

1 Green Economical operat-ing range

2 Yellow Engine brake oper-ating range

3 Red Overrevving range

4 Green diode strip

Econometer

262

Controls in detail

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Operating the continuous brake

� Pull multi-function lever, continuous brake (engine brake/retarder) from position 0 to position 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.

When the continuous brake is operat-ed, the b indicator lamp lights up in the instrument panel.

Multi-function lever, continuous brake (ex-ample)

Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gear-shift:

If the d brake indicator lamp lights up in the instrument panel when the continu-ous brake is operated, the speed of the ve-hicle is too high for a lower gear to be selected:

� Decelerate using the service brake.

iWhen the lever is in position 1, the braking effect is at its least.

When the lever is in position 5 the braking effect is at its greatest.

iIf the service brake is applied when the continuous brake is active, the trans-mission will shift down in accordance with the driving situation.

263

Controls in detail

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Deactivating the continuous brake

� Move multi-function lever to position 0.

The continuous brake is deactivated and the b indicator lamp goes out in the instrument panel.

If the b indicator lamp does not go out:

� Have the continuous brake serviced or repaired as necessary.



Engine brake

The engine braking effect is dependent on the engine speed. High engine speed means high engine braking effect.

1 Optimum engine braking efficiency

iAt an engine speed of below 900 rpm, the engine brake is ineffective. The en-gine brake can only be used in a rev range between 900 rpm and approxi-mately 2,300 rpm.

264

Controls in detail

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Retarder The retarder's braking effect is reduced au-tomatically depending on the coolant tem-perature.

� Adjust driving style.

� On long downhill stretches, in particu-lar, downshift in good time to make use of the engine braking effect.

Risk of accident GIf the multi-function display shows a retard-er event message F, it is possible to de-activate the retarder during ABS regulation or by depressing the accelerator. At the same time, the status indicator will light up red. Drive with particular care. Have the re-tarder serviced or repaired as necessary.



iIf the retarder's braking effect is re-duced automatically due to the coolant temperature, the multi-function display will show an event message G.

If the retarder indicator lamp b lights up with the lever in position 0, do not operate the retarder. Have the retarder checked.



Notes on cleaning and care of retarder (� page 416).

265

Controls in detail

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

After the engine has been started, the idling speed is regulated automatically ac-cording to the coolant temperature.

It is possible to increase the engine speed using the multi-function lever on the steer-ing column. In this way, it is possible to provide the necessary speed for auxiliary equipment, such as pumps.

Adjusting idling speed

Using the multi-function lever on the steer-ing column it is possible to set the idling speed between approximately 550 rpm and a maximum of 750 rpm with the vehi-cle stationary.

Vehicles without ART

Vehicles with ART

1 To increase idling speed2 To reduce idling speed3 To switch off increased idling speed

Idling speed

!Observe the operating instructions is-sued by the body manufacturer.

266

Controls in detail

Driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Increase idling speed by approximately 20 rpm

� Move the multi-function lever to position 1 É.

The idling speed will be increased in in-crements of approximately 20 rpm.

Increase idling speed

� Hold the multi-function lever in position 1 É.

The idling speed will be increased to a maximum of approximately 750 rpm

Decrease idling speed by approximately 20 rpm

� Move the multi-function lever to position 2 Ê.

The idling speed will be decreased in in-crements of approximately 20 rpm.

To reduce idling speed

� Hold the multi-function lever in position 2 Ê.

The idling speed will be decreased to a maximum of approximately 550 rpm.

Deactivate increased idling speed

� Move the multi-function lever to position 3 5.

The increased idling speed is deactivat-ed.

iWhen the vehicle is in motion, the in-creased idling speed will switch off au-tomatically at a speed of above approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).

267

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Driving systems

You can switch between the following driv-ing systems:

� Limiter

� Cruise control

� Telligent® distance control

Switching from limiter to cruise control and back

Switching between various driving systems

iSwitching between driving systems is immediate. The multi-function display is deactivated for approximately three seconds. During this period there is no indication of road speed or distance in the multi-function display.

iYou can switch between the limiter and cruise control:

� whether these are active or inactive

� with the vehicle stationary or in mo-tion

268

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


1 Changeover button

� Press button 1 briefly.

Cruise control is activated. The multi-function display shows d.


The limiter activated. The multi-func-tion display shows c.

Switching from Telligent® distance control to limiter and back

Vehicles with ART

1 Changeover button


The limiter is activated. The multi-func-tion display shows c.


The Telligent® distance control is acti-vated. The multi-function display shows b.

269

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Switching from Telligent® distance control to cruise control and back

Switching between Telligent® distance control and cruise control is only possible when the vehicle is in motion and cruise control is activated.

1 ART rotary switch

� Press rotary switch 1 briefly.

Cruise control is activated. The multi-function display shows d.

� Press rotary switch 1 briefly.

The Telligent® distance control is acti-vated. The multi-function display shows b.

Using the limiter, you can limit the road speed above approximately 10 mph (15 km/h). You can accelerate using the accelerator pedal up to the set maximum speed.

To maintain the set maximum speed on downhill stretches, the limiter will operate the continuous brake automatically at the set maximum speed +4 km/h.

The limiter cannot be activated until the ve-hicle is moving faster than 2 km/h.

LimiterRisk of accident GThe limiter is intended to assist the driver only. The driver is responsible at all times for the speed of the vehicle and for maintaining an adequate distance to the vehicle in front.

270

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Multi-function lever (example)

Activating limiter

� Press button 2 continually until c is shown in the multi-function display.

The limiter is selected.

Increasing speed in increments of 0.5 km/h

� Move multi-function lever to position 1 É.

Moving the multi-function lever, acti-vates and stores the current speed.

Moving the lever again will have the ef-fect of increasing the speed in incre-ments of 0.5 km/h.

1 Selected driving system2 Set maximum speed3 Limiter symbol4 Current distance from vehicle in front

iIf the speed is changed, the multi-func-tion display will show the current set speed limit. After about five seconds, the display will go out.

271

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Increasing speed in increments of 5 km/h


Holding the multi-function lever in-creases the speed in increments of 5 km/h.

Releasing the multi-function lever stores the current speed after it has been increased.

Reverting to set speed limit

Precondition: The limiter was previously deactivated.


Moving the multi-function lever will se-lect the previously stored speed.

The multi-function display will show the previously stored speed.


272

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Decreasing the speed in steps of 0.5 km/h

Precondition: The limiter is active.


Moving the lever will cause the speed to be reduced in steps of 0.5 km/h.

iIf the lever is moved again, the speed will be reduced by 0.5 km/h.

If the speed is changed, the multi-func-tion display will show the current set speed limit. After about five seconds, the display will go out.


273

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Decreasing the speed in steps of 5 km/h


Holding the multi-function lever de-creases the speed in steps of 5 km/h.

Releasing the multi-function lever stores the current speed after it has been reduced.


274

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Switching off limiter


The limiter is deactivated. The c display in the multi-function display will be cancelled.

Exceeding stored speed limit

If it is necessary to exceed the stored speed limit to overtake, for example:

� Depress the accelerator briefly past the maximum speed point to the stop.

� As soon as the overtaking manoeuvre is over, release the accelerator pedal and depress it again.This will bring the set limiting speed back into effect.

iEven after the engine has been switched off, the stored speed limit is still available.

If you drive downhill and downshift without adjusting the speed, the limiter will set a temporary engine speed of approximately 2,200 rpm. The set max-imum speed remains in the system and will be recalled as soon as this is possi-ble in a higher gear.

iIf at this time the vehicle is travelling faster than the stored maximum speed, the vehicle will be slowed down auto-matically with the continuous brake.

275

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicles without Telligent® distance con-trol (ART):

Cruise control can store any road speed above 10 mph (15 km/h).

Cruise control brakes the vehicle when the set speed is exceeded by 2.5 mph (4 km/h).

Cruise control accelerates the vehicle on uphill climbs. On downhill stretches, the continuous brake brakes the vehicle (en-gine brake/ retarder).

Cruise control (combined acceleration/braking control) Risk of accident G

Do not operate the retarder on slippery road surfaces. The wheels could lock. The vehicle could skid.

Cruise control is intended to assist the driv-er only. The driver is responsible at all times for the speed of the vehicle and for main-taining an adequate distance to the vehicle in front.

Use cruise control only when it is safe to maintain the vehicle's speed at a constant level in traffic situations. The cruise control system is not able to read the road and traf-fic conditions.

!Do not exceed the maximum speed in each of the gears. Keep an eye on the rev counter (� page 144).

iOn uphill or downhill stretches, there is a possibility that the cruise control sys-tem may not be able to maintain the set speed

If you drive downhill and downshift without adjusting the speed, the limiter will set a temporary engine speed of approximately 2,200 rpm. The set max-imum speed remains in the system and will be recalled as soon as this is possi-ble in a higher gear.

When cruise control is activated, there is no need to depress the accelerator.

276

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Activating cruise control/Increasing speed

� Accelerate the vehicle using the accel-erator to above 10 mph (15 km/h).

� On vehicles with all-wheel drive: Accel-erate the vehicle using the accelerator pedal to above 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h).


Cruise control is activated. The multi-function display shows Ñ. The vehi-cle will accelerate.

� Release the multi-function lever. The current speed is stored in the memory.

Increasing the speed in increments of 0.5 km/h


Moving the multi-function lever, stores the current speed.

Moving the lever again will have the ef-fect of increasing the speed in incre-ments of 0.5 km/h.

iWhen the speed is changed, the multi-function display will show the current set speed limit. After about five sec-onds, the display will be cancelled.

277

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1 Selected driving system2 Set speed3 Cruise control symbol4 Current distance from vehicle in front


Reverting to the set speed limit

Precondition: Cruise control was previous-ly deactivated.


Moving the multi-function lever will se-lect the speed previously stored.

The cruise control system accelerates the vehicle to the speed previously set.

Decreasing speed in steps of 0.5 km/h

Precondition: Cruise control active.


Moving the multi-function lever de-creases the speed in steps of 0.5 km/h.

iIf the lever is moved again, the speed will be reduced by 0.5 km/h.

When the speed is changed, the multi-function display will show the current set speed limit. After about five sec-onds, the display will go out.

278

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Reducing speed


Holding the multi-function lever de-creases the speed.

Releasing the multi-function lever stores the current speed.

Deactivating cruise control


Cruise control is deactivated. The indi-cator Ñ in the multi-function display will be cancelled.

Automatic cruise control deactivation

Cruise control is deactivated automatical-ly:

� if the vehicle is braked using the serv-ice brake when the cruise control sys-tem is currently accelerating the vehicle. A short warning signal will sound.The speed setting remains in the mem-ory.

� if the speed drops below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), a short warning sig-nal will sound.The speed setting remains in the mem-ory.

iWhen the speed is changed, the multi-function display will show the current set speed limit. After about five sec-onds, the display will go out.

iWhen the speed is changed, the multi-function display will show the current set speed limit. After about five sec-onds, the display will go out.

iEven after the engine has been switched off, the stored speed is still available.

279

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� if you switch over to limiter. A short warning signal will sound.The speed setting remains in the mem-ory.

� if the clutch is kept depressed for long-er than five seconds, e.g. during gear changing. A short warning signal will sound.If you depress the clutch for less than five seconds, cruise control will remain active.

� when the gearbox is left in neutral for longer than five seconds.

Reverting to stored speed

Multi-function lever (example)

1 Revert to stored speed

To revert to the stored speed:


The vehicle continues at the stored speed again.

Special note on using the cruise control system

� To overtake a vehicle, you can acceler-ate past the stored speed using the ac-celerator pedal. As soon as the overtaking manoeuvre is completed and pressure is taken off the accelera-tor pedal, the cruise control system re-verts to the stored speed.

iOn vehicles with all-wheel drive, the cruise control system is deactivated automatically when the speed drops below approximately 30 mph (45 km/h). A short warning signal will sound. The speed setting remains in the memory.

280

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� If the anti-lock braking system or the acceleration skid control (ASR) is deac-tivated or defective:

� the cruise control system will only store speeds above 30 mph (50 km/h)

� the cruise control system will be de-activated automatically when the speed drops below approximately 28 mph (45 km/h)

� Additional braking with the continuous brake is possible. The cruise control system will remain active.

When the continuous brake is deacti-vated, the vehicle will accelerate to the last stored speed.

If you brake the vehicle using the con-tinuous brake, you can also use the service brakes. The cruise control sys-tem will remain active.

Further information on the continuous brake (� page 261).

The Telligent® distance control (ART) is a convenience system that supplements the controlling function of the cruise control system (accelerating/braking control) with a distance control function.

If the Telligent® distance control detects a slower vehicle ahead, it will slow your vehi-cle down automatically. Your vehicle will then be driven at the same speed as that of the vehicle ahead at a preset distance. The speed stored in the cruise control memory remains unaffected.

As soon as the traffic situation permits, e.g. if the vehicle ahead changes lanes, your vehicle will accelerate up to the stored speed in the cruise control memory.

Telligent® distance control works like a conventional cruise control system when there is no vehicle driving in front.

Telligent® distance control (ART)

Risk of accident GDo not use ART on icy roads or in the fog, for example.

The Telligent® distance control cannot auto-matically adapt the distance to the vehicle in front to changing road and visibility condi-tions.

Telligent® distance control is merely a tool to assist the driver.

The driver is responsible at all times for the speed of the vehicle and for maintaining an adequate distance to the vehicle in front.

281

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Telligent® distance control cannot be acti-vated:

� when the vehicle is stationary

� during the electronics system self-diag-nosis after the engine has been started

� at a speed below 10 mph (approxi-mately 15 km/h)

� if the clutch is depressed

� if the service brake is applied

� during ABS, ASR (acceleration skid control) or SR control (Telligent® stabil-ity control)

An unsuccessful attempt to activate the Telligent® distance control is shown in the multi-function display for approximately three seconds by ––,– km/h.

1 Unsuccessful attempt at activation

Activating Telligent® distance control

Telligent® distance control can only be ac-tivated when the vehicle is travelling at a speed above 10 mph (15 km/h).

Multi-function lever, cruise control with integrated ART

� Accelerate the vehicle using the accel-erator pedal to above 10 mph (15 km/h),

� Move the multi-function lever to position 1 É or 2 Ê briefly,

The current speed is stored in the memory.

282

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

If ART is activated, the multi-function dis-play shows:

Changing the specified distance to the vehicle in front

Using the ART rotary switch 3, you can change the specified distance to a vehicle travelling ahead. The minimum specified distance to a vehicle in front is approxi-mately 15 m.

1 Î To reduce specified distance2 Ï To increase specified distance3 ART rotary switch

� Turn ART rotary switch 3 to position 1 or 2 and select desired distance specification.

� Release ART rotary switch.

The specified distance is stored in the memory.

1 Current distance from vehicle in front

2 Telligent® distance control symbol

3 Current set speed

iWhen changes are made to the dis-tance specification, the multi-function display shows information about the specified distance h.

283

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Increasing the set speed


The set speed is increased to the next highest speed in increments of 5 (e.g. 62 km/h to 65 km/h and then 70 km/h and so on).

� Release the multi-function lever. The current set speed is stored.

1 Set speed2 ART symbol3 Current distance from vehicle in front

Increasing speed in increments of 0.5 km/h


The current set speed increases in in-crements of 0.5 km/h.

� Release lever. The current set speed is stored.

iWhen the set speed is changed, the multi-function display will show the current set speed. After about five sec-onds, the display will go out.


284

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Reducing the set speed


The set speed is reduced to the next lowest speed in steps of 5 (e.g. 62 km/h to 60 km/h and then 55 km/h and so on).


Decreasing the speed in steps of 0.5 km/h


The current set speed decreases in steps of 0.5 km/h.


Deactivating Telligent® distance control


Telligent® distance control is deacti-vated. The stored speed and the speci-fied distance remain in the memory.

The indicators in the multi-function dis-play will be cancelled (� page 282).



285

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Switching from Telligent® distance control to cruise control

� Move ART rotary switch briefly in direction 1.

The multi-function display shows the symbol Ñ for the activated cruise control function and the current speci-fied distance to the vehicle ahead.

Automatic deactivation of Telligent® distance control

Telligent® distance control is deactivated automatically

� when the speed drops below 6 mph (10 km/h)

� when cruise control accelerates the ve-hicle and the service brake is applied at the same time

� when the chassis on vehicles with pneumatic suspension is not in the standard position

� if a fault develops in the ART electron-ics system

� if the clutch is kept depressed for long-er than five seconds, e.g. during gear changing

If you depress the clutch for less than five seconds, the Telligent® distance control remains active

� if the transmission is set at R or N

!If the distance control is automatically switched off, the warning buzzer will give a single signal.

286

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The multi-function display shows

Driving with Telligent® distance control

Telligent® distance control is designed for use on motorways or expressways.

iAfter Telligent® distance control has been switched off automatically, the cruise control function can still be acti-vated.

If Telligent® distance control cannot be activated, e.g. if there is a fault in the system, the warning buzzer will sound once. The control function of the cruise control system is automatically activat-ed.

1 Current distance from vehicle in front

2 Symbol for activated cruise con-trol function

3 Current set speed

Risk of accident GIf a stationary obstacle is encountered, the vehicle will not be braked automatically. Do not use ART on B roads, for example, or in built up areas.

Telligent® distance control function only works in interaction with vehicles travelling ahead. It does not respond to stationary ob-stacles on the road (e.g. broken down vehi-cles or a traffic congestion).

Telligent® distance control slows the vehicle down automatically to maintain the set dis-tance to the vehicle travelling in front. Telligent® distance control will be activated if the vehicle in front changes lanes, for ex-ample.

It is absolutely essential to brake the vehicle using the service brake in addition to the au-tomatic braking function of the vehicle if:

� the warning symbol l lights up in the multi-function display

� the warning buzzer sounds twice in suc-cession.

287

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Telligent® distance control distance sensor

Unfavourable weather conditions (e.g. snow, slush) or heavy soiling of the sensor cover can impair the Telligent® distance control function.

1 ART distance sensor cover

� Keep the sensor cover in the front bumper clean.

Risk of accident GIf a stationary obstacle is encountered, the vehicle will not be braked automatically. If Telligent® distance control detects a sta-tionary obstacle, only a distance warning is activated:

� The multi-function display shows warn-ing symbol l,

� The warning buzzer sounds twice in ad-dition. Decrease driving speed using the service brakes.

Switch Telligent® distance control (ART) off before leaving motorways or expressways. If the system cannot detect an obstacle ahead (e.g. vehicle travelling in front), the vehicle will accelerate to the stored set speed.

iTelligent® distance control cannot de-tect oncoming traffic.

The acoustic warning from Telligent® distance control (ART) can be switched on or off under Cruise Control acous-tic in the Configuration submenu of the Settings menu (� page 184).

The retarder and/or engine brake can be switched on even when ART is ac-tive.

If the vehicle is slowed down by the cruise control system with the continu-ous brake (engine brake/retarder) and you depress the brake pedal, the cruise control system will not be deactivated.

288

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Telligent® distance control distance warning

This function is also active even when Telligent® distance control is switched off.

If there is a danger of colliding with a mov-ing obstacle in your lane, a distance warn-ing will be activated.

Telligent® distance control cannot detect oncoming traffic. There will be no distance warning.

Distance warningThe multi-function display shows the l distance warning. The warning buzzer sounds twice in addition.

If a distance warning is activated when the vehicle is in motion:

� Pay particular attention to the traffic situation,

� If necessary, avoid the vehicle ahead,

� If necessary, brake the vehicle using the brakes.

Risk of accident GThere is no automatic distance control (au-tomatic braking), i.e. the driver must slow the vehicle down using the brakes.

The system cannot always detect complex driving situations clearly. This may lead to missing or incorrect distance warnings.

289

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Special driving situations with Telligent® distance control

Cornering, entering and exiting corners

When cornering, or entering and exiting corners, the system may have difficulty in detecting oncoming traffic.

Slip roads, verges

Problems may occur in detecting oncom-ing traffic:

� on slip roads, whether joining or leav-ing the main road

� if there are moving vehicles on the verge (e.g. breakdown recovery vehi-cles)

Risk of accident GWhen cornering, or entering and exiting cor-ners, the system may have difficulty in de-tecting oncoming traffic. Your own vehicle may then brake unexpectedly or late.

Risk of accident GProblems may occur in detecting oncoming traffic:

� on slip roads, whether joining or leaving the main road,

� if there are moving vehicles on the verge (e.g. breakdown recovery vehicles).

Your own vehicle may then brake unexpect-edly or late.

290

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Offset driving style, lane change

An offset driving style to the vehicle ahead can cause problems in detection. Telligent® distance control may have trou-ble detecting the vehicle ahead if it is off-set (i.e. not inline with your vehicle). The distance to the offset vehicle ahead is too short. The driver must brake the vehicle to increase the distance to the vehicle ahead.

Cutting in

Vehicles that cut into your lane without keeping a safe distance will only be detect-ed by Telligent® distance control when the sensors can pick up the vehicle. The dis-tance to the vehicle cutting in is too short. The driver must brake the vehicle to in-crease the distance to the cutting in vehi-cle ahead.

Pneumatic suspension

The chassis can be lowered or raised using the control panel to pickup or offload de-mountable rack systems, containers or semitrailers. To use the control panel out-side the cab,

� remove the control panel from its bracket.

Control panel next to driver's seat

Telligent® level control

291

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

iIf Telligent® level control is active, this will be shown automatically in the multi-function display, e.g. chassis frame below normal position B or chassis frame above normal position A.

The level control display is deactivated when the vehicle leaves the factory. The level control can be switched on or off permanently in the Configuration submenu of the Settings menu in the driver information system (� page 186).

When the key in the ignition lock is turned to position 2, the height of the chassis will be adjusted automatically.

Risk of injury GIf you do not replace the control panel in the bracket designed for this purpose, there is a danger of tripping on the cable, as you get out of the cab. Always replace the control panel in the bracket designed for this pur-pose to ensure that the cable is routed to-wards the cab rear.

!Lower the chassis frame completely before offloading demountable plat-forms or containers. Otherwise the chassis could rebound suddenly when the exchange body is offloaded. This could damage the shock absorbers.

iIf the reservoir pressure in the com-pressed-air system is insufficient, leave the engine running to build up the pres-sure in the compressed-air system.

When coupling to semitrailers or pick-ing up demountable platforms or con-tainers, leave the engine running. This ensures that there is always sufficient reservoir pressure in the compressed-air system.

The multi-function display will indicate Telligent® level regulation by means of the K system abbreviation/symbol in the driver information system.

292

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Storing the chassis height

The chassis height can be stored and re-called using buttons "M1" 5 and "M2" 6.

Control panel

Saving chassis height:

� Apply the parking brake.


� Press preselect button 3 or 4.1 or 2 will light up.

� Press raise 8 or lower 9 button. 1 or 2 will light up.The multi-function display shows chas-sis above normal position A or chas-sis below normal position B.

� Once the required height is achieved, press and hold STOP button a and then press button M1 5 or M2 6.

The chassis height is stored.

1 Operation indicatorFront chassis,raise/lower

2 Operation indicatorRear chassis,raise/lower

3 On/offFront chassis preselection,raise/lower

4 On/offRear chassis preselection,raise/lower

5 M1 chassis height memory 1

6 M2 chassis height memory 2

7 Travel position

8 Raise

9 Lower

a STOP (raising/lowering)

293

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Loading and unloading the vehicle

When you load and unload the vehicle and wish to maintain a constant chassis height, this height can be stored.


� Vehicles with trailing axle: lower the trailing axle.

� If necessary use buttons 8 or 9 on the control panel to set the desired height of the chassis.

� Run the engine until the pressure regu-lator cuts out.

� Press and hold STOP button a.


� Release STOP button a.

Standby switch

If the reservoir pressure in the com-pressed-air circuit is sufficient, the stored chassis height will be kept constant for ap-proximately 5 hours.


� Vehicles with trailing axle: lower the trailing axle.

� Using buttons 8 or 9 on the control panel, the desired height of the chassis can be set.

� Run the engine until the pressure regu-lator cuts out.

� Press and hold STOP button a.


� Release STOP button a.

The chassis height set will remain con-stant.

iThe key can be removed and the cab can be locked.

294

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Raising or lowering the chassis



� Press preselect button 3 or 4.1 or 2 will light up. To raise the front and rear of the chassis equally, press preselect button 3 and 4. 1 and 2 will light up.

� Press raise 8 or lower 9 button. The multi-function display shows chassis above normal position A or chassis below normal position B. Once the required height is achieved, press the STOP button a.

� If there is a stored chassis height: Press button M1 5 or M2 6. The chassis frame will be raised or lowered automatically to the stored height.

Driving position

� Press the driving position button 7.The operating lamp will go out. The chassis will be raised or lowered auto-matically to the stored height.

iWhen the normal position is achieved (driving position), the indicator for chassis above normal position A or chassis below normal position B will go out in the multi-function display.

Risk of accident GIf the chassis is above the normal position and you do not observe maximum headroom notices when driving through underpasses, there is a danger of the vehicle becoming damaged. Ensure that the vehicle is not higher than the permitted maximum head-room when it is being driven. In Germany, for instance, maximum vehicle height must not exceed 4 metres (13 ft 1 in). Comply with national legislation in other countries (also when the vehicle is used for interna-tional transport work).

The driving and braking properties of the ve-hicle can be affected if chassis above nor-mal position A or chassis below normal position B is shown in the multi-function display.

Only drive the vehicle when the chassis is in the normal position (driving position) S.

295

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicles for high-volume goods trans-port – raised driving position

To improve ride comfort, the chassis can be raised while the vehicle is being driven.

1 Raised driving position switch

Raising the chassis

� Press upper section of switch 1.The multi-function display shows raised driving position C.

Lowering the chassis

� Press the lower section of switch 1.The C raised driving position indica-tor in the multi-function display will be cancelled when the driving position is reached.

Risk of accident GIf the chassis is in the raised position and you do not observe maximum headroom no-tices when driving through underpasses, there is a danger of the vehicle becoming damaged. Make sure that the permissible height limit is not exceeded when the sus-pension is raised. In Germany, for instance, maximum vehicle height must not exceed 4 metres (13 ft 1 in). Comply with national legislation in other countries (also when the vehicle is used for international transport work).

296

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

If the driving wheels slip on snowy or icy road surfaces, activate the starting-off aid.

1 Starting-off aid switch

Vehicles with pneumatic suspension and vehicles with steered leading axle

Activating the starting-off aid on 6x2 vehicles

� Press upper section of starting-off aid switch 1.

2 will flash in the multi-function dis-play as long as the starting-off aid is ac-tive.

6x2 vehicles

2 Starting-off aid/trailing axle display

Starting-off aid, three-axle vehicles i� The starting-off aid with speed limit-

er is switched off automatically when the speed exceeds approxi-mately 20 mph (30 km/h). Not until the speed drops below approx-imately 20 mph (30 km/h) can the starting-off aid be activated again.

� The starting-off aid without gear se-lection lock is switched off auto-matically after 120 seconds and can be switched on again immedi-ately thereafter.

297

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Activating the starting-off aid for 6x2/4 vehicles

� Press upper section of starting-off aid switch 1.

3 will flash in the multi-function dis-play as long as the starting-off aid is ac-tive.

6x2/4 vehicles

3 Starting-off aid/leading axle display

Raising leading axle

1 Leading axle switch

� Turn key in ignition lock to position 2,

� Press upper section of leading axle switch 1.The multi-function display shows raise leading axle 2.

2 "Raise leading axle" indicator

Hendrickson leading axle

iRaise leading axle before pulling away.

If reservoir pressure in the com-pressed-air system is too low, run the engine.

298

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Lowering the leading axle

1 Leading axle switch

� Press upper section of leading axle switch 1.The indicator in the multi-function dis-play will be cancelled.

� Raise the trailing axle of an unladen or only partially laden vehicle before start-ing.

� If reservoir pressure in the com-pressed-air system is too low, run the engine.

Vehicles with rear-mounted loading crane:

� Study the operating instructions issued by the body manufacturer before rais-ing the trailing axle.

High-volume transport vehicles:

The trailing axle cannot be raised.

Vehicles with pneumatic suspension

Raising the trailing axle

1 Trailing axle switch


� Press upper section of trailing axle switch 1.

The multi-function display shows raise trailing axle/starting-off aid 2.

Trailing axle

299

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

2 Trailing axle/starting-off aid display

To lower the trailing axle

� Press upper section of trailing axle switch 1.

The indicator in the multi-function dis-play will be cancelled.

Before loading or unloading the vehicle:

� lower the trailing axle.

Vehicles with Nummek trailing axle

1 Nummek trailing axle switch

Raising Nummek trailing axle

� Press upper section of Nummek trail-ing axle switch 1.

The multi-function display shows trail-ing axle/starting-off aid 2.

2 Trailing axle/starting-off aid display

300

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Lowering the Nummek trailing axle

1 Nummek trailing axle switch

� Press the upper section of Nummek trailing axle switch 1.

The trailing axle/starting-off aid indi-cator in the multi-function display will be cancelled.

The Telligent® trailing axle is a speed-de-pendent, hydraulically steered trailing axle. It reduces the turning circle of the vehicle and has a positive effect on tyre wear in corners. When the road speed exceeds 30 mph (45 km/h) or when the trailing axle is raised (� page 298), the electron-ics system locks the wheels in the straight-ahead position and disengage the trailing axle steering function. When you lower the trailing axle, the Telligent® trailing axle will begin steering the next time the front axle is turned from the straight-ahead position.

When you turn the steering lock to position 2, the j indicator lamp in the instru-ment panel lights up. When the indicator lamp goes out, the Telligent® trailing axle is ready for operation.

If the indicator lamp does not go out or comes on when the vehicle is in motion and the ZL system abbreviation is shown in the multi-function display, have the trailing axle checked.

Telligent® trailing axleRisk of accident GWhen you drive up to kerb stones or drive through tight passages, there is a danger of the tyres or obstacles on the edge of the road becoming damaged. In this case, lock the Telligent® trailing axle steering function.

301

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowl-edge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Locking the trailing axle steering function

1 Trailing axle steering lock switch

� Press upper section of trailing axle steering lock switch 1.

The electronics system sets the wheels in the straight-ahead position and locks the steering function of the trailing ax-le. The indicator lamp in the switch lights up.

Releasing the trailing axle steering function

� Press upper section of trailing axle steering lock switch 1.

The electronics system releases the steering lock of the trailing axle. The in-dicator lamp in the switch goes out.

302

Controls in detail

Good visibility

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Good visibility

The vehicle is equipped with the following exterior mirror types:

� electrical, heated exterior mirror on driver's and co-driver's side

� manual, heated wide-view mirror on co-driver's side

� manual down-view mirror on co-driv-er's side

The switch unit for adjusting the exterior mirrors and for the heating function is lo-cated in the driver's door.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

1 To select the left-hand exterior mirror2 To select the right-hand exterior mirror3 To adjust the mirrors



� Select the exterior mirror by pressing button 1 or 2.

� Adjust the exterior mirror in the re-quired direction by pressing button 3.

Exterior mirrors

303

Controls in detail

Good visibility

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Mirror heating

With the mirror heating function you can keep the exterior mirrors free of mist and ice in damp and cold weather conditions. The switch and indicator lamp are located in the switch unit of the driver's door.

The 1 indicator lamp shows that the mir-ror heating is active.

1 Mirror heating indicator lamp2 To switch mirror heating on/off

Switching on mirror heating

� Press button 2.

Indicator lamp 1 lights up.

Switching off mirror heating

� Press button 2.

Indicator lamp 1 goes out.

iThe down-view mirror is not heated.

304

Controls in detail

Good visibility

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Further information about the use of wind-screen wipers can be found in the "Getting started" section (� page 61).

Intermittent wipe

The intermittent wipe action can be adjust-ed infinitely from 2 – 20 seconds.

Setting the wipe action interval

� Turn rotary switch to position 5 and wait for 1st wiping action.

� Turn rotary switch to position Ä.

� Wait period required for interval.

� Turn rotary switch to position 5 once again.

The electronics system stores the time between switching on and off as a new wipe interval.

Windscreen wipers iIf the rotary switch is left in the Ä position for more than 20 seconds, the electronics system will set the interval time to two seconds.

305

Controls in detail

Good visibility

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicles with plastic bumper: The steps and the platform for cleaning the wind-screen are in the bumper.

Construction-site vehicles

Construction-site vehicles have folding steps to increase the ground clearance.

Fold the step down to clean the wind-screen.

Construction-site vehicles (example)

1 Pin2 Step

Windscreen cleaning platform

Risk of accident GDirty or loose steps do not provide a secure foothold. You could slip and fall. Keep the steps clean. Secure folding steps before use.

306

Controls in detail

Good visibility

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Folding the step down

� Remove safety clip and withdraw pin 1.

� Fold step 2 down.

� Insert the pin and secure.

Folding the step up

� Remove safety clip and withdraw pin 1.

� Fold step 2 up.

� Insert the pin and secure.

!If you drive the vehicle with the step down, the step could become dam-aged. Always fold the step up before starting the vehicle.

307

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Climate control

308

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The vehicle can be equipped with the fol-lowing air-conditioning systems:

The systems were designed as combined fresh and recirculating air systems. A par-ticulate filter or reusable construction-site filter is fitted to clean the fresh air, depend-ing on the equipment level.

The heating and heater air conditioning are operational when the engine is running. When the engine is warm, the air tempera-ture can be regulated infinitely.

Function

1 Demister vents

2 Swivelling side vents

3 Side vent airflow thumbwheel

4 Air conditioning and auxiliary heating switch unit

5 Air-conditioning control panel

6 Swivelling centre vents

7 Centre vent airflow thumbwheel

8 Footwell vents

Page

Heating, heater air conditioning 309

Automatic air conditioning 315

Auxiliary air-conditioning 323

Auxiliary heating 327

Heating/heater air conditioning

iOn vehicles with heater air condition-ing, there is an air conditioning system integrated in the heating with manual regulation.

!Switch on the air conditioning at least once a month for about ten minutes to avoid corrosive damage to the refriger-ant compressor.

309

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Control panel for heating/heater-air conditioning

Air conditioning

Switching on the air conditioning system affects the airflow as follows

� the air temperature is reduced

� the air is dehumidified

� the air is additionally filtered

1 Airflow

2 Air distribution, air recirculation

3 Temperature

4 Air-recirculation mode indicator lamp

5 Switches the air conditioning on/ off


7 Auxiliary heating quick-start menu

310

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To switch on

� Press air conditioning switch 1 p to switch the air conditioning system on.


To switch off

� Press air conditioning switch 1 p to switch the air conditioning system off.


Regulating temperature

To regulate the temperature, turn the rota-ry switch 2 to the relevant position.

Warmer

� Turn the rotary switch 2 to the right.

Warmer air will flow out of the heater vents.

Colder

� Turn the rotary switch 2 to the left.

Colder air will flow out of the heater vents.

� If necessary, press the upper section of the air conditioning switch 1 p.


311

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

If the cab is too hot before commencing a journey:

� Open the side window.

� Press air conditioning switch 5 p to switch the air conditioning system on.


� Turn rotary switch for airflow 1 to P.

� Turn rotary switch for air distribution 2 to Ò.

� Turn rotary switch for temperature 3 fully to the left.

Once the hot air has been expelled from the cab:

� Close the side window.

� Press rotary switch for air distribution 2 to switch on the air-recirculation mode.

Once the air in the cab has been cooled sufficiently:

� Press rotary switch for air distribution 2 to switch off the air-recirculation mode.

� Turn rotary switch for airflow 1 to position 1 or 2.

� Set the temperature using rotary switch 3.

312

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Regulating airflow

To regulate the airflow, turn rotary switch 1 to the relevant position.

Higher


The flow of air from the heater vents will increase.

Lower


The flow of air from the heater vents will decrease.

iWhen the rotary switch for airflow is at position 0, a small amount of air will still flow out of the vents when the ve-hicle is in motion.

To temporarily prevent outside air from entering the cab, activate the air-recir-culation mode (� page 313).

313

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Regulating air distribution

Rotary switch 1, may be used to adjust the air distribution to different areas of the cab as required.

The following settings are available: Air-recirculation mode

If unpleasant odours are encountered or a high level of contaminated air, e.g. in traf-fic or in a tunnel, switch on the air-recircu-lation mode. In air-recirculation mode, the system will recirculate the air in the cab only.

P Air to front and side windows

h Air to centre vents

Ò Air to full cab interior

Ó Air to footwell vents

iTwo additional stages between the switch settings allow individual fine ad-justment of air distribution.

Risk of accident GAt ambient temperatures below 5 °C, only switch the air-recirculation mode on briefly. Condensation could build up on the win-dows and impair your vision. You would be putting yourself and other road users at risk. Do not start the vehicle if the windows are icy or misted over.

314

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To switch on

� Press rotary switch 1.

The indicator lamp for air-recirculation mode in the control panel 2 lights up.

To switch off

� Press rotary switch 1.

The indicator lamp for air-recirculation mode in the control panel 2 will go out.

Demisting

3 Thumbwheel4 Side vents

If the windows are icy or misted over:

� Open side vents fully using the thumb-wheel 3.

� Direct swivelling side vents 4 onto the side windows.

Risk of accident GIcy windows impair your vision. You could be putting yourself and other road users at risk. Do not start the vehicle if the windows are icy or misted over.

315

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Turn rotary switches 1, 2 and 3 in the control panel to position P.

A large quantity of fully heated air will flow onto the windscreen and the side windows.

In addition on vehicles with heating-heater air conditioning:

� Press upper section of air conditioning switch 5 p.


Maintain the setting until the windscreen and the side windows are clear.

Automatic air conditioning is ready for op-eration when the engine is running. It reg-ulates the airflow and air distribution and maintains the set temperature automati-cally.

The system heats or cools the air depend-ing on the temperature setting and the am-bient temperature.

On vehicles with auxiliary heating, auto-matic air conditioning switches the auxilia-ry heating on when the engine is cold.

iThe air conditioning system dehumidi-fies the air. Misted over windows will be cleared more quickly.

Automatic air conditioning

316

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

If there are high levels of air contamina-tion, e.g. in traffic congestion or in tunnels, automatic air conditioning switches to air-recirculation mode.

The automatic air conditioning system can be supplemented by an auxiliary air condi-tioning system (� page 323).

Automatic air-conditioning control panel

1 Airflow in automatic mode

2 Air distribution in automatic mode

3 Airflow

4 Air distribution, air recirculation

5 Temperature

6 Switches off the air conditioning

7 Charges the auxiliary air condi-tioning


9 Switches the refrigerator on/off

Warning and indicator lamps

a Air-recirculation mode

b Air conditioning off

c Auxiliary air conditioning charg-ing

317

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Automatic mode

� Turn rotary switch for airflow 3 to po-sition U 1.

� Turn rotary switch for air distribution 4 to position U 2.

� Set desired temperature using rotary switch 5.

Manual mode

In manual mode, all of the automatic air conditioning functions can be regulated manually. The air conditioning system is activated automatically when a lower tem-perature is selected.

If you wish to operate the automatic air conditioning in manual mode, the rotary switch for airflow 3 and air distribution 4 should not be at the U position.

Vehicles with auxiliary heating:

The automatic air conditioning activates the auxiliary heating if

� the coolant temperature is too low

� one of the rotary switches for either air-flow or air distribution is on U

iAutomatic mode is activated as soon as the rotary switch for air flow 3 or air distribution 4 is at U.

Mercedes-Benz recommends a tem-perature between 20 – 23 °C for opti-mum comfort.

If you leave the vehicle frequently on hot days, set the temperature to ap-proximately 25 °C.

318

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� the rotary switch for temperature is not fully on cold

in order to heat up the cab.

AC OFF switch

If use of the air conditioning system is not desired or not necessary, you can switch it off completely.

To switch air conditioning off

� Press upper section of AC OFF switch 1.

The right-hand indicator lamp 2 lights up in the switch.

To switch air conditioning on

� Set AC OFF switch 1 to centre posi-tion.

The indicator lamps 2 in the AC OFF switch go out.

iManual mode is best:

� on warm days to quickly set the cab temperature before commencing your journey

� when windows are icy or misted over to quickly clear your vision

Environmental note HSwitching the air conditioning off will not just save you fuel, it is also environmentally friendly.

319

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Regulating the temperature

To regulate the temperature in automatic and manual mode, turn the rotary switch for temperature 5 to the relevant posi-tion.

Warmer

� Turn rotary switch for temperature 5 to the right.

The automatic air conditioning regu-lates the temperature to the prescribed level.

Colder

� Turn rotary switch for temperature 5 to the left.

The automatic air conditioning regu-lates the temperature to the prescribed level.

If the cab is too hot before commencing a journey:

� Open the side window,

� Turn the rotary switch for airflow 3 to level 4,

� Turn rotary switch for air distribution 4 to Ò,

� Turn rotary switch for temperature 5 fully to the left.

iVehicles with auxiliary heating:

If necessary, the automatic air condi-tioning system will also activate the auxiliary heating so that the set tem-perature can be achieved.

320

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Once the hot air has been expelled from the cab:

� Close the side window.

� Press the rotary switch for air distribu-tion 4 to activate air-recirculation mode.

Once the air in the cab has been cooled sufficiently:

� Press the rotary switch for air distribu-tion 4 to deactivate air-recirculation mode.

� Turn rotary switch for airflow 3 to U 1.

� Turn rotary switch for air distribution 4 to U 2.

� Set desired temperature using rotary switch 5.

Airflow

To regulate the airflow in manual mode, turn rotary switch 3 to the relevant posi-tion.

Higher


The flow of air from the vents will in-crease.

Lower


The flow of air from the vents will de-crease.

iThe airflow is regulated automatically in automatic mode.

321

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Adjusting air distribution

Rotary switch 1 may be used to adjust the air distribution in manual mode to dif-ferent areas of the cab according to re-quirements.

The following settings are available: Air-recirculation mode

In air-recirculation mode, the system will recirculate the air in the cab only.

Automatic air conditioning features a man-ual and an automatic air-recirculation mode.

iAir distribution is regulated automati-cally in automatic mode.

P Air to front and side windows

Ô Air to windscreen and side win-dows and to centre vents

h Air to centre vents

Ò Air to full cab interior

Ó Air to footwell vents

U Automatic mode

iAdditional stages between the switch settings allow individual fine adjust-ment of air distribution.

Risk of accident GAt ambient temperatures below 5 °C, only switch the air-recirculation mode on briefly. Condensation could build up on the win-dows and impair your vision. You would be putting yourself and other road users at risk. Do not start the vehicle if the windows are icy or misted over.

322

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The automatic mode is always active and detects carbon monoxide and nitrogen ox-ide concentrations in the outside air. When contaminated air is detected, automatic air conditioning will activate the air-recircula-tion mode.

You can also select air-recirculation mode at any time manually.

To select air-recirculation mode

� Press rotary switch for air distribution 1.

The 2 indicator lamp for air-recircula-tion mode lights up in the control pan-el.

To deactivate air-recirculation mode

� Press rotary switch for air distribution 1.

The 2 indicator lamp for air-recircula-tion mode goes out.

Demisting

1 Thumbwheel2 Side vents

If the windows are icy or misted over:

� Open side vents fully using the thumb-wheel 1.

� Direct swivelling side vents 2 onto the side windows.

Risk of accident GIcy windows impair your vision. You could be putting yourself and other road users at risk. Do not start the vehicle if the windows are icy or misted over.

323

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Turn the rotary switch for airflow 3 to level 4.

� Turn rotary switch for air distribution 4 to P.

� Turn rotary switch for temperature 5 fully to the right.

A large quantity of fully heated air will flow onto the windscreen and the side windows.

Maintain the setting until the windscreen and the side windows are clear.

Vehicles with automatic air conditioning:

Auxiliary air conditioning can be used to cool the cab interior prior to a journey or it can maintain a comfortable temperature in the cab interior during short or long breaks. In addition, auxiliary air condition-ing dehumidifies the flow of air in the cab. When the refrigerant accumulator is full, the maximum operating time is approxi-mately eight hours.

Auxiliary air conditioning

iAuxiliary air conditioning is ready for operation when the refrigerant accu-mulator is charged.

324

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

DaimlerChrysler recommends that the re-frigerant accumulator should be kept charged during hot weather or for journeys in subtropical and tropical climates.

Charging the refrigerant accumulator

Approximately four hours is necessary to fully charge the refrigerant accumulator.

With the engine running:

� Press switch 1 u.

The left-hand indicator lamp 2 in the switch lights up.

iThe refrigerant accumulator can only be charged when the engine is running.

To prevent freezing of the refrigerant accumulator, the electronics system switches the auxiliary air conditioning off when the engine is started.

325

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Auxiliary air conditioning switch

The control panel for the auxiliary air con-ditioning system is in the head area of the lower berth. The rotary switch has 4 positions.

To switch on auxiliary air conditioning

� Turn rotary switch to relevant position.

The u indicator lamp for the auxilia-ry air conditioning in the instrument panel lights up. The auxiliary air condi-tioning blower blows refrigerated air out of the openings in the cab rear.

To switch off auxiliary air conditioning

� Turn rotary switch to position OFF.

The u indicator lamp for the auxilia-ry air conditioning in the instrument panel goes out.

AUS Auxiliary air conditioning off

1 Night use, cooling duration approximately eight hours

2 Day use, cooling duration approximately three hours

3 To cool cab before starting a journey

4 Rotary switch

iIf the curtains are closed, heat will not be able to penetrate into the cab and the auxiliary air conditioning will be more effective.

If the berth is being used, efficiency can be improved more by pulling the cur-tains closed in front of the berth.

326

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Particulate filter

The vehicle heating is equipped with a par-ticulate filter. It filters particles out of the outside air, such as

� fine dust

� pollen and

� spores,

before it enters the interior.

The filter element should be replaced an-nually at a specialist workshop or a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you vis-it a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required.

1 Particulate filter for vehicle heating be-hind maintenance flap

Construction-site filter

For construction-site vehicles, a construc-tion-site filter is available. Information is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

The filter is designed to filter out large par-ticles found typically on a construction site. The filter can be reused. When the fil-ter becomes soiled, it can be cleaned at a specialist workshop or Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.


Fresh air filter

327

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Auxiliary air conditioning particulate filter

The auxiliary air conditioning has its own air intake. The particulate filter in the air in-take filters out particles in the air, such as

� dust

� pollen and

� spores

The filter element should be replaced an-nually at a specialist workshop or a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.


You can heat up the cab

� before commencing the journey

� when the vehicle is in motion

� when the engine is switched off

with the auxiliary heating.

The auxiliary heating is designed as either a hot air heater or warm water heater. The hot air heater heats the air flowing into the cab exclusively. The warm water heater heats the coolant which also preheats the engine.

Vehicles with automatic air conditioning and auxiliary heating:Automatic air conditioning activates the auxiliary heating even when the vehicle is in motion if the coolant temperature is in-sufficient to heat the cab.

Auxiliary heating

Risk of fire and poisoning GOperation of the auxiliary heating creates hot and poisonous gases. There is a risk of fire and poisoning.

Do not operate the auxiliary heating

� at filling stations

� in enclosed spaces, such as garages.

Vehicles for the transport of hazardous goods: Comply with relevant safety regula-tions.

328

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The auxiliary heating has the following modes of operation:

1 Auxiliary heating2 Auxiliary heating indicator lamp3 Auxiliary heating shortcut menu

To switch on continuous heating

Continuous heating, hot air heater


� Turn key in ignition lock to position 1

or


1 Auxiliary heating2 Auxiliary heating indicator lamp

� Press upper section of auxiliary heating switch 1 ö.

Indicator lamp 2 lights up in the switch. The multi-function display shows the operating data. The auxiliary heating is switched on.

Page

Continuous heating 328

Timed heating 332

Preselected heating 334

329

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To set run-on time

1 Auxiliary heating switch

� Press the lower section of auxiliary heating switch 1 è.

The multi-function display shows Auxi-liary heating.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Set run-on time.


Run-on time increases in increments of five minutes.


Run-on time decreases in steps of five minutes.

iContinuous heating operation is possi-ble at any time when the vehicle is in motion.

The auxiliary heating switches to run-on mode when, during continuous op-eration, you

� turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0

� remove the key from the ignition lock

without switching the auxiliary heating off.

If you turn the steering lock to position 1 or 2 while the heater is in run-on mode, the auxiliary heating switches to continuous heating.

Run-on mode is adjustable.

330

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9





To set the temperature

Setting range:

from +10 °C to +45 °C

or

from +50 °F to +110 °F

Changing temperature units (� page 205).



The multi-function display shows Auxi-liary heat.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Set tem-perature.


The temperature increases in 1° incre-ments.


The temperature decreases in 1° steps.

331

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To set the heating time


Setting range: 0:05 h to 2:00 hrs



� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Set hea-ting time.


The heating time increases in incre-ments of five minutes.


The heating decreases in steps of five minutes.

iTo accelerate the setting procedure, press and hold down the button on the multi-function steering wheel.

Vehicles with warm water heater/automatic air conditioning:You can only set the heating tempera-ture using the rotary switch for temper-ature in the heater control panel (� page 316).

iTo accelerate the setting procedure, press and hold the button on the multi-function steering wheel.

332

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Timed heating

The heating timer allows operation of the auxiliary heating when the key is not in the steering lock. The auxiliary heating will op-erate for the period specifies.

To switch on heating timer

1 Auxiliary heating2 Auxiliary heating indicator lamp


� Press upper section of auxiliary heating switch 1 ö.

Indicator lamp 2 in the switch will light up. The multi-function display shows the operating data. The auxiliary heating is switched on.

15 minutes operating time remaining (example)

iThe procedure for setting the tempera-ture and the heating duration is the same as for continuous heating. Set-ting temperature (� page 330).

iIn timer mode, the heating time previ-ously set determines the time the aux-iliary heating switches on.

The remaining period of operation is the same as the auxiliary heating's re-maining operating time. It can be changed during operation.

333

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To change remaining time

Setting range: 0:05 h to 2:00 h


The auxiliary heating is in timer or prese-lect heating mode:



� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Set re-maining time.


The remaining time increases in incre-ments of five minutes.


The remaining time decreases in steps of five minutes.





334

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Preselected heating

With the preselected heating mode, the auxiliary heating can be switched on in the absence of the driver:

� at the programmed time

� for the set period of heating operation

This allows the cab to be warmed up be-fore the journey starts. Two memory slots are available for preselected heating oper-ation (� page 335).

Risk of fire and poisoning GOperation of the auxiliary heating creates hot and poisonous gases. There is a risk of fire and poisoning.

Do not operate the auxiliary heating

� at filling stations

� in enclosed spaces, such as garages.

Vehicles for the transport of hazardous goods: Comply with relevant safety regula-tions.

iVehicles transporting hazardous goods:

Preselected heating operation is not possible.

iIn preselect mode, the heating time previously set determines the switch-on time of the auxiliary heating.

The remaining period of operation is the same as the auxiliary heating's remaining heating time. It can be changed during operation.

The procedure for setting the tempera-ture and the heating time is the same as for continuous heating.

Setting heating time (� page 331).

Setting temperature (� page 330).

The procedure for setting the remain-ing time is the same as for timed heat-ing. Changing remaining time (� page 333).

335

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Activating/programming preselect heating mode




� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Set memo-ry.

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Timer: 1 or Timer: 2.

� Press the j button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to progress to setting the day.

iProgramming is not possible when the auxiliary heating is in operation.

Programming is still possible when the key has been removed from the steer-ing lock.

A programmed pre-setting will activate the auxiliary heating only once. For re-peated activation, the preselection should be reprogrammed or reactivat-ed.

336

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows the day required.

� Press the j button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to progress to setting the hour.

To set the hours

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows the de-sired hour.

� Press the j button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to progress to setting the minutes.

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows the de-sired minutes.





iThe Timer: --, switches the auxiliary heating on at the preset time regard-less of the day of the week.

To accelerate the setting procedure, press and hold down the button.

337

Controls in detail

Climate control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Deactivating preselect function

� Call up the auxiliary heating menu (� page 335).

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Set memo-ry.

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Timer: off.





Switching off auxiliary heating

All modes of operation

1 Auxiliary heating2 Auxiliary heating indicator lamp3 Auxiliary heating menu shortcut

� Press the upper section of auxiliary heating switch 1.

The indicator lamp in the switch goes out. The multi-function display shows Auxiliary heating has been switched off.

338

Controls in detail

Open-air

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Open-air

The side windows open and close electri-cally. Switches for the driver's and co-driv-er's door are located in the driver's doors. A switch for the co-driver's door is located in the co-driver's door.

1 To close left-hand side window2 To open left-hand side window3 To close right-hand side window4 To open right-hand side window

Opening and closing the side windows Risk of injury G

Always keep an eye on the closing operation of the side windows to see that no-one be-comes caught. Release the switch if danger threatens.

Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even for just a short period.

Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could injure themselves.

339

Controls in detail

Open-air

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Opening left-hand/right-hand side win-dow

� Press switch 2 or 4 for approximate-ly one second.

The left or right-hand side window will open fully.

Opening left-hand/right-hand window partially

� Press switch 2 or 4 briefly.

The left or right-hand window will open while the switch is being pressed.

Closing left-hand/right-hand window

Vehicles with central locking:

� Press and hold switch 1 or 3 until the window is at the required height.

Closing left-hand/right-hand window fully


� Press switch 1 or 3 for approximate-ly one second.

The left or right-hand window will close fully.

iPressing the switch briefly will interrupt the motion of the window.

iPressing the switch briefly will interrupt the motion of the window.

Protection against entrapment stops the closing procedure of the window concerned if an obstacle prevents com-plete closure.

A locking procedure closes any opened windows.

340

Controls in detail

Open-air

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The sliding/tilting sunroof opens and clos-es electrically. The switches are located in the switch unit above the windscreen and in the switch unit of the lower berth.

The sliding/tilting sunroof can be dark-ened for breaks. A screen prevents insects from entering the cab if required.

1 To open2 To close

To raise

� Press switch 1 briefly.

The sliding/tilting sunroof moves into the raised position.

To open

� Press switch 1 and then release.

The sliding/tilting sunroof moves into the raised position.

� Press and hold switch 1 until the roof is opened to the required position.

To close

� Press and hold switch 2 until the roof is closed to the required position.

To close sliding/tilting sunroof fully

� Press switch 2 briefly.

The sliding/tilting sunroof will close fully.

Opening and closing the sliding/tilting sunroof Risk of injury G

When closing the sliding/tilting sunroof, en-sure that nobody becomes trapped in it. Re-lease the switch if danger threatens.

Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even for just a short period.

Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could injure themselves.

341

Controls in detail

Open-air

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To switch on sliding/tilting sunroof closure lock


The lock switch prevents automatic clos-ing of the sliding/tilting sunroof by the en-hanced central locking system. This is wise e.g. to maintain air circulation in the cab when it is locked up.

1 Sliding/tilting sunroof closure lock

� Press switch 1.

The indicator lamp in the switch lights up. The next time the vehicle is locked, the sliding/tilting sunroof will remain open.

Disabling the sliding/tilting sunroof closure lock

� Press switch 1.

The indicator lamp in the switch goes out. The lock is deactivated.

iPressing the switch briefly will interrupt the motion of the sunroof.

Protection against entrapment stops the closing procedure of the sunroof if an obstacle prevents complete closure.


A locking procedure will close the sliding/tilting sunroof if it is open.

iOnce enabled, the closure lock is active for just one locking procedure with the key removed from the ignition lock.

342

Controls in detail

Open-air

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Insect screen and tinting

The insect screen is located in the front of the sliding/tilting sunroof in the opening. The tinting screen is located in the rear of the sliding/tilting sunroof in the opening.

1 Insect screen2 Tinting screen

To open

� Pull the tinting or insect screen to the other side of the opening and hook in place.

To close

� Unhook tinting or insect screen.

A retractor will draw the tinting or in-sect screen back.

The tilting roof opens and closes electrical-ly. The switches are located in the switch unit above the windscreen and in the switch unit of the lower berth.

1 To open2 To close

Opening and closing the tilting roof

343

Controls in detail

Open-air

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To open

� Press and hold switch 1 until the tilt-ing roof is opened to the required height.

To close

� Press and hold switch 2 until the tilt-ing roof is closed.

The roof hatch can be opened to three dif-ferent positions:

� Tilted at the front

� Completely raised

� Tilted at the rear

The 3 positions allow different levels of ventilation.

1 Handles

To open

� Grab hold of both handles 1.

� Apply pressure to the roof hatch and push it to the desired position.

To close

� Grab hold of both handles 1.

� Pull roof hatch downwards until the locking mechanism audibly engages.

Opening and closing the roof hatch

344

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Features

1 Cover plate2 Insert

To open ashtray

� Hold cover plate at grip and open.

To remove insert

� Lift up insert on one side and remove from retainer.

To fit insert

� Place insert in retainer.

To close the ashtray

� Hold cover plate by grip and close.

1 Cigarette lighter

Ashtray Cigarette lighter

iThe socket for the cigarette lighter can also be used as a power source for electrical equipment up to a maximum of 240 W. Other sockets (� page 356).

345

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


� Push cigarette lighter button until it en-gages.

When the spiral is glowing, the button will spring out automatically.

Risk of injury, fire and accident G� You could burn yourself on a hot ciga-

rette lighter. Only hold the cigarette lighter by its handle.

� If children are travelling with you, re-move the cigarette lighter from its sock-et. They could injure themselves on the hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire.

� The priority is to focus your attention on the traffic conditions. Only use the ciga-rette lighter if the traffic situation per-mits.

Cab stowage compartments (interior)

Risk of injury GDo not carry heavy objects, e.g. bottles, in the stowage compartments.

To ensure that occupants are not injured by falling objects in the cab as a result of sud-den deceleration:

� all stowage compartments must be closed and locked when the vehicle is in motion,

� the load in each stowage compartment should not exceed

� 8 kg above the windscreen with cov-er

� 4 kg above the windscreen without cover

� 2 kg above the doors

346

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Cab stowage compartments in the vehicle interior are located:

� above the windscreen

� above the driver's and co-driver's doors

� in the driver's and co-driver's doors

� behind the driver's and co-driver's seats beneath the berths (� page 348)

� in the side trim behind the driver's and co-driver's seats

� in the instrument panel

Stowage compartment above wind-screen

L cab/MEGASPACE cab:

Stowage compartment above windscreen (example)

1 Catch

To open stowage compartment

� Press together both release buttons on the catch in the direction of the arrows.

� Lift stowage compartment cover up-wards.

Spring pressure will hold the cover in the open position.

To close stowage compartment

� Swing the cover down until it audibly engages.

iDrinks holders for the driver and co-driver are located in the instrument panel.

347

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Engine tunnel compartment

1 Table2 Upper drawer handle3 Lower drawer handle

To fold out table

� Pull table 1 upwards and fold out.

To fold table away

� Fold up table 1 and push it in down-wards.

To open drawer

� Pull handle 2 or 3 upwards and pull out drawer.

To close drawer

� Pull handle 2 or 3 upwards and push drawer in to the stop.

Cool box for mounting on engine tunnel

1 Cool box lid

To open cool box

� Pull handle of sliding compartment up-wards and pull out.

� Fold out cool box lid.

!Do not place more than

� 12 kg on the table

� 30 kg in the drawers

Read also the manufacturer's operat-ing instructions.

348

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To close cool box

� Fold away cool box lid.

� Pull sliding compartment handle up-wards and push in to the stop.

L cab

The stowage compartments are on the sides of the cab, above the wheel arches.

Both stowage compartments can be ac-cessed from the outside via the exterior flap and from the inside via the stowage compartment flaps beneath the berth.

The stowage compartment lighting will be switched on whether the stowage com-partments are opened from the outside or from the inside.

1 Release lever in entrance

To open stowage compartment

� Pull release lever 1 once and release.

The exterior flap will open until re-strained by the retaining hook.

iPlease comply with the manufacturer's operating, care and maintenance in-structions for the cool box.

!Switch the cool box off before tilting the cab back and wait for ten minutes after the cab has been tilted back be-fore switching it on.

Cab stowage compartments (exterior)

349

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Pull release lever 1 once more and re-lease.

The exterior flap is released.

� Open exterior flap by swinging it to-wards the entrance until the flap en-gages on the limit stop.

To close stowage compartment

� Close exterior flap until it audibly en-gages.

MEGASPACE cab

Upper stowage compartments

The two upper stowage compartments are opened and closed in the same way as the those in the L cab (� page 348).

Lower exterior stowage compartments

The two stowage compartments are at the sides of the cab, above the wheel arches.

The two lower stowage compartments can be accessed only via the exterior flap.

When the stowage compartments are opened, the stowage compartment light-ing will be switched on.

MEGASPACE cab stowage compartment

1 Lower exterior stowage compartment release lever

2 Lower exterior flap

350

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Opening exterior stowage compartment

� Open the driver's or co-driver's door.

� Pull release lever 1 once and release.

The exterior flap will open until re-strained by the retaining hook.

� Pull release lever 1 once more and re-lease.

The exterior flap is released.

� Swing exterior flap 2 upwards.

� Press the hinge joint up.

� Swing the exterior flap down. The hinge joint will engage.

To close exterior stowage compartment

� Swing exterior flap 2 upwards.

The hinge joint will disengage.

� Swing exterior flap 2 down until you hear it engage in the lock.

The telephone bracket for the hands-free equipment is located above the wind-screen on the right of the audio unit.

If you wish to use the hands-free device, the bracket must be fitted with a phone holder compatible with your mobile tele-phone. For further information contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

A detailed description of how to assemble the phone holder and the mobile telephone is included with the phone holder.

Telephone

!Bank cards, credit cards or other cards with magnetic strips should not be brought in the vicinity of the telephone bracket. The magnet installed in the bracket could otherwise delete or alter the information stored on the cards.

351

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

You can operate your telephone using the ì and í buttons on the multi-func-tion steering wheel once it is fitted in the phone holder.

1 Telephone bracket2 Connector3 Microphone

Empty telephone bracket

1 Connector2 Telephone bracket

If no phone holder is fitted:

� Insert connector 1 in telephone bracket 2.

iWhen you remove the key from the steering lock, the telephone will remain on for approximately 60 minutes.

If you make or receive a call within this time, the telephone switches off 60 minutes from the end of use.

The hands-free capability is not guaran-teed, if you use a commercially availa-ble phone holder.

352

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Making/receiving calls with the hands-free device

1 Network operator logo2 Network signal display



� Press the ì button on the multi-function steering wheel.

The multi-function display switches to the telephone menu.

When the telephone is switched off, the multi-function display will show Tele-phone off.

When the telephone is switched on but the PIN has not yet been entered, the multi-function display will show Enter telephone PIN.

� Enter PIN using the mobile telephone keypad and confirm.

The telephone will search for a cellular network.

When the network logo 1 and net-work reception bar 2 are shown in the multi-function display, the mobile tele-phone is ready for operation.

Risk of accident GOperating mobile telephones that have an aerial inside the vehicle can lead to malfunc-tions in the vehicle's electronic systems.

As a result, the operating reliability and road safety is at considerable risk.

Only use the telephone with a permanently installed hands-free system and if the traffic conditions allow it. Attention would other-wise be drawn away too much.

353

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To dial a new number

� Enter the telephone number on the telephone keypad.

� Press the í button on the multi-function steering wheel to dial the number.

To receive a call

If the phones rings, the multi-function dis-play will show:

� Call

� Telephone number of caller (as long as this has not been suppressed)

� Press the í button on the multi-function steering wheel to take the call.

The multi-function display will show:

� The number or call or

� the entry from your personal tele-phone book

� the call duration

Taken call

To finish a call

� Press the ì button to finish the call.

The driver information system returns to the basic menu screen for the tele-phone.

To reject a call

It is possible to reject a call.

� Press the ì button to reject a call.

The driver information system returns to the menu that was active before the call was made, e.g. Monitoring info menu.

354

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To select a number from the telephone book

The mobile telephone must be ready for operation.


The driver information system changes to the telephone menu.


The driver information system imports the telephone book entries that are stored on the SIM card or in the tele-phone. This can take up to 30 seconds. The multi-function display shows Please wait.

When the Please wait event message goes out, the transfer of data is com-plete.

� Press button j or k on the mul-ti-function steering wheel until the mul-ti-function display shows the required entry.

Telephone book entry

� Press the í button on the multi-function steering wheel.

The driver information system selects the relevant number.

When a connection is made, the name and number of the person you are calling is shown in the display as well as the duration of the call.

Duration of call

If no connection is made, the driver infor-mation system stores the selected number in the redial memory.

iNew numbers should be entered using the telephone keypad.

355

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Telephone book quick find function


The driver information system changes to the telephone menu.

� Press and hold button j or k on the multi-function steering wheel.

The driver information system switches from one initial letter to the next.

� When the display shows the initial let-ter you are looking for, release the but-ton.

The display will show the first entry be-ginning with the letter you have cho-sen.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows the entry required.

Last number redial

The driver information system stores the most recently dialled numbers in the order they were entered in the redial memory.

Redial memory entry


The driver information system selects the first entry in the redial memory.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows the entry required.


The driver information system selects the relevant number.

356

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The vehicle can be equipped with up to 4 sockets.

24 V/10 A socket in ashtray

The housing for the cigarette lighter in the ashtray is also a socket. The socket is de-signed for equipment with a maximum power draw of 240 W.

1 24 V/10 A socket

24 V/10 A socket in dashboard

The socket is located in the stowage com-partment above the ashtray. The socket is designed for equipment with a maximum power draw of 240 W.

2 24 V/10 A socket

Sockets

Page

24 V/0 A socket in ashtray 356


356

24 V/10 A socket in battery tray

358


357

Voltage transformer

12 V/8 A 358

12 V/15 A 358

357

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


The socket is located in the dashboard on the co-driver's side. It can be switched on and off. Power is supplied through a 12 V/ 15 A voltage transformer.

It is designed for the use of equipment with a maximum power draw of 180 W.

3 12 V/15 A socket

To switch on the 12 V socket

� Press the upper section of the 12 V switch.


To switch off the 12 V socket

� Press the lower section of the 12 V switch.


358

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

24 V/10 A socket in battery tray

All vehicles except tractor units:

The socket is designed for the use of an in-spection lamp. It is located on the right-hand side in the battery tray.

It is designed for the use of equipment with a maximum power draw of 240 W.

4 24 V/10 A socket (example)

Voltage transformer

12 V/8 A voltage transformer

The vehicle features a 12 V/8 A voltage transformer as standard for the use of

� Radio equipment

� CB radio equipment

� Telephone/fax machine

� 12 V audio equipment

12 V/15 A voltage transformer

The voltage transformer supplies the 12 V/15 A socket with power. It is switched on or off with the 12 V switch (� page 22).

!The voltage transformer is intended for the operation of this equipment only. The connection of further equipment to the 12 V source is not permitted. Fur-ther information is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

iThe voltage transformer is intended to supply power to the socket only. The connection of further equipment to the 12 V source is not permitted. Further information is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

359

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The buttons on the multi-function steering wheel 1 and the audio equipment switch in the berth switch unit 2 may be used to operate the basic functions of the follow-ing audio equipment

� Truckline CC30

� Truckline CC70

� Truckline CD70

You must select the Audio menu to

� choose a radio station (� page 361)

� operate the CD player (� page 363)

� operate the cassette player (� page 364)

using the buttons of the multi-function steering wheel.

1 Multi-function steering wheel buttons2 Audio equipment switches in the berth

switch unit

To switch the audio equipment on/off

You can switch the audio equipment on or off using switch 2 in the berth switch unit.

� Press and hold switch 2 y for ap-proximately three seconds.

If the radio is switched off, it will be switched on.

If the radio is switched on, it will be switched off.

Operating audio equipment

iCommercially available audio equip-ment cannot be operated using the but-tons in the multi-function steering wheel or the audio equipment switches in the berth switch unit. For further in-formation contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

iWhen you are seated in the driver's seat, you can only switch the equip-ment on or off at the radio. Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.

360

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To adjust the volume

You can adjust the volume of the audio equipment with the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel and the audio equipment switch in the berth switch unit.

With multi-function steering wheel but-tons

� Press the æ button.

The volume will increase

� Press button ç.

The volume will decrease.

With the audio equipment switch in the berth switch unit

� Press switch $ briefly.

The volume will increase

� Press switch y briefly.

The volume will decrease.

iYou can still adjust the volume of the audio equipment even if the audio menu is not shown in the multi-function display.

If the driver information system shows the ? symbol in the multi-function display, you can use the æ and ç buttons on the multi-function steering wheel to make a selection or adjustment. The volume control then no longer works.

361

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To select a radio station

When you have selected the audio menu, use the arrow buttons to

� activate the station search function

� change between stored radio stations

1 Frequency and stored station number2 Radio traffic information1

3 Frequency or station name1

� Switch on the audio equipment. Ob-serve the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.

� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Audio.


If the radio station search function is active, the audio equipment will search for the next or previous station in the selected frequency band.

If the store function is active, the audio equipment will change to the next or previous stored radio station.

iThe arrow button function in radio mode can be adjusted in the Configu-ration sub menu of the Settings menu (� page 362).

You can only store new radio stations at the audio equipment.

The audio equipment can also be used in the normal way.

1. On RDS only

362

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To set the function of the arrow buttons in radio mode

� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Settings.

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on Configuration.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Arrow buttons in radio mode.

� Press the æ button on the multi-function steering wheel. The highlight is on Station search.

� Press the ç button on the multi-function steering wheel. The highlight is on Memory.



363

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To operate the CD player

Audio equipment: Truckline CD70

� Switch on the audio equipment and se-lect the CD player. Observe the operat-ing instructions issued by the manufacturer.


1 Current CD – CD changer operation2 Radio traffic information1

3 Current track


The CD player selects the next track.

� Press the k button on the multi-function steering wheel.

The CD player selects the previous track.

1. On RDS only

364

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To operate the cassette player

Audio equipment: Truckline CC30 or CC70

Once you have selected the audio menu, you can operate the cassette player using the arrow buttons

� to fast forward or reverse the cassette to the next or previous track in cas-sette search mode.

� to fast forward or reverse the cassette in wind/rewind mode

1 Cassette operation2 Radio traffic information1

3 Cassette side

� Switch on the audio equipment and se-lect the cassette player. Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.


1. On RDS only

365

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


If the rewind/wind function is active, the cassette player will rewind 8 or wind 9 the cassette.

If the track search function is active, the cassette player will rewind 0 to the start of the current track or fast for-ward to the beginning of the next track ß.

To set the function of the arrow buttons in cassette mode

� Press button è or ÿ on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Settings.

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on Configuration.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Arrow buttons in cassette mode.

iThe audio equipment will stop the winding function when

� the end of the cassette, the start of the current track or the next track is detected

� you press the arrow button again

��

366

Controls in detail

Features

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Press the æ button on the multi-function steering wheel. The highlight is on Track search.

� Press the ç button on the multi-function steering wheel. The highlight is on Fast forward and Rewind.



367

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Operation

Driving tips

Refuelling

Trailer/semitrailer

Wind deflector

Tippers

Tyres and wheels

Winter operation

Care

Maintenance

368

Operation

Driving tips

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Driving tips

The "Operation" section contains detailed information about operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle.

Risk of accident GDistribute the load on the vehicle uniformly. Avoid excessive loads on one side. The vehi-cle's driving, braking and steering charac-teristics vary with the type of load, the weight and the centre of gravity of the load. Secure loads if necessary.

Excessive loading at the rear will have a par-ticularly adverse effect on the vehicle's han-dling characteristics. For this reason, greater care and attention are called for when driving with a load at the rear.

Do not exceed the permissible axle loads, the wheel loads (½ axle load) or the maxi-mum permissible gross vehicle weight. There is otherwise the risk of damage to tyres, the chassis frame and axles.

Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gear-shift: The Telligent® automatic gearshift switches off automatically at idling speed (approximately 550 rpm). On uphill or down-hill slopes, do not allow the engine speed to drop to idling speed (approximately 550 rpm).

!When driving the vehicle on rough ter-rain, ensure that the drive wheels al-ways have sufficient grip.

Vehicles without ASR: Do not allow the drive wheels to spin. There is otherwise a risk of damage to the differential. Switch on the differential locks.

During the journey, check the instru-ment readings periodically.

369

Operation

Driving tips

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Fuel consumption depends on

� the vehicle design

� the driving style

� the operating conditions

� the type of fuel used (diesel fuel, FAME fuel)

Vehicle design

� Tyre size, tyre tread, tyre pressures, tyre condition

� Body, wind deflector

� Gear ratios in the drive train

� Additional equipment (air conditioning, auxiliary heating, PTO, viscous fan clutch)

Driving style

To keep fuel consumption low,

� avoid frequent acceleration and brak-ing

� anticipate road and traffic conditions

� maintain an economical engine speed range

Operating conditions

� trailer towing and tipper operation

� mountainous terrain

� dense urban traffic and frequent short journeys

� vehicle load

� operation when stationary

� frequent cold starts

Environmental note HRegular vehicle maintenance is one of the preconditions for moderate fuel consump-tion.

Fuel consumption

iFuel consumption values can be called up in the Trip computer menu in the driver's information system (� page 166).

iAs a result of the numerous superstruc-ture variants, it is impossible to provide a precise fuel consumption value in these Operating Instructions.

370

Operation

Driving tips

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

When the engine is run in, oil consumption may reach 0.5% of the fuel consumption recorded in actual operating circumstanc-es. A longer distance covered and more ar-duous operating conditions could lead to certain vehicles exceeding this value.

Running the vehicle in

It is of decisive importance for the engine not to be subjected to its full rated load during the running-in period.

� Run the vehicle in gently. Drive at vary-ing road and engine speeds.

� Avoid high engine speeds. Do not drive any more than ¾ of the maximum road speed for each gear.

� Change gear in good time. Do not shift down to brake the vehicle.

After a distance of 1,250 miles (2,000 km), you can gradually bring the vehicle up to full road and engine speed.

Wheel nuts

Engine oil consumption The first 1,250 miles (2,000 km)

Risk of accident GOn new vehicles there is the risk that the wheel nuts could work loose if they are not tightened. The wheel nuts must be tightened after driving 30 miles (50 km). Observe the notes on page 392 and torques on page 577.

371

Operation

Driving tips

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The vehicle is equipped with a Telligent® brake system. For notes on braking with anti-lock protection (� page 84).

Activate the continuous brake to make full use of the engine braking effect on long downhill sections (� page 261).

Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gear-shift: If the continuous brake is selected, the transmission will automatically shift down to the next appropriate gear, de-pending on the road and engine speed.

Always stop the engine with the parking brakes applied. For notes on applying the parking brake (� page 130).

When the vehicle is parked, it must be pre-vented from rolling away by chocking at least one wheel. Carrying a wheel chock in an easily accessible position on the vehicle is a legal requirement.

After dark, the vehicle must have its park-ing lamps on if it is standing on the public highway. In urban areas, it is also possible to attach reflective overnight parking boards. Observe the legal requirements.

Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gear-shift: If in an emergency it is necessary to park the vehicle without the parking brake applied, engage a gear. Chock the vehi-cle's wheels additionally to prevent it from rolling away.

Brakes

!Do not park the vehicle immediately af-ter the brakes have been subjected to severe loads, such as driving through valleys. Drive on a short distance to al-low the airflow to cool the brakes down.

iAfter driving on a wet surface, particu-larly if road salt has been spread, apply the brakes firmly before parking the ve-hicle. The heat generated will help to dry the brake discs. The prevents corrosion of the brake discs.

Parking

!When parking the vehicle, do not allow the wheels to mount the kerb. This could damage the tyres or steering components.

372

Operation

Refuelling

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Refuelling

Refuelling the vehicle from drums or canis-ters could introduce impurities into the fuel system. This can lead to fuel system malfunctions.

� Filter the fuel before filling the tank.

You will find information about fuel in the "Technical data" section (� page 562).Risk of injury/explosion G

Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are therefore prohibited when fuel is being handled.

Switch off the auxiliary heating when refuel-ling to prevent fuel vapours from igniting in the auxiliary heating exhaust system.

Do not allow fuel to come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.

Your health is at risk:

� if your skin or eyes come into direct con-tact with fuel

� if you inhale fuel vapours

� Clean affected areas of skin with soap and water.

� If fuel comes into contact with the eyes, wash them thoroughly with clean water and consult a doctor.

� Change out of soiled clothing without delay.

� If fuel is swallowed, a doctor should be consulted immediately.

� Keep fuel away from children.

!Do not add bio-diesel fuel (FAME fuel), petrol or fuel additives to diesel fuel.

iCheck the fuel prefilter with heated wa-ter separator regularly for condensa-tion.

Environmental note HUnless they are handled properly, fuels con-stitute a risk both for people and for the en-vironment. Fuels must not be allowed to get into the sewage system, surface waters, the ground water or the ground itself.

373

Operation

Trailer/semitrailer

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Trailer/semitrailer

The trailer tow hitch or semitrailer coupling is one of the vehicle components with par-ticular importance for road safety. Please comply precisely with the manufacturer's operating, care and maintenance instruc-tions. For further information, also see page 416.

Towing semitrailers

Before coupling (if "one-man operation" is possible) make sure that the semitrailer plate is at least 50 mm lower than the up-per edge of the coupling plate.

� Reverse and couple up the semitrailer.

� After coupling up a semitrailer, lock the levers to prevent unauthorised opera-tion which could lead to the coupling becoming detached.

� Connect cables and compressed-air lines (� page 375).

Trailer/semitrailer coupling

Risk of accident and injury GRisk of trailer breaking away.

Check longitudinal play in the trailer tow hitch every day. To do this, move the towbar body of the hitch firmly forwards and back. Do not hold the coupling jaws. No longitudi-nal play is permitted. If any longitudinal play is detected, have it eliminated at once.

Coupling up !Driving could cause the centre of the mudguard to come into contact with the tyres. In order to prevent damage during operation with a semitrailer, DaimlerChrysler recommends that the middle mudguard is removed, provided this is legally permitted.

Risk of accident and injury GObjects thrown up by the road surface could injure or endanger other road users. For this reason, make sure that the rear wheels are protected by mudguards when the semitrail-er tractor vehicle is driven without a trailer.

If various semitrailers are towed, too much play could be present between the kingpin and the coupling plate. This is not permissi-ble. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.

374

Operation

Trailer/semitrailer

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Truck/trailer combination

� Before coupling to a trailer, apply the parking brake and release the service brake.

� Chock the trailer's rear wheels to pre-vent it from rolling away.

The unbraked front axle of the trailer must be able to turn.

� Position the towbar at the height of the trailer coupling.

� Reverse and couple up the trailer.

� Check that the coupling tracer of the trailer coupling is secured correctly in the appropriate locating pin or safety knob.

Trailer tow hitch (example)

1 Locating pin for coupling pin

� Connect cables and compressed-air lines (� page 375).

Risk of accident and injury GCaution should be taken when guiding the rail since there is a risk drawbar impact as a result of an uncontrolled movement.

Risk of accident and injury GNobody should be present between the ve-hicle and the trailer as the vehicle is re-versed towards the trailer.

Do not allow the trailer to run onto the trac-tor vehicle when coupling.

Do not uncouple trailers with overrun brakes when the brakes have been applied by the overrun mechanism.

There is a risk that the trailer may break away. Check the trailer coupling regularly for longitudinal play. To do this, move the towbar body of the hitch firmly forwards and back. Do not hold the coupling jaws. No lon-gitudinal play is permitted. If any longitudi-nal play is detected, have it eliminated at once.

Check the tightness of the trailer coupling securing bolts at the end cross-member of the vehicle's frame regularly, and retighten if necessary.

375

Operation

Trailer/semitrailer

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Connecting cables, compressed-air and hydraulic lines

Connections for semitrailer (example)

Connections for semitrailer (example)

1 Brake line hose coupling (yellow)2 Reservoir line hose coupling (red)3 Blank socket4 24 V (12 V) connector, 15-pin5 ABS/BS connector, 7-pin

Risk of accident and injury GThere is a risk that the trailer may break away. Clean the trailer coupling regularly as stated in the manufacturer's instructions. Check the towbar mountings and end nut.

Vehicles intended to carry containers or de-mountable bodies: Objects thrown up by the road surface could injure or endanger other road users. For this reason, make sure that the front and rear wheels are protected by mudguards when the vehicle is driven with-out a trailer.

Vehicles with centre-axle trailer: No load is to be carried on trailers of this type if there is no load on the towing vehicle.

Vehicles with rear-mounted loading crane: Centre-axle trailers are not to be towed.

376

Operation

Trailer/semitrailer

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

On semitrailer tractor vehicles with side-mounted wind deflectors:

� Before connecting or disconnecting the compressed-air lines and cables, swing the right-hand wind deflector inwards (� page 381).

Connecting the cable brake system

When driving with the semitrailer tractor vehicle

� without a semitrailer

� with a semitrailer not equipped with an electronically controlled brake system or

� with a semitrailer without ABS:

� Insert the connector cable into the "blank" socket.

� Check the function checks of the Telligent® brake system in the multi-function display after connecting the connector cable (� page 77).

When driving with the semitrailer tractor vehicle

� with a semitrailer with ABS or

� an electronic brake system:

� Remove the connector cable from the "blank" socket and insert it in the trail-er's connector.

Connecting the cable voltage supply to the trailer/semitrailer

� Remove the connector cable from the "blank" socket and insert it in the trail-er's connector.

� Check that the lighting on the trailer/ semitrailer, including turn signals and brake lamps, is clean and in working or-der.

!Route cables, compressed-air and hy-draulic lines so that they can yield when the vehicle is cornered without incurring tension, kinking or abrasion.

Before connecting electrical cables, check that the voltage rating of the consumer equipment on the trailer/ semitrailer is correct.

Semitrailer tractor vehicles may only tow semitrailers with a 24 V lighting system.

377

Operation

Trailer/semitrailer

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Connecting the compressed-air lines

� Connect the brake line coupling head (yellow).

� Connect the reservoir line coupling head (red).

� After connecting the compressed-air lines to the trailer, adjust the brake pressure regulator (if installed).

� After pulling away, check the operation of the trailer/semitrailer brake sys-tem.

Connections for trailer (example)

1 Brake line hose coupling (yellow)2 Reservoir line hose coupling (red)3 24 V (12 V) connector, 15-pin4 ABS/BS connector, 7-pin5 Duomatic coupling

Reservoir line and brake line

Disconnecting the compressed-air lines

� Secure the towing vehicle by applying the parking brake (� page 62).

� Apply the parking brake on the trailer/ semitrailer. Observe the operating in-structions issued by the manufacturer.

� Detach the reservoir line (red).

The brakes of the trailer/semitrailer will be applied automatically.

iThe shutoff valves in the coupling heads open automatically when the connection is made.

Risk of accident and injury GAlways keep to this order of work when de-taching the coupling heads, otherwise the trailer brake will be released and the un-braked trailer could be inadvertently set in motion.

��

378

Operation

Trailer/semitrailer

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� In addition, apply the mechanical park-ing brake on the trailer/semitrailer. Observe the operating instructions is-sued by the manufacturer.

� Detach the brake line coupling head (yellow).

Trailer or semitrailer with telematics com-plying with ISO 11992 and corresponding sensor system:

Depending on the equipment fitted, the trailer/semitrailer monitoring system is able to monitor the following functions on a maximum of 5 trailers/semitrailers si-multaneously:

� Load temperature

� Load pressure

� Load liquid quantity

� Automatic bulb check.

Load monitoring

Minimum and maximum values for the load monitoring can be programmed in the "Settings" menu (� page 189).

The current load data and the identification number (VIN) of the trailer/semitrailer can be called up in the "Monitoring info" menu (� page 161).

The driver information system in the multi-function display shows an event message if the set values are too low or are exceed-ed.

Trailer/semitrailer monitoring

iObserve the legal requirements regard-ing the permissible number of trailers in all countries concerned.

379

Operation

Trailer/semitrailer

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Falling short of/exceeding the load temperature specified value

1 Symbol for trailer 12 Status indicator

Automatic bulb check

Trailer or semitrailer with telematics com-plying with ISO 11992 and corresponding sensor system:

The driver information system checks the bulbs on the trailer in connection with the instrument panel function check.

� Replace faulty bulbs before starting a journey.

Trailer or semitrailer with telematics com-plying with ISO 11992 and corresponding sensor system:i

An event message appears if the driver information system detects a faulty bulb.

Loading platform approach aid

Risk of accident GThe loading platform approach aid does not relieve the driver of his duty to make sure that there are no persons/obstacles in the danger area behind the truck/trailer combi-nation.

If necessary, a second person should assist during manoeuvring.

380

Operation

Trailer/semitrailer

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The loading platform approach aid is acti-vated when reverse gear is engaged.

When reversing, the distance between the trailer/semitrailer and a fixed obstacle is indicated by the driver information system in the multifunction display as a numerical value and a bar chart.

Distance in centimetres

1 Loading platform approach aid symbol

Distances less than 100 cm

Distances less than 50 cm

iThe warning buzzer will also sound at distances less than 50 cm.

When the ramp is reached, the loading platform approach aid activates the brake system to stop the truck/trailer combination.

381

Operation

Wind deflector

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Wind deflector

Adjust the wind deflector according to the size and shape of the vehicle's body or semitrailer.

� Take the wind deflector adjustment val-ues from the instruction plate on the in-side of the driver's door.

Wind deflector on cab

Risk of accident GTwo persons are needed to adjust the wind deflector.

Make sure that the working surface is suita-ble, firm and anti-slip.

!When adjusting the wind deflector, do not exceed the vehicle's maximum per-mitted height. In Germany, for in-stance, maximum vehicle height must not exceed 4 metres (13 ft 1 in).

Observe the relevant national and inter-national regulations if the vehicle is used for cross-border transport.

382

Operation

Wind deflector

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Adjusting the wind deflector

1 Securing bolts2 Adjustment rails

� Measure the height difference (H) and separation (S) between the cab and the body/semitrailer (� page 383).

� Read off the wind deflector adjustment values on the instruction plate on the inside of the driver's door.

� Loosen the securing bolts on the ad-justment rails and hold the wind deflec-tor.

� Select and adjust to the best possible retaining point on the adjustment rails.

� Make sure that the right and left-hand adjustment heights are the same.

� Tighten the securing bolts on the ad-justment rails.

Environmental note HA correctly set wind deflector reduces both fuel consumption and environment impact.

383

Operation

Wind deflector

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Adjustment diagram (example)

Adjustment example: Vehicles with long cab and high roof

H – Height difference between the cab roof and the upper edge of the body/trailer = 1,250 mm

S – Height difference between the back wall of the cab and the body/trailer = 150 mm

A – Number of adjustment detents (1 – 14) = Adjustment detents 12

384

Operation

Wind deflector

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Semitrailer tractor vehicle:

The right wind deflector can be swung in-wards to maintain accessibility to the com-pressed-air lines and cables during coupling/uncoupling.

� Swing the wind deflector inwards by applying pressure to the rear of the side wing via the turning point of the pressurised gas spring.

� Swing the wind deflector to the drive position by pulling the side wing via the turning point of the pressurised gas spring. 1 Side wing

2 Gas spring

Side wind deflector on the cab

385

Operation

Tippers

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Tippers

1 Tipper body support (example)

Tipper operation

Risk of accident and injury GWhen tipping the load, there is a risk that the vehicle could overturn.

When tipping, ensure that the vehicle is standing firmly and remains horizontal.

The wheels subjected to extra load as the tipper operates must be on a firm surface.

Three-way tipper: insert the pins into the piv-ots on the side at which the load is to be tipped.

Comply with safety regulations and the op-erating instructions issued by the tipper manufacturer.

Vehicles with pneumatic suspension: before tipping, lower the chassis frame to the stop.

Ensure that no persons are

� in the slewing range of the gate

� in the tipping area or under the raised tipper body

� under the container

� under the tipping body or interchangea-ble platforms.

When working underneath the raised tipper body (e.g. to access the spare wheel) sup-port the tipper body with the tipper body support.

386

Operation

Tippers

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Loading

� Load the tipper body so that the centre of gravity is as central as possible.

� Load large rocks or pieces of rubble carefully and do not drop them into the body from a great height.

Tipping

1 Tipper body indicator lamp

Before tipping


Vehicles with pneumatic suspension:

� Lower the chassis frame to the stop.

The multi-function display shows the chassis in its normal position B.

For how to lower the chassis, see (� page 294).

Three-way tipper:

� Insert the pins into the pivots on the side at which the load is to be tipped.

� Switch the tipper pump (power take-off) on.

The indicator lamp in the switch lights up and J is shown in the multi-func-tion display.

387

Operation

Tippers

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Multi-function display

1 Display showing chassis in its normal position for vehicles with pneumatic suspension

2 Power take-off display

After tipping

Before driving off:

� Lower the tipper body fully.

� Close the gate.

� Lock the gate.

� Switch the tipper pump (power take-off) off. Engage the tipper valve level in the driving position.

Observe the operating instructions is-sued by the body manufacturer.

The c tipper body indicator lamp on the instrument panel and the J power take-off display in the multi-function display must go out.


� Raise the chassis to its normal (travel) position.

The B chassis in normal position display in the multi-function display must go out.

388

Operation

Tippers

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Demountable tipper

Vehicles with pneumatic suspension and automatic chassis lowering feature:

Multi-function display

1 Display showing chassis in its normal position for vehicles with pneumatic suspension

2 Power take-off display

With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake applied and the engine running:

� Engage the power take-off (� page 255).

The J symbol appears in the multi-function display to indicate that the power take-off is engaged. The chassis frame lowers automatically to the low-est position. The multi-function display shows the chassis in its normal position B.

Risk of accident and injury GWhen connecting/removing

� Containers

� Tipping bodies

� Interchangeable platforms

ensure that the vehicle is standing firmly and remains horizontal.

Comply with safety regulations and the op-erating instructions issued by the body man-ufacturer.

389

Operation

Tippers

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

After picking up/setting down a container/tipper body

� Switch the power take-off off.

The J power take-off display in the multi-function display goes out.

� To raise the chassis frame to the nor-mal (driving) position, see "Telligent® level control", raising/lowering the chassis (� page 290).

The B symbol for chassis in normal position in the multi-function display goes out.

� If a chassis height has been stored: Press memory button M1 (� page 292).

The chassis raises to the stored height.

Observe the operating instructions issued by the body manufacturer.

!When picking up or setting down a con-tainer, the wheels on the front axle must not be allowed to lift clear of the ground. Risk of damage to the chassis frame.

Run the engine when coupling to a semitrailer or picking up demountable bodies or containers.

390

Operation

Tyres and wheels

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Tyres and wheels

Tyre damage is one of the most frequent causes of the failure of commercial vehi-cles.

� Before starting a journey, check the tyres on the trailer/semitrailer for:

� Correct tyre pressures (� page 579)

� External tyre damage

� Sufficient tread depth

� Foreign objects in the tyre tread

� Foreign objects between the twin tyres

Determining the age of the tyresChecking the tyres

Risk of fire and accident GInsufficient tyre pressure

� is prejudicial to operating safety

� damages or destroys tyres

� leads to overheating of the tyres up to the point of ignition

Check tyre pressures regularly before start-ing a journey and correct as necessary.

Environmental note HTyre pressures which are too low may result in increased fuel consumption.

iObserve the legal requirements regard-ing the minimum tread depth in all countries concerned.

In Germany, the minimum tread depth is 1.6 mm.

Risk of accident GTyres age from the influence of sunlight and the environment. The rubber of the tyre gradually loses its elasticity. Tyres become harder and more brittle and they begin to split through age.

Tyres more than six years old are no longer safe for use.

Replace the tyres, irrespective of wear, after six years at the latest. This also applies to the spare wheel.

391

Operation

Tyres and wheels

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

You can establish the age of the tyre using the four digit DOT code number on the side wall of the tyre.

1 DOT code number2 Calendar week3 Year of production

Changing the tyre size

iDetails about tyre and wheel rim size, tyre load capacity and speed index can be found in the vehicle's certificate.

Risk of accident GThe braking characteristics of a vehicle with a Telligent® brake system could be affected if a non-approved tyre size is used.

After fitting another tyre size the Telligent® brake system, the tachograph and the speedometer must be reprogrammed.

!Use only wheels and tyres of a size ap-proved for this type of vehicle. Comply in particular with the permissible tyre specifications for each country. These specifications may specify a certain type of tyre for your vehicle or prohibit the use of certain types of tyres which may be permissible in other countries.

Comply also with the required tyre load capacity and the speed index for your vehicle.

iYou can obtain information about how to program the Telligent® brake sys-tem from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

392

Operation

Tyres and wheels

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Wheel nut cover caps (front axle)

1 To release2 To tighten

1 Wheel nut cover

Tightening wheel nuts

iCheck wheel nuts regularly for tight-ness. Tighten if necessary.

On light-alloy wheels, the wheel nuts are not flush with the wheel bolts when tightened.

Replace damaged cover caps and wheel nut covers.

Observe the wheel nut tightening tor-ques (� page 577).

393

Operation

Tyres and wheels

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Loosen wheel nut cover caps with the wheel nut wrench (in vehicle tool kit) and remove them.

� Tighten wheel nuts in a diagonal pat-tern.

� Place the wheel covers on the wheel nuts and tighten hand-tight with the wheel stud wrench.

Risk of accident GTighten the wheel nuts of a newly changed wheel after driving 30 miles (50 km).

If new or repainted wheels are fitted, the wheel nuts must be retightened again after approximately 600 to 3,000 miles (1,000 to 5,000 km) have been covered. Observe the wheel nut tightening torques (� page 577).

394

Operation

Winter operation

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Winter operation

Before the onset of winter, make sure that

� the coolant contains sufficient anti-freeze (� page 561)

� the fuel used is winterproof (� page 562)

� when using single-grade engine oils the changeover is completed in good time (� page 557)

� the windscreen washer/headlamp cleaning system contains sufficient an-tifreeze (� page 574)

� tyres with a high grip tread pattern, if possible M+S tyres, are fitted

� snow chains are fitted to the vehicle

Adapt your driving style to suit road condi-tions.

Winter driving

!Vehicles without acceleration skid con-trol (ASR): a rapid change from smooth to rough road surfaces and spinning of the drive wheels at the same time may result in damage to the axle differen-tial. Avoid wheelspin at the drive wheels.

iIn snow and slush and on icy roads, fit snow chains to the drive wheels in good time.

All-wheel-drive vehicles:Activate inter-axle locks on the transfer case (� page 253).

Vehicles with Telligent® stability con-trol (SR):In wintry road conditions, the optimum effectiveness of the Telligent® stability control system is only achieved when M+S tyres are fitted.

395

Operation

Winter operation

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Snow chains increase traction in wintry road conditions.

Snow chains

Risk of accident GDriving too fast with snow chains fitted may result in the chains tearing, injury to other road users or damage to the vehicle. Do not exceed the maximum permissible speeds for operation with snow chains. Observe the legal requirements in all countries con-cerned.

In Germany, the legally permissible maxi-mum speeds when using snow chains is 50 km/h.

!You should only use snow chains that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

There is a risk when fitting to the front axles that the snow chains could dam-age the steering linkage components. After fitting, make sure that the snow chains have adequate clearance from steering linkage components (� page 396).

iThe law specifies that snow chains should be removed as soon as possible once road surfaces are clear of snow. The driving and braking characteristics are worsened by driving with snow chains fitted on roads clear of snow.

Vehicles with Telligent® stability con-trol (SR):If traction problems occur when driving with snow chains, deactivate stability control (� page 90).

396

Operation

Winter operation

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Checking the tyre clearance

When fitting snow chains on the front axle:

Clearance between snow chain and steering pushrod

� Fit snow chains in accordance with the fitting instructions of the chain manu-facturer.


� Start the engine.

� Turn the steering wheel towards the front-passenger side to the stop.

With the steering on full lock, there must be a clearance of at least 30 mm between the snow chain and the steer-ing pushrod.

!If the distance is less than 30 mm, there is a risk that the snow chains could damage the steering linkage components. Remove the snow chains and have the steering geometry checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.


397

Operation

Care

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Care

Information is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if impuri-ties or damage cannot be removed or re-paired by care products.

Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.

Minimum distance between high-pressure nozzle and item being cleaned:

� approximately 70 cm for round-spray jets

� approximately 30 cm for flat-spray jets and concentrated power jets

Keep the water jet constantly moving while cleaning. To prevent damage do not point the water jet directly at

� Door joints

� Air spring bellows

� Brake hoses

� Electrical components

� Connectors or

� Seals

Risk of accident GAlways keep care products sealed and out of the reach of children. Always follow the instructions for using the care products.

Fuels must not be used as cleaning agents. Fuels are highly flammable and constitute a health hazard.

Environmental note HWash the vehicle only at a properly equipped wash bay. Dispose of empty con-tainers, used cleaning materials and polish-ing wads in an environmentally responsible manner.

High-pressure cleaners

Risk of accident GDo not use high-pressure cleaners with round-spray jets for cleaning tyres or air-spring bellows. The water jet could damage the tyres or air spring bellows. Replace dam-aged wheels or air spring bellows.

398

Operation

Care

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Caring for the exterior of your vehicle

Dirt Care product Care Notes

Tree resin, bird drop-pings

Stain remover Remove the stain using a damp cloth, and buff up the area using a dry cloth.

Grease stains Cleaning petroleum Carefully remove using a soft cloth and a dab of cleaning petroleum.

Do not use petroleum for vehicles.

Insect remains Insect remover Spray the insect remains and leave for a while for the insect remover to take effect.

Wash off the insect remains with water.

Dry with a soft cloth.

Remove insect remains before us-ing an automatic car wash.

Do not allow insect remover to dry in the sun.

399

Operation

Care

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Dirt Care product Care Notes

Corrosion Remove corrosion on the chassis compo-nents and underbody of the cab. Protect the exposed areas with primer, paint, PVC un-derseal or wax as appropriate.

Corrosion results from damage caused by stone impact, chippings or salt residue.

In the winter, wash the vehicle more frequently in order to remove salt residue.

Tar stains Tar remover Spray soiled areas. Leave for one minute for the tar remover to take effect.

Wipe the tar off with a soft cloth.

Remove tar stains as soon as possi-ble. Tar stains which have been present for a long time are difficult to remove.

400

Operation

Care

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicle components Care product Care Notes

Aluminium gates Car shampoo Brush down with water. Do not use abrasive cleaners.

Compressed-air lines Clean with water. Do not use paint, spray or lubricating products, petroleum ether, benzene, kerosene or mineral oil. Do not point the water jet on the high-pressure cleaner directly at the compressed-air lines.

Vehicle exterior Car shampoo Wash the vehicle down with plenty of wa-ter.

Wash the sponge out regularly.

Rinse off with clean water.

Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light.

Clean the air inlet for the ventilation carefully.

In the winter, remove salt residue as quickly as possible and thoroughly.

Do not forget the wheel arches when you are washing the underside of the ve-hicle.

Do not use high-pressure cleaners with round-spray jets for cleaning tyres or air-spring bellows.

401

Operation

Care

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicle components

Care product Care Notes

Paintwork and paint-ed attachments

Gloss preserver

Polish

Paintwork cleanerPolishing wad

Touch-up stickSpray can

Polishing paste

Protects the paint and maintains its shine.

For heavy dirt and to remove minor scratches on varnished wooden compo-nents.

Cleans ageing or weathered paintwork.

For temporary touching up of minor paint-work damage.

Polishes very dirty or weathered paint-work and polishes out minor scratches.

Do not use any care products in direct sunlight or if the bonnet is warm.

Keep care products away from unpaint-ed attachments (e.g. door handles or seals). This will prevent stains.

Have the vehicle checked regularly for minor paintwork damage at a specialist workshop or a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Light-alloy wheels Car shampoo

Cleaning agent for light-alloy wheels

Clean light-alloy wheels weekly using a soft sponge and warm water.

Remove stubborn dirt (grease, oil, brake dust) using a soft cloth and petroleum ether.

Only use cleaning agents. Acidic or alka-line cleaning agents may cause the wheel bolts or the retainer springs of the balance weights to rust. Do not use abrasive cleaners.

402

Operation

Care

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicle components


Engine cleaning Preservative agent Have the engine preserved. Protect the belt drive system from wax.

When using high-pressure or steam spray cleaners, do not point the spray directly onto electrical components and electric cables.

Spare wheel retain-ing bolts

Rust solvent Remove dirt rust. Spray using rust solvent.

Retarder (Telma) Regular cleaning using high-pressure cleaner.

Retarder must be cold. High-pressure cleaning without solvent.

Take particular care when cleaning the stator and any electrical connections.

Windows Car window cleaner with anti-misting agent

Use a cleaning agent regularly. It is also suitable for the plastic panes on the head-lamps.

Windows Intensive car window cleaner

Use this cleaning product on stubborn or oily dirt. It is not suitable for the plastic panes of the headlamps.

Do not use this cleaning product for the headlamps.

403

Operation

Care

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicle components


Window guides, win-dow and door weath-erstrips

Talcum Rub talcum into clean, dry window guides and door/window seals.

Windscreen wiper blade

Clean the wiper rubber with a cloth and a washing solution.

Replace the wiper rubbers once or twice a year.

Headlamps, rear lamps, additional turn signals

Car shampoo Clean using a soft sponge and plenty of warm water.

Do not scrub or scratch the plastic panes of the headlamps. Avoid applying lots of pressure.

Door lock Door lock de-icer Suitable for all locks.

404

Operation

Care

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Caring for the interior of your vehicle

Vehicle components


Floor covering Car shampoo

Antistatic spray

Use antistatic spray to prevent electro-static charges from building up in the vehicle.

Cockpit Cockpit care agent Distribute the care product evenly using a soft cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.

Do not spray the care product on the dashboard or its cover.

Roof lining Car shampoo as a washing solution

Dry foam fabric uphol-stery cleaner

Stain remover

Always brush or vacuum dust away first.

Clean heavy soiling with dry foam.

Wash the roof lining using a cloth and car shampoo as a washing solution or stain re-mover if necessary.

Do not allow the roof lining to become damp.

Floormats Car shampoo

Antistatic spray

Use antistatic spray to prevent electro-static charges from building up in the vehicle.

405

Operation

Care

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicle components


Cup holder Upholstery cleaning foam

Car shampoo as a washing solution

Apply the cleaning product and wipe off with a damp cloth.

Do not use any other product.

Rubber parts Car shampoo as a washing solution

Cockpit care agent

Plastics care agent

Do not use any other care agents. Do not oil or wax parts.

Plastic parts Car shampoo as a washing solution

Cockpit care agent

Plastics care agent

Do not use any other care agents. Do not oil or wax parts.

406

Operation

Care

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicle components


Leather upholstery Leather care foam Remove stains immediately.

Wipe leather upholstery down with a damp cloth and wipe dry.

Avoid making the perforated leather ex-cessively damp.

Steering wheel Car shampoo as a washing solution

Wipe the steering wheel with a soft cloth.

Dry if necessary.

Do not use abrasive cleaners.

Gear lever Car shampoo as a washing solution

Wipe the gear lever with a soft cloth.

Dry if necessary.

Do not use abrasive cleaners.

Seat belts Car shampoo as a washing solution

Upholstery cleaning foam

Only clean the seat belts with these clean-ing products or soap and clean, lukewarm water.

Do not dry the seat belts in direct sun-light or at temperatures above 80 °C. Do not bleach or dye the seat belts. This could adversely affect the seat belt's performance.

407

Operation

Care

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicle components


Fabric upholstery Car shampoo as a washing solution

Fabric upholstery cleaner

Upholstery cleaning foam

Stain remover

Remove stains immediately.

Always brush or vacuum dust away first.

Clean heavy soiling with dry foam.

Only use stain remover on stubborn stains.

Remove beer, wine and juice stains with a clean cloth moistened with washing solu-tion. Dab the affected areas with a clean cloth moistened with washing solution. Then clean the surface with a clean cloth and clean water. Then dry.

Seat covers or articles of clothing which are not colourfast may discolour the upholstery. Such stains cannot be removed. Therefore use a suitable un-derlay on the upholstery.

Do not use a stain remover or solvent.

Curtains Mild-action detergent Wash at 30 °C. The curtains are suitable for driers.

408

Operation

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Maintenance

The Telligent® maintenance system calcu-lates service due dates for

� oil change in mechanical assemblies and

� general service work,

depending on the vehicle's operating con-ditions.

The "Maintenance" menu of the driver in-formation system provides a constant overview of the service due dates required for the vehicle and assemblies (� page 171).

An initial warning that service work is re-quired appears 14 days before the service due date. Additional messages are dis-played if the service due date is reached or exceeded (� page 172).

Any service work carried out should be confirmed in the Maintenance menu. For notes on confirming service due dates, see (� page 174).

Telligent® maintenance system iThe initial service warning can be pro-grammed to appear from 0 – 30 days before the work is due. Further infor-mation is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

!If you confirm service work but do not have the work carried out, this can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle and assemblies. Only confirm service due dates if the service work has been carried out.

iIf the work is carried out at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, the fact that the work has been carried out profession-ally will be confirmed in both the driver information system and the Mainte-nance Booklet.

409

Operation

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To ensure economical repairs, Mercedes-Benz also offers reconditioned parts and assemblies. These are of the same quality and have the same warranty as new parts. Any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will be happy to provide further information.

Risk of injury GBefore having maintenance or repair work carried out, it is essential that you read the authoritative sections of the technical docu-mentation relating to maintenance and re-pair measures e.g.

� Operating Instructions and workshop in-formation.

Also familiarise yourself in particular with the legal regulations, e.g.

� work safety and accident prevention regulations.

Otherwise you may not recognise dangers and could injure yourself or others.

Use only operationally-safe support blocks to raise the vehicle for work on the vehicle underside. Do not use the vehicle's jack for this purpose. The vehicle's jack should only be used to raise the vehicle for a short peri-od of time.

iMercedes-Benz original parts undergo rigorous quality control checks. Each part has been specifically developed and manufactured or selected and adapted to the requirements of Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The function, safety and value of your vehicle are thus maintained.

In Germany and some other countries, certain parts are only officially appro-ved for installation and attachment if they comply with legal requirements.

Mercedes-Benz original parts satisfy this requirement. If other parts are used, this could lead to reduced safety standards. The vehicle's warranty and its operating permit could be invalidat-ed. Every Mercedes-Benz Service Cen-tre maintains a stock of Mercedes-Benz original parts required for mainte-nance and repair work.

Clean the chassis before extensive maintenance work is carried out.

Reconditioned components/ reconditioned parts

410

Operation

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Checking the clutch mechanism fluid level

High-pressure grease guns

!If the grease gun has no safety device, it may damage bearing points, seals, etc.

If a high-pressure grease gun is used, its delivery pressure must not exceed 400 bar. Before lubricating, clean lubri-cating nipples thoroughly.

If a special-purpose body or special equipment is fitted, comply with the manufacturer's instructions when us-ing the high-pressure grease gun.

Regular checks

Risk of fatal accident GBrake fluid is highly toxic. If you inadvertent-ly swallow brake fluid, consult a doctor im-mediately.

Do not allow brake fluid to come into con-tact with the eyes. In the event of contact with the eyes when the eyelids are open, rinse thoroughly with clean water. Consult a doctor if you experience any pain.

When renewing brake fluid, always wear eye protection.

Store brake fluid only in the sealed original container and out of the reach of children. Comply with safety regulations when han-dling brake fluid.

!Brake fluid damages paintwork. If brake fluid comes into contact with paintwork, rinse it off with lots of clean water.

411

Operation

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The reservoir must be filled sufficiently, al-though not above the maximum mark.

Clutch reservoir

1 Max. mark2 Min. mark

� Open the maintenance flap (� page 417).

� Use only tested and approved brands. Observe the boiling point (DOT 4 plus) (� page 569).

!If the hydraulic system loses brake flu-id, it is not sufficiently sealed. Have the hydraulic system checked.

Maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.


iThe hydraulic system is a closed cir-cuit.

Environmental note HBrake fluid must not be allowed to get into the sewage system, surface waters or ground water.

Dispose of brake fluid in an environmentally responsible manner.

412

Operation

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Checking vehicle assemblies

� Thoroughly check the assemblies, e.g. engine and transmission, each week or whenever you refuel.

� If assemblies are leaking, have these checked immediately. The mainte-nance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work re-quired. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in par-ticular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a specialist work-shop.

Checking compressed-air lines

� Examine the compressed-air lines reg-ularly to ensure that they are in perfect condition.

� Have compressed-air lines replaced if they show

� buckling

� chafe marks

� dents

� or other external damage


DaimlerChrysler recommends that you vis-it a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

� Check the compressed-air brake sys-tem for tightness.

Checking compressed-air brake system for leaks

� Before checking the compressed-air brake system, the compressed-air lines should be checked.

413

Operation

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Checking with the parking brake applied

1 Reservoir pressure, brake circuit 12 Reservoir pressure, brake circuit 2


� Uncouple the compressed-air lines from the trailer/semitrailer (� page 377).

This prevents any leakage from the compressed-air system on the trailer/semitrailer.


� Press the è or ÿ button until Monitoring Info appears in the multi-function display.

� Press the j or k button until Pressure stored appears in the dis-play.

� Run the engine until the pressure in brake circuits 1 and 2 is 10 bar.


� Then turn the key back to position 2 in the ignition lock.

The compressed-air system is free from leaks if there is no visible drop in pressure in brake circuits 1 and 2 after three min-utes.

Risk of accident GA leaking compressed-air system jeopardis-es vehicle and road safety. Have leaking compressed-air systems repaired.



414

Operation

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Checking with the parking brake re-leased or partially applied

� Use chocks to safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake released:

� Uncouple the compressed-air lines from the trailer/semitrailer (� page 377).

This prevents any leakage from the compressed-air system on the trailer/ semitrailer.

� Run the engine until the pressure stored in brake circuits 1 and 2 is 10 bar.


� Turn the key back to position 2 in the ignition lock.

� Depress the brake pedal enough for a partial brake application (half pedal travel).

� Do not change the pedal position.

The compressed-air system is free from leaks if there is no visible drop in pressure in brake circuits 1 and 2 after holding the pedal in the same position for three min-utes.

Checking the seat belts

� Pull the seat belt from the inertia reel towards the rear.

The inertia reel locks the seat belt.

� Pull out the seat belt completely from the inertia reel.

Check the seat belt strap for visible damage, such as tears or fraying.

� Release the fully-extended seat belt.

The inertia reel must roll up the belt completely.

iThe check provides information on leaks in the reservoirs, valves and brake cylinders on the tractor vehicle.

415

Operation

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Checking anticorrosion protection

The cab is fitted as standard with body cav-ity protection and underbody protection.

� Frequently examine the vehicle for signs of corrosion damage. Pay partic-ular attention to

� compressed-air lines

� hydraulic lines.

� As a precautionary measure, spray the underside of the vehicle with a wax-based protective agent.

� Repair any damage to the anti-corrosion protection provided by the works.

Risk of injury GReplace the following items

� seat belts

� belt tensioners

� airbags

if these have been subjected to a load in an accident. These systems, particularly seat belt anchorages, should be checked and re-placed if necessary if they have been sub-jected to a load or damaged in an accident.



!Note that road salt has a corrosive ef-fect. In the winter, wash the vehicle more frequently in order to remove salt residue.

iNo anti-corrosion protection is neces-sary for the transmission housing. Changes in the colour of the transmis-sion casing do not limit the operation or durability of the transmission.

416

Operation

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Scope of maintenance

Axle-load compensation joints of all-wheel-drive vehicles 930.083/930.182/930.183/932.072/932.073/932.083/932.182/932.183/932.325/932.336/934.082/934.182

Lubricate every four weeks with multi-purpose grease (� page 569).

Steering swivel Lubricate more frequently with multi-purpose grease under arduous operating conditions (� page 569).

Trailer tow hitch See the manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions in the vehicle's documentation wallet.

All-wheel-drive vehicle universal joints

Grease more frequently depending on operating conditions (� page 569).

Retarder (Telma) Check the distances between the rotor and the terminal plates of the stator.

Specific specialist knowledge is necessary for this. You are therefore advised to have these checks carried out at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or specialist workshop.

Semitrailer coupling See the corresponding manufacturer's operating/maintenance instructions in the vehicle's documentation wallet.

Observe the type of coupling (standard or low maintenance).

Special-purpose bodies and special equipment

Comply with the manufacturer's instructions when lubricating.

417

Operation

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Opening

1 Release lever

� Press the two release levers to the right in the direction of the arrow.

� Lift up the maintenance flap gently.

The maintenance flap opens automati-cally as far as the safety catch stop.

Environmental note HWhen maintenance work is complete, dis-pose of

� service products

� empty containers

� cleaning materials

� parts which came into contact with serv-ice products (e.g. filters)

� used semitrailer coupling sliders

in an environmentally responsible manner.

Maintenance flap

Risk of injury GThe maintenance flap opens automatically and could injure persons standing its slew-ing range.

Ensure that nobody is standing in the slew-ing range of the maintenance flap.

418

Operation

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Closing

� Swing the maintenance flap down and make sure that it audibly engages in its retaining catches.

Checking the engine oil level

The engine oil level can only be called up in the driver information system. Calling up the engine oil level (� page 163).

Topping up the engine oil

If the engine oil level is too low or too high, an event message will appear in the multi-function display.

Risk of injury GWhen you close the maintenance flap, per-sons standing in the slewing range of the maintenance flap could be injured.

Ensure that nobody is standing in the slew-ing range of the maintenance flap.

Engine oil level iOnly add the amount of oil required af-ter the event message with system abbreviation/symbol N has been displayed. Then add the complete quantity recommended.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you add the amount of oil displayed in the Monitoring Info menu before embark-ing on long journeys.

419

Operation

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Maintenance flap opened (example)

1 Oil filler cap

� Open the maintenance flap (� page 417),

� Unscrew the oil filler cap,

� Top up the oil

� Unscrew the oil filler cap, check for tightness and leakage,

� Close the maintenance flap (� page 418).

Add a commercially-available windscreen washer concentrate for summer or winter to the water. DaimlerChrysler recom-mends Mercedes-Benz windscreen washer concentrate S for summer or W for Winter.

!Use only approved engine oils in the specified SAE viscosity classes (� page 557).

Drain or siphon off excess oil.

Topping up the windscreen washer/ headlamp cleaning system

Risk of fire and explosion GWindscreen washer/antifreeze concentrate is highly flammable.

Avoid fire and naked flame and refrain from smoking when handling windscreen washer/antifreeze concentrate.

420

Operation

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Use windscreen washer concentrate marked with S at temperatures above freezing.

� Use antifreeze concentrate marked with W when driving in icy conditions.

1 Cap on the windscreen washer/ head-lamp cleaning system reservoir

� Open the maintenance flap (� page 417),

� Unscrew the cap,

� Refill the reservoir,

� Replace the cap on the reservoir and turn it firmly as far as the stop,


iThe windscreen washer concentrate containers are marked with S for sum-mer or W for winter. Observe the cor-rect mixing ratio.

421

Operation

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Only check the coolant level with the vehi-cle standing on a level surface, with the engine switched off and a coolant temper-ature below 50 °C.

Coolant levelRisk of injury/poisoning GWhen opening the cooling system, there is a risk of scalding due to hot coolant spraying out. The cooling system and the coolant ex-pansion tank are pressurised when the en-gine is at normal operating temperature.

Wear gloves and eye protection.

Only open the expansion tank when the coolant is at a temperature below 90 °C.

Coolant contains glycol and is toxic. Do not swallow coolant.

!Check the cooling and heating systems regularly for leaks. If considerable cool-ant loss from the coolant pump leak-off hole occurs, have the pump replaced or repaired at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or specialist workshop.

422

Operation

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Checking the coolant level

� Open the maintenance flap (� page 417).

Maintenance flap opened

1 Coolant expansion tank cap

� To dump any excess pressure, slowly turn the coolant expansion tank cap anti-clockwise through a ½ turn.

� Undo the coolant expansion tank cap completely.The coolant in the expansion tank must be at the lower marking on the filler neck.

Adding coolant

� Set the heating temperature selector to full heat output.

� For heating systems with automatic temperature control, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock.

� Add coolant up to the lower marking on the filler neck.

� Replace the coolant expansion tank cap and screw it on tight.

� Run the engine briefly with varying en-gine speeds.

� Check coolant level and top up if nec-essary.


!Observe the correct coolant mixture ra-tio and the required water quality (� page 561).

423

Operation

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The batteries are located on the left-hand side of the chassis tractor frame or, on semitrailers, between the longitudinal members, depending on the rear design.

To achieve a long service life, the batteries should always be fully charged.

The charge status of the batteries should be checked more frequently if the vehicle is used mainly for short journeys or is left unused for long periods of time.

The batteries should be charged when the vehicle is left unused for long periods of time in order to ensure that the vehicle al-ways starts.

BatteriesRisk of injury/explosion G

Risk of explosion

Explosive oxy-hydrogen is produced when the batteries are charged. Only charge the batteries in a well-ventilated area.

As a result of the risk of explosion, avoid the creation of sparks through fire, naked flames or smok-ing.

Battery acid is caustic. Battery acid must not come into contact with the skin, eyes, clothing or the vehi-cle's paintwork.

Rinse off acid splashes immediately with tap water. If necessary, consult a doctor.

The fluid may spray into your eyes when mixing water and acids.

For this reason, wear eye protec-tion.

Children are unable to recognise the dangers posed by handling bat-teries. For this reason, keep chil-dren away.

Observe the safety notes, safety measures and recommendations contained in these Operating In-structions.

424

Operation

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Semitrailer tractors with batteries in the rear end of the vehicle between the longi-tudinal members:The batteries are only accessible with an unsaddled trailer.

Semitrailer tractor batteries in the rear end of the vehicle

Removable battery support frame on side of chassis frame

Disconnecting the batteriesEnvironmental note HBatteries contain lead. Do not dispose of used batteries with the household rubbish.

Dispose of old batteries in an environmen-tally responsible manner.

Take a faulty battery to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or a collection point for used batteries.

Transport and store full batteries in an up-right position. Secure batteries against tip-ping over during transport.

Risk of injury GThere is a risk of short circuit. Do not place metal objects or tools on the batteries.

When disconnecting the batteries, always disconnect the negative terminal first and then the positive terminal. There is a risk of short circuit if the positive terminal on the connected battery comes into contact with the vehicle components.

425

Operation

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Remove the key from the ignition lock.

� Switch off all electrical consumers.

� Open and remove the battery cover.

� Disconnect the negative terminal.

� Disconnect the positive terminal.

Disconnecting the batteries

� Remove the key from the ignition lock. All electrical consumers must be switched off.

� Disconnect the positive terminal.

� Disconnect the negative terminal.

Do not interchange the battery terminal clamps.

� Fit the battery cover.

Risk of injury GThere is a risk of short circuit. Do not place metal objects or tools on the batteries.

When connecting the batteries, always con-nect the positive terminal first and then the negative terminal. There is a risk of short cir-cuit if the positive terminal on the connect-ed battery comes into contact with the vehicle components.

!Do not loosen or disconnect the battery terminals when the engine is running.

Only tow start a vehicle with the battery connected.

Retrofitting additional electrical con-sumers or electronic equipment re-quires specialised knowledge. Maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.


426

Operation

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Following a circuit break (e.g. when recon-necting the batteries), the following work should be carried out:

� set the clock (� page 197),

� deactivate the anti-theft system for the audio equipment (see the manufactur-er's operating instructions).

Checking the battery fluid level

� Take off the battery cover.

� Check the battery fluid level.


Vehicles with removable battery support frame:

� Disconnect the battery (� page 424).

� Undo securing bolt on the battery sup-port frame.

� Remove the battery support frame and batteries.

� Check the battery fluid level.

� Slide the battery support frame back.

� Secure the battery support frame by bolting.

� Connect the battery (� page 425).


iThe fluid level in each battery cell must be approximately 15 mm above the top of the plate. Observe the "Min./Max." mark on the battery casing.

!Feed water lowers the battery power output. Add only distilled or deionised water. Do not use a metal funnel when adding distilled water. There is a risk of short circuit.

427

Operation

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Battery care

Clean batteries only when their stoppers are inserted.

The vent holes in the stoppers must be open and the cell vent tubes must not be blocked.

Grease the terminals, especially the under-sides, with acid protection grease.

Recharge batteries which are out of use with an open-circuit voltage of < 12.4 V.

Semitrailer tractor batteries in the rear end of the vehicle

Removable battery support frame on side of chassis frame

!Petrol, benzene, kerosene or similar products attack the battery casing. Do not therefore use any of these products to clean the batteries. Stickers or im-prints on the batteries could be re-moved or become illegible.

428

Operation

Maintenance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Charging the batteries � Unscrew the stopper from the batter-ies.

� Disconnect the battery terminals.

� Follow the operating instructions for the battery charger.

� Connect the battery charger to the bat-teries in accordance with the manufac-turer's operating instructions.

Risk of explosion GGas emitted from the battery may explode if ignited. Avoid creating sparks. Avoid naked flames and do not smoke when handling the batteries. Remove the battery terminal clamps from the battery charger only when the battery charger is switched off and no more gas is escaping from the batteries. En-sure that the area is well-ventilated when charging the batteries.

iDo not detach the connecting cables between the batteries.

!Make sure that the charging voltage is correct. Use a commercially-available battery charger to charge the batteries.

Do not fast charge new batteries.

Environmental note HBatteries contain lead. Do not dispose of used batteries with the household rubbish.


Take a faulty battery to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or a collection point for used batteries.


429

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Practical advice

Where will I find...?

Troubleshooting

Cab

Engine

Fuel system

Transmission

Brake system

Compressed-air system


Trailing axle

Steering system/Telligent® steering system

Wheels and tyres

Electrical system

Unlocking and locking in an emergency

Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing

430

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit and emergency equipment

S-Cab Stowage compartment on cab rear wall On right near co-driver's seat

Stowage compart-ment on cab rear wall

Cab rear wall

M-Cab Stowage compartment behind co-driver's seat

Stowage compart-ment behind co-driver's seat

Stowage compart-ment behind co-driver's seat

Stowage compart-ment behind driver's seat: 2 kg

Cab rear wall: 6 kg

L-Cab Exterior stowage compartment, right Exterior stowage com-partment, right

Exterior stowage com-partment, left

Exterior stowage com-partment, left 2 kg

Exterior stowage com-partment, right 6 kg

MEGASPACE cab 2-section

Pump lever in outside stowage compart-ment, bottom right

Wheelbrace in exterior stowage compart-ment, bottom left

Exterior stowage com-partment, bottom right

Exterior stowage com-partment, top left

Exterior stowage compartment, bot-tom left

431

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicle tool kit pocket

S-Cab Stowage compartment in driver's door

Stowage compartment on cab rear wall



M-Cab Stowage compartment in driver's door

Stowage compartment be-hind co-driver's seat



L-Cab Exterior stowage com-partment, left

Exterior stowage compart-ment, left

Exterior stowage compart-ment, left

Exterior stowage compart-ment, right

MEGASPACE cab Stowage compartment in driver's door

Exterior stowage compart-ment, bottom left

Exterior stowage compart-ment, bottom left

Exterior stowage compart-ment, bottom right

432

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Special tools

(depending on vehicle equipment)

Vehicle tool kit

1 Fitting sleeve for changing a wheel (� page 494)

2 Spacer for spare wheel holder (� page 494)

3 Installation lever for poly-V-belt (� page 462)

Vehicle document wallet

Allen key:4 Sliding/tilting sunroof emergency op-

eration (� page 535)5 Hexagon bolts (4 bolts): for fan clutch

lock-up (� page 467).

iRecommended to supplement vehicle tool kit:

Hexagon bolts M 8 x 120 mm (special-ist dealer), for removal of rear axle (HL 7, HD 7) drive shaft (� page 548).

433

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Pump lever

The pump lever is used to operate

� the jack

� the wheelbrace

� the spare wheel winch

� the cab tilt pumpPump lever (2-section)

1 Cutout for operating lowering screw on jack

2 Mounting for wheelbrace (tilting cab or unscrewing/tightening wheel nuts)

3 Retaining pin4 Cutout for operating winch5 Cutout for retaining pin6 Retaining sleeve for hand crank (opera-

tion of spare wheel winch).

To assemble the pump lever

� Engage the retaining pin 3 in the cutout 5.

434

Practical advice

Troubleshooting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Troubleshooting

Hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS)

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions

Transmission has problems with gear-shifts

Risk of accident G � Tilt the cab.

Loss of hydraulic fluid � Check fluid level in HPS reservoir.

� If necessary, top up with DOT 4 brake fluid.

� Select 1st, 2nd, 7th and 8th gears sev-eral times to bleed the hydraulics.

� If this is unsuccessful, select gears manually at the transmission (� page 470).

435

Practical advice

Troubleshooting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


� Have gearshift examined. The mainte-nance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist work-shop.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essen-tial that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

436

Practical advice

Troubleshooting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Gearshift does not operate Risk of accident G � Select gears manually at the transmis-sion (� page 470).

Leak in gearshift hydraulics � Have gearshift examined. The mainte-nance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist work-shop.


Risk of accident GTransmission damage � Tow vehicle away (� page 542).

437

Practical advice

Troubleshooting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Electronic-pneumatic gearshift (EPS III S/EPS III SA)


Gearshift no longer operates Risk of accident GMalfunction or failure of

� the transmission electronics

� drive control

� the sensor unit

� the transmission data cable

� Activate transmission control back-up mode (� page 473).

Event message: � Tow the vehicle away (� page 542).

� Have gearshift examined. The mainte-nance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist work-shop.


438

Practical advice

Troubleshooting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Event message: Risk of accident GCharge pressure too low in auxiliary con-sumer circuit

� Stop the vehicle (traffic conditions per-mitting).


� Wait until sufficient charge pressure is available in auxiliary consumer. Charge pressure event message goes out.

� Switch off engine.

� After waiting approximately ten sec-onds, re-start engine.

� If multi-function display still shows event message Clutch: failed, carry out a "short teach-in procedure" (� page 478).

� If short teach-in process is unsuccess-ful, carry out a "long teach-in proce-dure" (� page 479).

439

Practical advice

Troubleshooting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Event message: Risk of accident G � Stop the vehicle (traffic conditions per-mitting).



� Carry out a "long teach-in procedure" (� page 479).

440

Practical advice

Troubleshooting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Opening and closing the vehicle


Vehicle can no longer be locked or un-locked with the radio remote control

Batteries of the radio remote control are discharged.

� Open doors with the key (� page 103).

� Check batteries of the radio remote control. If the radio remote control batteries needs to be replaced, an event message appears in the multi-function display.

� Replace batteries in good time (� page 534).Batteries are obtainable from any spe-cialist workshop or from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

You have pressed the radio remote control too often outside the range of vehicle.

� Press the Œ button on the radio re-mote control twice and start the en-gine within 60 seconds.The radio remote control will then function normally again.

441

Practical advice

Troubleshooting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


You receive feedback from the turn signal lamps when you prime anti-theft alarm system.

One of the monitored components/

entrances is not in the normal position.� Deactivate anti-theft alarm system

(� page 103)

� Check whether all monitored components/entrances, such as:

� both doors

� the maintenance flap

� the stowage box on driver and co-driver's side

� the cab tilt lock

� all contacts or sensors of optional body attachments

are in the normal position. ��

442

Practical advice

Troubleshooting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Repeat priming procedure (� page 111).

If this is unsuccessful, have the anti-theft alarm system examined. The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.


443

Practical advice

Troubleshooting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9



The side windows no longer close auto-matically.

Faulty travel detection by door electronics. � Hold down the q button in the con-trol panel until the side window is com-pletely open.

� Hold down the H button in the con-trol panel until the side window is com-pletely closed.

If this is unsuccessful, have the power window mechanism examined.


444

Practical advice

Troubleshooting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Engine


Engine cannot be started with vehicle's own key and multi-function display shows CODE.

Immobiliser has not recognised the key. � Turn key slowly and hold it for a short period (approximately 0.5 seconds) between ignition lock positions 2 and 3 (� page 125).

You have not held key between ignition lock positions 2 and 3 for the required period.

� After four unsuccessful attempts at starting, use spare key for further starting attempts.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you carry a spare key at all times, for emergen-cy use.

You have used an invalid key.

445

Practical advice

Troubleshooting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


If this is unsuccessful, have cause of the fault traced and rectified. The mainte-nance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.


446

Practical advice

Troubleshooting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Engine does not start. Engine electronics are faulty. � Before next starting attempt, turn key back to position 0 in the ignition lock.

Multi-function display shows the event message with short symbol A.

Starter batteries are discharged. � After approximately ten seconds, re-peat starting procedure (� page 462).

Note that starting attempts lasting too long will discharge the batteries.

� Have your vehicle jump-started from another vehicle (� page 537).

Fuel supply is faulty. � Check the fuel tank.

If fuel tank level has fallen to 14% of total capacity, an event message appears in the multi-function display.

Check fuel system for leaks.

Bleed fuel system (� page 468).

447

Practical advice

Troubleshooting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Engine fails to start up when ambient tem-perature is low.

The flows properties of the diesel fuel are inadequate due to paraffin separation.

� Malfunctions resulting from paraffin separation can only be corrected by heating the entire fuel system, e.g. by parking in a heated area.Add flow improver or petroleum to the fuel (� page 563).

If this is unsuccessful and the engine can-not be started after several attempts, have the cause traced and rectified.

The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.


448

Practical advice

Troubleshooting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Mechanical-hydraulic cab tilting system


Cab cannot be tilted. Valve lever of mechanical-hydraulic cab tilt-ing pump is positioned in the direction of the vehicle chassis.

� Position valve lever of the mechanical-hydraulic cab tilting pump in the direc-tion of the entrance (� page 453).

Failure or leaking of tilting hydraulics. � Have tilting hydraulics overhauled.

The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work re-quired. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particu-lar, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

449

Practical advice

Troubleshooting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Electro-hydraulic cab tilting system


Cab cannot be tilted. Main switch of electro-hydraulic cab tilting system is not switched on.

� Press the main switch of the electro-hydraulic cab tilting system upwards (� page 457).

Valve lever of electro-hydraulic tilting pump is positioned to the right, in the direction of the driving position.

� Position valve lever of electro-hydrau-lic tilting pump to the left, in the direc-tion of the tilting position (� page 457).

Fuse for electro-hydraulic tilting pump has blown.

� Replace fuse F2 in module A2 of elec-trical compartment (� page 522, 526 and 531)

450

Practical advice

Troubleshooting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Failure or leaking of tilting hydraulics. � Have tilting hydraulics overhauled.

The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work re-quired. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particu-lar, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

451

Practical advice

Troubleshooting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1 STOP lamp


The STOP lamp goes out after not more than 10 seconds or when the engine is started.

The STOP lamp lights up if

� the engine oil pressure is too low

� the engine oil level is too low.

The STOP lamp lights up and additionally the multi-function display shows a system code/symbol, when:

� the charge pressure in brake circuit 1 or 2 of the tractor vehicle drops below 6.8 bar

� the charge pressure in the tractor vehi-cle's spring-loaded parking brake re-lease circuit drops below 5.5 bar

� the charge pressure in the trailer/ semitrailer brake circuit drops below 5.5 bar (e.g. if air consumption is too high while manoeuvring trailer).

STOP lampRisk of accident GIf the STOP lamp does not go out, or lights up while vehicle is being driven, safe opera-tion of the engine is endangered. If road and traffic conditions permit, stop the engine at once and determine the cause.

452

Practical advice

Troubleshooting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1 Status indicator (red)2 Charge pressure, brake system3 Fault location

Risk of accident GThe operating and driving safety of the vehi-cle is endangered when an event message with a red status display is present. Observe the traffic situation and immediately stop the vehicle.

The vehicle's driving and braking character-istics may change. Check the brake system and have it overhauled.

The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist work-shop.


If air consumption is high, e.g. when ma-noeuvring a trailer, do not drive any further until the STOP lamp has gone out.

453

Practical advice

Cab

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Cab

Before tilting the cab:


� Additionally secure the vehicle with wheel chocks.

� Select neutral N at the transmission.

� Switch off engine and turn key in the ig-nition lock back to position 0.

� Switch off auxiliary air conditioning or auxiliary heating.

� Close all doors, stowage compart-ments inside cab, and outside flaps making sure that they audibly engage.

� Remove all loose objects (e.g. cans, bottles, tools, bags, etc.) from cab and stowage pockets in the doors.

� Vehicles with refrigerator: Switch off and empty refrigerator.

� For safety reasons, keep area in front of gear lever and in front of cab unob-structed.

� The front coupling pin must be properly inserted.

� MEGASPACE, car transporter, LowLiner and vehicles with electro-hydraulic cab tilting system: Open maintenance flap (� page 417) and swing it fully upwards.

Tilting the cab

Risk of injury GAs the cab is tilted it can suddenly fall for-wards to end position. Persons remaining within cab tilting area can be injured.

Only tilt the cab when the tilting area is clear.

454

Practical advice

Cab

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

System graphic, cab tilting

1 Open maintenance flap2 Tilt the cab

iAlways tilt the cab fully, as far as its lim-it of travel.

Have tilting hydraulics examined if fail-ure occurs or leaks are present.

The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised special-ist workshop.


455

Practical advice

Cab

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Mechanical-hydraulic cab tilting system

Tilting pump (example)

1 Flap2 Tilting pump

Tilting pump is located on co-driver side.

To tilt forwards

� Open the flap in the entrance, and swing it up.

� Position valve on tilting pump towards entrance 1.

� Fit pump lever with wheelbrace (vehicle tool kit) onto tilting pump 2.

� Operate tilting pump until cab is fully tilted to end position. Graphic, tilting pump valve lever position

(example)

1 To tilt forwards2 To tilt back and travel position

iThe cab is unlocked automatically.

456

Practical advice

Cab

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To tilt back to driving position

� Position valve on tilting pump in the di-rection of vehicle chassis 2.

� Operate tilting pump until cab has reached the driving position.The lock must audibly engage.

� Swing the flap in the entrance down and listen for it to engage.


� Vehicles with refrigerator:

Ten minutes after the cab has been tilt-ed back to the driving position, switch on the refrigerator. Observe the operat-ing instructions issued by the manufac-turer.

Risk of accident GIf the valve lever is pushed forwards the en-trance 1 as the vehicle is being driven, the cab tilt lock can open automatically. The cab can tilt forwards if the vehicle suffers a heavy jolt.

Make sure that the valve lever is positioned in the direction of the vehicle chassis 2 when the vehicle is being driven.

iThe cab locks automatically.

Risk of accident GIf indicator lamp Ÿ does not go out after the engine is started, then cab is not locked. There is a risk that the cab may tilt forwards if the vehicle is subjected to a heavy jolt. En-sure that cab lock indicator lamp Ÿ goes out when the engine is started.

iHave the tilting hydraulics checked if a failure occurs or if leaks are present.



457

Practical advice

Cab

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Electro-hydraulic cab tilting system

1 Main switch of electro-hydraulic cab tilting system

� Turn key in the ignition lock to position 2.

� Press the upper section of switch 1.The cab tilting system is ready for oper-ation. The indicator lamp in the switch lights up.

To tilt forwards

Graphic, valve lever position of electric cab tilting pump (example)

1 To tilt forwards2 To tilt back and driving position

iThe electric tilting pump is located:

� for road and construction site vehi-cles, on co-driver side, in entrance

� for car transporters and LowLiner vehicles, on right behind cab

458

Practical advice

Cab

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Open the flap in entrance, and swing it up.

� Position valve lever on electric cab tilt-ing pump to left 1.

� Remove switch for the electric tilting pump from mounting on the co-driver side under the maintenance flap.

� Hold switch pressed down until cab is tilted fully to end position.

To tilt back to driving position

Graphic, valve lever position of electric cab tilting pump (example)

� Position valve lever on the electric cab tilting pump to the right 2.

iThe cab is unlocked automatically.

The cab has reached its limit of travel when the pump noise becomes louder.

Risk of accident GIf the valve lever is pushed forwards the en-trance 1 as the vehicle is being driven, the cab tilt lock can open automatically. The cab can tilt forwards if the vehicle suffers a heavy jolt.

Make sure that the valve lever is positioned in the direction of the vehicle chassis 2 when the vehicle is being driven.

459

Practical advice

Cab

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1 Main switch of electro-hydraulic cab tilting system

� Hold switch of electric tilting pump pressed down until cab is tilted into driving position and is locked.

The cab locks automatically.

� Swing flap in the entrance down and listen for it to engage.

� Insert switch of electric tilting pump into the mounting.


� Press the lower section of switch 1.

The cab tilting system is switched off. The indicator lamp in the switch will go out. Cab tilt lock indicator lamp Ÿ in the instrument panel must go out once engine has been started.

Risk of accident GIf indicator lamp Ÿ does not go out after the engine is started, the cab is not locked. There is a risk that the cab may tilt forwards if the vehicle suffers a heavy jolt. Make sure that cab lock indicator lamp Ÿ goes out when engine is started.

460

Practical advice

Cab

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Cab tilting system – checking oil level/ topping up

iIf a loud pumping noise can be heard when the tilting pump is operated:Check that the valve lever on electric tilting pump is set to desired tilting di-rection. Have the tilting hydraulics checked if a failure occurs or if leaks are present.



iCab tilting system is filled for the life of the vehicle. A need for topping up with oil is not envisaged. Have the tilting hy-draulics checked if a failure occurs or if leaks are present.



Environmental note HHydraulic oil is an environmental hazard.

Collect any oil which may have spilled and clean the tilting pump.

461

Practical advice

Cab

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Tilt the cab (� page 453).

1 Starter button2 Shutoff button

To start the engine

� Press starter button 1 at the engine until the engine starts.

To increase the engine speed

� With the engine running, press starter button 1 again and hold it pressed un-til the desired engine speed is reached.

To stop the engine

� Press shutoff button 2 on the engine.

To turn the engine over without start-ing up

� Press and hold down both starter but-ton 1 and shutoff button 2 on the engine simultaneously.

The starter will turn over the engine without the engine starting up.

Starting and stopping the engine with the cab tilted

Risk of injury GWhen the cab is tilted and the engine is run-ning, there is a risk of injury from hot or mov-ing parts of the engine, e.g. exhaust manifold, poly-V-belts, fan, etc.

iIf a gear is selected, the starter button on the engine will not operate.

iIt is possible to increase the engine speed until the governed speed is reached.

462

Practical advice

Engine

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Engine

Activate engine emergency running mode when

� the multi-function display shows the event message with code/symbol A

� the accelerator pedal does not function

� or the engine runs at a constant speed of approximately 1,300 rpm

Activate engine emergency running mode

� Observe the traffic conditions and stop the vehicle.


� Switch off engine.

� After approximately ten seconds, re-start the engine.

To check the condition of the poly-V-belt

Poly-V-belts must not show longitudinal tears in the running surfaces. Damaged, oily or glazed poly-V-belts must be re-placed without delay.

Engine emergency running mode

iIn engine emergency running mode, the engine speed is limited to about 1,300 rpm.

Poly-V-belt

463

Practical advice

Engine

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To remove and refit poly-V-belts

Special tool (vehicle tool kit)

1 Screwdriver2 Assembly lever

iSmall lateral cracks appear in the poly-V-belts after approximately 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km) of normal use. It is not necessary to re-place poly-V-belts that show small lat-eral cracks.

Specialist technical knowledge is re-quired to replace the poly-V-belts.



464

Practical advice

Engine

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To remove the poly-V-belt

� Insert the special tool with assembly le-ver into tensioning mechanism.

� Turn tensioning mechanism anti-clock-wise and upwards, and insert a screw-driver in the retainer hole provided.

� Remove the poly-V-belt.

� Check tensioning mechanism, tension pulley, return pulley and main pulleys for perfect condition.

Fitting the poly-V-belts

� Place new poly-V-belt in position on all the pulleys.

Risk of injury GThe tensioning mechanism is spring-loaded.

iHave worn bearings in tensioning mechanism, tension pulley or return pulleys replaced and also replace worn main pulleys.



!Observe the illustration showing cor-rect routing of the poly-V-belt (� page 465).

465

Practical advice

Engine

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicles without air conditioning

Vehicles with air conditioning

Vehicles with refrigerator block

Vehicles with air conditioning and refrigera-tor block

� Pivot tensioning mechanism anti-clock-wise and remove screwdriver from the retainer hole.

� Swing tensioning mechanism back into place.

� Remove special tool with assembly le-ver and check that the poly-V-belt is seated correctly on the pulleys.

Poly-V-belt routing:

1 Crankshaft2 Coolant pump3 Alternator4 Tensioning pulley5 Air-conditioning compressor6 Refrigerator block

466

Practical advice

Engine

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicles with belt-driven fan

Vehicles with belt-driven fan Vehicles with belt-driven fan and air condi-tioning

Poly-V-belt routing:

1 Crankshaft2 Coolant pump3 Alternator4 Tensioning pulley5 Air-conditioning compressor6 Radiator fan

iIn order to replace the poly-V-belt, it is necessary to remove the fan. This work requires specialist technical knowl-edge.



467

Practical advice

Engine

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

When there is a fault with the electromag-netic fan clutch, e.g. recognisable by ele-vated coolant temperature, it is possible to lock-up the clutch mechanism. The fan has a rigid connection to the belt pulley.

Electromagnetic fan clutch

1 Fastening tabs2 Hexagon bolts

� Turn the fastening tabs over the thread-ed holes on the fan.

� Screw in and tighten M 6 x 10 four hex-agon bolts (vehicle document wallet).

Electromagnetic fan clutch lock-up iThe fastening tabs and threaded holes are directly opposite each other.

!Replace the fan clutch as soon as pos-sible.



468

Practical advice

Fuel system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Fuel system

The hand pump is located either between the chassis and the fuel tank or next to the air cleaner housing.

1 Hand pump (example)

� Remove the fuel tank filler cap by turn-ing it anti-clockwise.

� Turn hand pump lever anti-clockwise to release it.

� Operate hand pump until definite re-sistance is felt.

� Secure the hand pump lever again by turning it clockwise.

� Replace the cap on the fuel tank and turn it clockwise to tighten.

Vehicles with fuel prefilter:

� Before bleeding the fuel system, oper-ate the fuel prefilter hand pump and completely fill the filter housing.

Bleeding the fuel system

iOperate hand pump for approximately 100 strokes until definite resistance is felt.

iThe fuel prefilter with heated water separator is located on the right-hand side of the vehicle behind the cab.

469

Practical advice

Fuel system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Fuel prefilter, water drainage

Fuel prefilter (example)

1 Inspection glass2 Drain plug3 Hand pump

� Place collector under the drain plug.

� Unscrew the drain plug.

� Operate the hand pump and catch the water/fuel mixture.

� Tighten the drain plug.

� Check the fuel system for leaks.

iThe fuel prefilter with heated water separator is located on right-hand side of the vehicle behind the cab.

Environmental note HDispose of the fuel/water mixture in an en-vironmentally responsible manner.

470

Practical advice

Transmission

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Transmission

In the case of a defective HPS, you can se-lect 3rd, 4th or reverse gears manually us-ing the shift and selector levers at the transmission. Using fourth gear, you can drive the vehicle to reach a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Tools

The required tools can be found in vehicle tool kit pocket (� page 431).

Hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS)

Risk of injury and accident GIf you select gears manually at the transmis-sion, the vehicle can roll away. Only select gears manually at the transmission with

� a stationary vehicle

� applied parking brake

� ignition lock in position 0

iYou cannot change the selected gear while driving if it was selected manual-ly.

Depending on vehicle type and equip-ment, it may be necessary to tilt the cab in order to reach the shift and se-lector levers.

Tilt the cab (� page 453).

Gear Tool

3, 4 Open-ended spanner 34 mm across flats or adjustable pli-ers

R Second open-ended spanner 34 mm across flats or second pair of adjustable pliers

471

Practical advice

Transmission

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To select 3rd or 4th gear

Selector lever on left of transmission



� If necessary, tilt the cab (� page 453).

Shift lever on right of transmission

� If a gear is selected, move the shift le-ver on the right of the transmission into neutral 5.

� If 5th to 8th gear was selected, move the selector lever on the left of the transmission to the front, to position 2.

� Move the shift lever into position 4 to select 3rd gear.

� Move the shift lever into position 6 to select 4th gear.

The gear is selected when the selector shaft can be felt to engage in the corre-sponding position.

472

Practical advice

Transmission

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To engage reverse gear

Selector lever on left of transmission



� If necessary, tilt the cab (� page 453).

Shift lever on right of transmission

If a gear is selected, move the shift lever on the right of the transmission into neutral 5.

1st person:

� Push the selector lever on the left of the transmission forwards 1 to the stop and hold it there.

2nd person:

� Move shift lever 1 on the right of the transmission to the rear to position 4.

The gear is selected when the shift le-ver can be felt to engage in position 4.

Pulling away





iA second person is required to select reverse gear.

iYou cannot change the selected gear while driving.

When you stop the vehicle, you must hold the clutch pedal depressed with your foot.

473

Practical advice

Transmission

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Using the transmission control back-up mode you can

� select 2nd, 5th, reverse gear or neutral (� page 474)

� shift the transmission into towing mode if the vehicle has to be towed (� page 473).

In the back-up function, the gears are changed with the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. You are guided through displays from the driver informa-tion system in the multi-function display via the control unit (� page 475 + 476).

In order to activate the back-up function you must enable the GS back-up function menu (� page 474).

GS back-up function menu

� With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied, press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel until Settings appears in the multi-function display.

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is positioned on Configurati-on.

� Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until Enable transmission control back-up mode appears in the multi-function dis-play.

Transmission control back-up mode iThe GS back-up function can also be activated when no fault is present in the transmission control. You may fa-miliarise yourself with the transmission control (GS) back-up function so that you can react quickly in an emergency situation.

474

Practical advice

Transmission

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To enable


The highlight is positioned at ON.

� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to con-firm the setting and go to next menu.

To lock


The highlight is positioned on OFF.

� Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to con-firm the setting and go to next menu.

Activate GS back-up function

� With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied, press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel until Transmission con-trol back-up mode appears in the mul-ti-function display.


The GS back-up function is now activat-ed. The driver information system dis-plays Please select gear in the multi-function display.

475

Practical advice

Transmission

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Telligent® gearshift

Pulling away

� Activate back-up function (� page 474).

The multi-function display shows Please select gear.

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is positioned on the gear de-sired.


Please apply clutch appears in the multi-function display.


� Press the æ button on the multi-function steering wheel. The highlight is positioned on YES.


The transmission control selects the chosen gear.


The multi-function display shows Driving in emergency running mode – restricted gear selection only pos-sible.

iWhen the GS back-up function is acti-vated, the GS back-up function menu is permanently displayed in the multi-function display. The transmission electronics monitor the driving opera-tions and give you instructions, or prompt you to confirm certain actions.

!If you do not observe the instructions in the multi-function display, transmis-sion damage may result.

476

Practical advice

Transmission

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To stop the vehicle or change gear


� Brake the vehicle to a standstill by ap-plying the foot brake.



� Select neutral or a new gear using the æ or ç button.


Transmission control selects neutral or the gear chosen.

Telligent® automatic gearshift

To pull away

� Activate back-up function.


477

Practical advice

Transmission

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is positioned on the gear de-sired.


The transmission control selects the chosen gear.

The multi-function display shows Driving in transmission control back-up mode – manual gear selection only possible for N.

� Depress the accelerator pedal slowly.

The vehicle will start moving.

To stop the vehicle or change gear

� Brake vehicle to a standstill by applying the foot brake.



� Select neutral or a new gear using the æ or ç button.


The transmission control selects neu-tral or the gear chosen.

To deactivate the GS back-up function


� Press the ÿ or è button on the multi-function steering wheel.

The driver information system goes to next menu. Transmission control termi-nates the GS back-up function.

� Lock GS back-up function menu (� page 474).

478

Practical advice

Transmission

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift or Telligent® automatic gearshift:

The short/long teach-in procedure is nec-essary to teach-in vehicle-specific data into the automatic transmission control (GS) electronics system.

Short teach-in procedure

The short teach-in procedure is required if the sensors on the transmission or clutch have been replaced.

To program the transmission control (GS)



� Depress the clutch pedal fully and keep it depressed.

� Press the neutral button on gear lever and hold it pressed.

Teach-in procedure

iThe charge pressure in the auxiliary consumer compressed-air circuit must be sufficient. The multi-function display must not be showing "Charge pressure, auxiliary consumer" Œ.

During the whole teach-in procedure, the indicators for the high f and the low splitter group g flash alter-nately in the gears display.

If the teach-in procedure is interrupted, the splitter group indicators will stop flashing and an event message appears in the multi-function display.

If transmission control (GS) interrupts the teach-in procedure, turn key in the ignition lock to position 0.

The lights in the gear display go out.

Wait at least five seconds before re-peating the teach-in procedure.

Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gearshift: the clutch control (KS) auto-matically disengages and engages dur-ing the teach-in procedure.

479

Practical advice

Transmission

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2.

The warning buzzer and a shift noise sound in the central loudspeaker. The indicators for the fast f and the slow splitter group g flash alter-nately in the gears display.


The warning buzzer and a shift noise sound in the central loudspeaker.



� If neutral N appears in the gears dis-play, release the clutch pedal.

� Release the neutral button on the gear lever.

Long teach-in procedure:

The long teach-in procedure is required if:

� the GS control unit or the engine has been replaced

� the multi-function display shows an event message with error code "a 21011".

After the display has appeared, turn key fully back in the ignition lock and then after a further approximately five seconds, turn it back to the drive posi-tion.

� The multi-function display shows an event message with error code "a 28093".

iWhen the warning buzzer sounds, you must push down or release the clutch pedal within three seconds.

You must hold the neutral button on gearshift pressed down for the whole period of the teach-in procedure.

If the multi-function display shows the event message again after the short teach-in procedure, carry out the long teach-in procedure.

480

Practical advice

Transmission

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Programming the transmission control (GS)



� Depress the clutch pedal fully and keep it depressed.

� Press the neutral button and the func-tion button on the gear lever and hold pressed down.


The warning buzzer and a shift noise sound in the central loudspeaker. The indicators for the high f and the low splitter group g flash alternate-ly in the gears display.




� When N flashes in the gear display, start the engine.









� When neutral N appears in the gear dis-play, the teach-in procedure is com-plete.

� Release the clutch pedal, neutral but-ton and function button.

iConstruction site vehicles with Telligent® gearshift:

When you carry out the long teach-in procedure, the transmission control deletes the function for construction site mode (� page 229). A Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can reactivate construction site mode again.

481

Practical advice

Transmission

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

If the drive should fail, a rigid power trans-mission link can be established in the pow-er take-off.

Power take-off (NMV)

1 Retainer2 Slotted nut3 Tapped holes for retainer

iWhen the warning buzzer sounds, you must depress or release the clutch pedal within three seconds.

You must hold the neutral button on the gear lever pressed for the whole of the teach-in procedure.

If the event messages are not deleted after the teach-in procedure, activate the GS back-up process (� page 474). Have the transmission examined.



Emergency gearshift (NMV)

482

Practical advice

Transmission

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Unscrew retainer 1.

� Unscrew slotted nut 2 to the stop, ap-proximately 4½ turns.

� Secure the slotted nut with the retainer by turning the retainer round and screwing it onto a suitable thread.

� After repairing the drive, disconnect the rigid power transmission link again.



Risk of accident and injury GWhen the engine is running, the power take-off shaft turns as soon as the connection is established. The rotating shaft can cause serious injury. Operate the emergency gear shift for the transmission-independent power take-off only with vehicle stationary, the parking brake applied and the engine switched off.

iIf the slotted nut is hard to move, turn the drive shaft slightly.

483

Practical advice

Brake system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Brake system

In an emergency or in the workshop it is possible to release the spring-loaded park-ing brake mechanically or pneumatically.

� Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

To release the spring-loaded brake mechanically

Spring-loaded brake release bolt (example)

1 Braked position2 Released position

� Slacken the release bolts to the stop (released position).

To restore the spring-loaded parking brake to operational condition

� Charge the brake circuit until the cutoff pressure is reached.

� Move the parking brake valve lever to the release position (� page 52).

� Tighten the release bolts fully (braking position).Tightening torque min. 25 Nm, max. 45 Nm.

Releasing the spring-loaded parking brake if there is a failure of charge pressure

Risk of injury and accident GWhen the spring-loaded parking brake is re-leased, the vehicle can roll away unexpect-edly.

Before the vehicle is returned to service, the proper operation of the spring-loaded park-ing brake must be restored.

!Do not use a impact drive to unscrew the spring-loaded brake release bolts.

Maximum release torque of the spring-loaded brake release bolt is 70 Nm.

484

Practical advice

Brake system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Arrangement of spring-loaded brake cylin-ders:

To release the spring-loaded brake using tyre pressure of spare wheel

� Uncouple compressed-air lines to the trailer or semitrailer (� page 377).

� Move the lever of the parking brake valve to release position (� page 52) and turn key in the ignition lock to position 2.

� Remove the dust caps from the test connection of the trailer brake circuit reservoir and from the tyre inflator valve on the spare wheel.

� Connect tyre inflator hose to the test connection and push connector on to the tyre inflation valve.

Vehicle Front axle Rear axle

1 2 1 2

4x2, 4x4 x1

1 Optional extra

– x –

6x2 – – x x

6x2/2 x – – x

6x2/4 – – x x

6x4, 6x6 – – x x

8x4/4, 8x6/ 4, 8x8/4

– x x x

iA minimum air pressure of 8.5 bar is re-quired in spare wheel.

iWhen the release indicator lamp for the parking brake ! goes out, the spring-loaded cylinders are completely released.

Comply precisely with the manufactur-er's operating instructions when re-leasing the brake on the trailer or semitrailer.

485

Practical advice

Brake system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Release is possible via:

� the front coupling head

� the tyre inflator connection

� the spare wheel

� the test connection on reservoir of trailer brake circuit.

Releasing the spring-loaded brake with an external source of compressed air

iOnly charge the compressed-air sys-tem via the tyre inflator connection in an emergency.

To release the spring-loaded brake us-ing compressed-air from the spare wheel requires a minimum pressure of 8.5 bar.

!As far as possible do not charge the compressed-air system via the tyre in-flator connection. The compressed air is then neither cleaned nor dried. Pres-sure protection is not provided via the pressure regulator.

486

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Compressed-air system

With the engine stopped, it is possible to charge the compressed-air system via the front coupling head. The coupling head is located behind the cover in the bumper and is marked red.

1 Coupling head (example)

If the shut-off pressure of the external compressed-air source lies below 10 bar, dump the compressed air on the vehicle to be towed until the pressure is below 10 bar. This can be done, for example, by repeated operation of service brake on the vehicle that is receiving the pressure.

Charging the compressed-air system via the front coupling head

!After the compressed-air system has been charged, the charge pressure available in the individual compressed-air circuits is limited when engine is not running.

487

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1 Tyre inflator connection

Charging the compressed-air sys-tem via the tyre inflator connection

iOnly charge the compressed-air sys-tem via the tyre inflator connection in an emergency.

!As far as possible do not charge the compressed-air system via the tyre in-flator connection. The compressed air is then neither cleaned nor dried. Pres-sure protection is not provided via the pressure regulator.

488

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Pneumatic suspension

� Before charging the pneumatic suspen-sion reservoir, turn the key in the igni-tion to position 2.

Charging is possible via:

� the tyre inflator connection (� page 487) or the front coupling head (� page 486)

� the pneumatic suspension "Charge" connection

Compressed-air drier (example)

1 Tyre inflator connection2 Pneumatic suspension "Charge" con-

nection

Charging the pneumatic suspension from an external compressed-air source

iIt is possible to charge the pneumatic suspension reservoir from an external compressed-air source.

iCharging the pneumatic suspension reservoir via the pneumatic suspension "Charge" connection or the front cou-pling head requires a minimum pres-sure of 10.5 bar.

Charging the pneumatic suspension reservoir via the pneumatic suspension "Charge" connection requires a mini-mum pressure of 7 bar.

!After the compressed-air system has been charged through the front cou-pling head, the charge pressure avail-able in the individual compressed-air circuits is limited when engine is not running.

489

Practical advice

Trailing axle

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Trailing axle

It is not possible to raise the trailing axle when vehicle is unladen or partially laden if there is insufficient charge pressure avail-able.

� Run the engine until pressure regulator cuts out.

It is not possible to raise the Nummek trail-ing axle when vehicle is unladen or partially laden if:

� the hydraulic pump of the Nummek trailing axle is faulty

� the fuse of the hydraulic pump motor on the Nummek trailing axle has blown (� page 525)

� there is Insufficient oil in the hydraulic system of the Nummek trailing axle

Trailing axle, pneumatic Nummek trailing axle, hydraulic

490

Practical advice

Steering system/Telligent® steering system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Steering system/Telligent® steering system

To prevent faults from occurring in the steering system have maintenance work carried out on the steering system in ac-cordance with the maintenance instruc-tions.



Risk of accident GIf the power steering assistance should fail, the vehicle will be very difficult to steer.

Adopt appropriate driving technique and have steering system repaired immediately.



491

Practical advice

Wheels and tyres

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Wheels and tyres

Spare wheel under chassis

Spare wheel under chassis

1 Hand crank2 Securing nuts

To remove the spare wheel

� Take off the wheel cover.

� Operate winch until cable is lightly ten-sioned.

� Loosen the nuts on the securing bolts.

� Lower the spare wheel and its cross-member with the winch, allowing the cable to pay out fully.

� Pull the spare wheel out to the side or to the rear.

� Unscrew the spare wheel from the spare wheel cross member.

Spare wheel location

Risk of injury GWhen you release the spare wheel, the cen-tre of gravity can easily change due to the heavy weight of the wheel, causing the wheel to fall or tip over and injuring you or other persons.

Using the winch, let down or take out the spare wheel.

492

Practical advice

Wheels and tyres

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Spacer

Spare wheel under tipper body

1 Tipper body support (example)

� Raise tipper body and fit support (� page 385).

� Remove the spare wheel from beneath the tipper body.

iSecure spare wheel with tyre size

� 385/65 R 22.5 and

� 425/65 R 22.5

only in conjunction with spacer from vehicle tool kit pocket.

Risk of accident GBefore removing the spare wheel from be-neath the tipper body, observe body manu-facturer's operating instructions.

493

Practical advice

Wheels and tyres

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Spare wheel at side of chassis

Semitrailer tractor vehicles

1 Securing nuts2 Wheel cover

� For semitrailer tractor vehicles with side panelling: remove side panelling.

� For vehicles with underride guard: Re-move underride guard.

� Remove wheel cover 2.

� Assemble hand crank with pump lever from the vehicle's tool kit, (� page 433).

� Place pump lever with hand crank on the winch so that locking sleeve on winch engages in the cutouts on pump lever.

� Operate winch until cable is lightly ten-sioned.

� Clean securing nuts and securing bolts of rust/dirt and spray with rust release fluid.

� Unscrew and remove the retaining nuts.

� Lower spare wheel with winch, com-pletely unwinding the line.

� Pull spare wheel out to the side.

� Remove the retaining plate through the centre hole of wheel rim.

iClean securing nuts and securing bolts of rust/dirt and spray with rust release fluid.

494

Practical advice

Wheels and tyres

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Information on vehicle tools and emer-gency equipment (� page 430).

Changing a wheelRisk of accident GWhere an unapproved tyre size is used, the braking behaviour of vehicles equipped with Telligent® brake system can change.

The Telligent® brake system, tachograph and speedometer must be re-calibrated if a tyre of a different size is fitted.



495

Practical advice

Wheels and tyres

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

iWhen changing a wheel note the fol-lowing carefully:

� Use only the tyre and wheel sizes approved for your vehicle type. Please also observe particularly the specific national approval regula-tions for tyres. These regulations stipulate under certain conditions a particular type of tyre for your vehi-cle or forbid the use of particular types of tyre.

Please observe also the required tyre load capacity and tyre speed index for your vehicle. Please ob-tain the information from the vehi-cle certificate.

� Special rims and wheel nuts are re-quired for conversion of the vehicle from steel wheel rims to light-alloy rims. Information is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

� Different wheel nuts are required on the front and rear axles for se-curing wheels light-alloy wheels. Do not interchange wheel nuts when fitting the wheels. Never use wheel nuts intended for pressed-steel wheels.

� Check tyre pressures. Observe the tyre pressure table (� page 579).

� Do not change the tyres' direction of rotation.

� If the tractor vehicle and trailer/ semitrailer are equipped with differ-ent pressed-steel wheels (hub cen-tring and centring with spherical spring washers): carry a spare wheel for centring with spherical spring washers. It is possible to use this wheel for both types of wheel centring until next opportunity for repair is reached. Use the wheel nuts for a wheel with hub centring. Use tightening tor-ques as for wheels with hub cen-tring.

� Do not damage threads of attach-ment studs when changing a wheel.

496

Practical advice

Wheels and tyres

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Wheel nuts for light-alloy rims

1 Wheel nuts with pressure plate2 Wheel nut with spherical spring washer

Wheel nuts for light-alloy rims

1 Single tyre2 Twin tyres



Vehicles with pneumatic suspension: this prevents re-adjustment of chassis height.

� Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

� Assemble the pump lever (� page 433).

Positioning of vehicle jack

Risk of accident and injury GThe vehicle's jack is intended only to raise the vehicle for a short time. The vehicle must be secured by axle stands of sufficient loadbearing capacity, if work is being carried out beneath it.

497

Practical advice

Wheels and tyres

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Front axle with steel springs

Jacking point

� Locate vehicle jack under the spring support, directly in front of the front axle member.

All-wheel-drive front axle

Jacking point

� Locate the vehicle jack under the loca-tion cup on the axle support frame.

!Position vehicle jack only at the attach-ment points provided, never locate jack under the differential housing.

Do not raise vehicles with a loading crane or loading tailgate, using the hy-draulic supports. Damage would be caused to the chassis.

iIf the tyre is flat, drive onto the wooden underlay (from vehicle tool kit) and tilt the cab forwards (� page 453).

498

Practical advice

Wheels and tyres

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Air-sprung front axle

Jacking point

� Locate the vehicle jack under the loca-tion cup of the air spring support, di-rectly in front of the front axle member.

Air-sprung, steered leading axle (8x4/4)

Location point of jack

� Locate the vehicle jack under the loca-tion cup, directly in front of the front axle member.

iIf the tyre is flat, drive onto the wooden underlay (from vehicle tool kit) and tilt the cab forwards, (� page 453).

iIf the tyre is flat, drive onto the wooden underlay (from vehicle tool kit).

499

Practical advice

Wheels and tyres

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Rear axle with steel springs

Jacking point

� Locate the vehicle jack under the loca-tion cup on the axle support tube.

Air-sprung rear axle

Jacking point

� Locate the vehicle jack under the loca-tion cup on the air spring support.

Nummek trailing axle

Jacking point

� Locate the jack under axle swing arm.

iPosition the support plate on the jack such that the axle arm lies in the recess of the support plate.

500

Practical advice

Wheels and tyres

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Hendrickson leading axle (6x2/2)

Jacking point

� Locate the vehicle jack under the spring mounting support plate.

Hydraulically steered trailing axle

Jacking point

� Locate the jack under the axle carrier.

To remove a wheel

� Unscrew and remove the caps from the wheel nuts using the wheelbrace.

� Loosen all wheel nuts and remove all but three evenly distributed wheel nuts.

� Remove the last three wheel nuts when it is clear that the wheel is sitting on the wheel stud under no stress.

� Remove the wheel.

iPosition the support plate on the jack such that the spring mounting lies in the recess of the support plate.

iSet the jack in such a way that the sup-port plate sits under the middle of the axle carrier.

Risk of injury GWhen you release the wheel, the centre of gravity can easily change due to the heavy weight of the wheel, causing wheel to fall or tip over and injuring you or other persons. Carefully remove the wheel.

501

Practical advice

Wheels and tyres

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To fit a wheel

Assembly sleeve

� Clean rust and dirt from locating sur-faces of the wheel hub, wheel rim and wheel nuts.

� On wheel nuts with a pressure plate, lightly oil the friction contact surfaces between the pressure plate and the wheel nut.

Twin tyres with light-alloy wheels:

� Before fitting the inner wheel, place the fitting sleeve (from vehicle tool kit) on the wheel bolt.

� Place the wheels in position and screw on two or three wheel nuts finger-tight.

� Remove the assembly sleeve.

� Screw on the remaining wheel nuts and tighten them in a crosswise pattern. Observe correct tightening torque (� page 577).

Rims with hub centring:

� Place wheel in position and screw on all wheel nuts.

� Tighten wheel nuts in a diagonal pat-tern. Observe correct tightening torque (� page 577).

Rims with centring by spherical spring washers and wheel studs:

� Replace wheel and screw on two or three wheel nuts with spherical spring washers finger-tight.

!Ensure correct centering. The wheel bolts must located centrally in the holes of the wheel.

��

502

Practical advice

Wheels and tyres

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Screw on remaining wheel nuts with spherical spring washers.

� Tighten wheel nuts in a diagonal pat-tern. Observe correct tightening torque (� page 577).

The tyre inflator connection is on the front of the compressed-air drier and has an in-tegral pressure regulator.

Compressed-air drier (example)

1 Tyre inflator connection

!Ensure correct centering. The wheel bolts must located centrally in the holes of the wheel.

Tyre inflator connection !Only use the tyre inflator connection for inflating tyres.

As far as possible do not charge the compressed-air system via the tyre in-flator connection. The compressed air is then neither cleaned nor dried. Pres-sure protection is not provided via the pressure regulator.

Risk of injury GIf you inflate tyres to an excessive pressure they can explode.

In order to inflate tyres, reduce charge pres-sure in the compressed-air system to ap-proximately 6 bar.

Do not exceed a maximum tyre inflation pressure of 10 bar. The tyres can explode.

503

Practical advice

Wheels and tyres

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To inflate tyres with the tyre inflation connection

� Reduce the charge pressure in the compressed-air system to the required value given in the tyre pressure table, e.g. 6 bar.

This can be done, for example, by re-peated operation of service brake.

� Remove protective cap 1.

� Connect the tyre inflator hose (vehicle tool kit).

� Inflate the tyre.

iObserve tyre pressure table (� page 579).

504

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Electrical system

Lamps and lights are essential compo-nents of vehicle safety. Therefore, ensure that all lamps are functioning at all times.

Replacing bulbs

Risk of injury GBulbs can be very hot. Therefore, before re-placing, switch off and allow to cool. There is a risk of burning.

H1, H3 and H7 bulbs operate at high pres-sure and high temperature. There is a risk of burning and explosion.

Only operate bulbs in closed lamps con-structed for that purpose. Only use replace-ment lamps of same type.

Store lamps and bulbs out of reach of chil-dren.

Do not use a lamp which has been dropped or whose glass bulb shows scratches. The lamp can explode.

Do not hold the glass bulb with bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass bulb with alco-hol or spirit and wipe with a lint-free cloth.

Only operate lamps at correct rated voltage.

Protect lamps from moisture when in use and do not allow them to come into contact with liquids.

Safety glasses and non-slip gloves must be worn while replacing bulbs to prevent inju-ries.

Xenon lamps operate at high voltage, high pressure and high temperature. There is a risk of fatal injury if live parts of the lamp and circuit equipment are touched. If the headlamp is damaged, do not touch the xenon lamp. Do not replace xenon lamps yourself, but have them replaced by an au-thorised specialist workshop.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For safety rele-vant work and work on safety relevant sys-tems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a spe-cialist workshop.

505

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Replacing a lamp

� To prevent a short circuit, switch off lighting before replacing lamps.

� Use only 24 Volt lamps of same type and of same wattage.

� Do not work with oily or moist hands.

� Hold lamps with a clean, lint-free cloth only.

� Check contacts for corrosion and clean if necessary.

� Check that all seals are sitting correct-ly. Replace damaged housing seals.

If the new lamp still does not function after replacement, have the lighting examined in an authorised specialist workshop.


Overview of lamps

Exterior lighting

iHave the headlamp setting regularly checked.

Main headlamps

Main-beam headlamps H1 24 V 70W

Dipped-beam headlamps H7 24 V 70W

Turn signal lamp, front PY 21W

Side lamp/parking lamp W 5W 24 V

Turn signal/perimeter, front side

P 21/5W

Front foglamp (additional headlamp)

H3 24 V 70W

Perimeter, roof front C 5W

506

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Interior lightingRear lamps

Turn signal and brake lamp, reversing lamp, rear foglamp

P 21W

Perimeter, side marker, rear lamp and licence plate lamp

R 10W

Side marker lamp LED lighting

Rotating signal lights 45W 24 V

MEGASPACE entry ac-cess step lamp

R 5W

Entry door trim lamp 10 W festoon lamp

R Cab roof/ceiling lamp

Interior lighting P 18W

Reading lamp R 10W

Nightlight W 1.5W

Reading lamp, sleeping berths

10W festoon lamp

Swivelling reading lamp, reclining seat

5W halogen

Ambient lighting (blue)

Roofspace/footwell trim 60 – 150 mcd@20 mA

Compartment above windscreen

765 – 1,575 mcd@20mA

Exterior stowage com-partment lamp

5W festoon lamp

iAlways carry a selection of spare bulbs in the vehicle for use in an emergency.

507

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Headlamps, front turn signal lamps

Headlamp (example)

1 Headlamp retaining screws2 Front foglamps

Rear of headlamp (example)3 Turn signal lamps4 Dipped-beam headlamps5 Main-beam headlamps6 Side lamps

Main-beam/dipped-beam headlamps

� Unscrew headlamp fixing screws 1.

� Swing out the headlamp.

� Pull off the cable connector.

� Disengage the cover and remove.

� Pull cable connector from the bulb.

� Detach retainer spring and take out the bulb.

� Re-assemble the lamp in the reverse order.

Insert new bulb into the holder so that base plate locates in the cutout.

508

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Turn signal lamp




� Disengage and remove the cover.

� Turn the lock of the bulb holder for turn signal lamp 3 to left and remove.

� Press the bulb down, turn it to the left and withdraw it.

� Replace bulb and re-assemble in re-verse order.

Side lamp/parking lamp




� Disengage and remove the cover.

� Remove side lamps bulb holder 6.

� Withdraw the capless bulb. Replace bulb and re-assemble in reverse order.

509

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Side turn signal lamp, perimeter lamp

1 Fixing screw2 Lampholder for turn signal/perimeter

lamp

� Unscrew fixing screw 1 and remove complete lamp unit.


� Press bulb holder 2 down, turn it to the left and remove it.

� Press the bulb down, turn it to the left and remove it.


Foglamp

1 Cable connector2 Cut-out

� Remove the housing cover.

� Disconnect cable connector 1.

� Detach retainer spring and take out the bulb.

� Re-assemble the lamp in reverse order.

Insert new bulb into the holder so that base plate locates in the cutout 2.

510

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Rear lamps

Rear lamps, left

1 Fixing screws2 Perimeter lamp/side marker lamp3 Turn signal lamps4 Brake lamp5 Rear lamp6 Reversing lamp7 Rear foglamp8 Licence plate lamp

Rear lamps

� Unscrew fixing screws 1.

� Remove the lamp lens.


To replace licence plate bulb, withdraw the reflector unit.

� Replace the bulb and re-assemble in re-verse order. Rear lamps, right

511

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Front perimeter lamp

1 Securing bolts2 Festoon bulb

� Unscrew fixing screws 1.

� Remove the lamp lens.

� Replace festoon bulb 2 and re-assem-ble in reverse order.

� Refit both screws and tighten.

Side marker lamps

1 Cable connector2 Side marker lamp

� Press retainers 1 on the cable con-nector together and hold in this posi-tion.

� Pull off cable connector 2.

� Unlock and remove side marker lamp.

iSemitrailer tractor vehicle:

swing side panel out before changing side marker lamp in the side trim.

iIf the LED is defective, the complete side marker lamp must be replaced.

512

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Entry access step lamp

Entry lamp (example)

1 Lamp lens/cover frame2 Cable connector3 Bulb holder

� Lever off lamp lens 1 with a screw-driver.

� Pull off cable connector 2.

� Press bulb holder 3 down, turn it to the left and withdraw it.



Entry door trim lamp

1 Lens2 Reflector

513

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Lever off lamp lens 1 with a screw-driver.

� Pull off cable connector and withdraw reflector 2.

� Press the festoon bulb towards left and withdraw.


The lamp lens must audibly engage when it is replaced.

Interior ceiling lamp

1 Interior lighting2 Nightlight3 Reading lamp

� Lever off lamp lens with a screwdriver.

� Press down interior lamp 1 or reading lamp 3, turn to left and withdraw.

� Nightlight 2: Pull off green cover and withdraw the plug-in cap lamp.

� Replace lamp and re-assemble in re-verse order.

The lamp lens must audibly engage when it is replaced.

514

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Reading lamp, berth

� Lever out lamp lens from the pivot hinge (arrow) with a screwdriver.

� Press the festoon bulb towards left and withdraw.

� Replace bulb and re-assemble the lamp lens.

� Fold out the reading lamp.

� Release lamp lens with a screwdriver and remove.

� Press the bulb upwards, turn it to the left and withdraw it.

� Replace bulb and re-assemble the lamp lens.

Exterior stowage compartment lighting

� Lever lamp lens out of the mounting at the back.

� Press the festoon bulb downwards and withdraw.

� Replace the festoon bulb and re-assemble the lamp lens.

515

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Adjustable reading lamp

1 Reading lamp

� Turn the switch cover to position Ò.

� Push bulb rearwards towards bulb holder and remove.


Correct headlamp adjustment is of great importance for road safety. Therefore, reg-ularly check settings with a headlamp set-ting device (observe manufacturer's operating instructions).

Observe correct basic headlamp beam set-tings, see type plate (� page 552).

In order to check headlamp setting, the ve-hicle must be

� unladen (ready for use – filled with fuel) and

� have one driver on board or a load of 75 kg

Before adjusting:

� Park the vehicle on a flat, level surface.

� The headlamp beam adjuster must be at a right angle to the vehicle.

� Correct tyre pressures.

� Set headlamp range control to the ba-sic setting.

� Switch on headlamps.

� Check each headlamp separately. Cover the headlamp not being checked, and the additional lamps.

For how to check and adjust headlamp set-ting (� page 516).

Headlamp setting

!Air-sprung vehicles: a pressure of at least 10.5 bar must be present in the compressed-air system.

516

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To check and adjust headlamp setting

1 Securing bolts2 Inner adjusting screw (vertical adjust-

ment)3 Outer adjusting screw (lateral adjust-

ment)

Lateral adjustment

� Turn adjusting screw 3 until lateral setting is correct.

� Then correct the height setting using adjusting screw 2.

Vertical adjustment:

If no lateral correction is necessary

� adjust height using adjusting screw 2.

iThe dipped-beam's light-dark boundary at a distance of 10 metres is deter-mined by measuring headlamp height (centre of headlamp to ground) and de-ducting the stated basic headlamp set-ting.

Basic headlamp setting:

� 1% = 10 cm

� 1.5% = 15 cm

� 2% = 20 cm etc.

517

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The headlamps are designed so that they illuminate the edge of the carriageway for a particularly long distance.

The beam is asymmetrical.

If vehicle is driven in countries where traf-fic drives on opposite side of the road to that of country where vehicle was ap-proved, the beam falls not on the edge of the carriageway, but onto the opposite car-riageway.

This will dazzle road users travelling in the opposite direction.

The area of the headlamp lens to be cov-ered may be seen in the relevant illustra-tion below for the vehicle.

� Prepare adhesive tape using commer-cially approved opaque adhesive tape in accordance with the dimensions,

� apply to corresponding area of the headlamp.

Partially masking headlamps – driving on left/right Risk of accident G

In countries where vehicles drive on the op-posite side of the road to that of the country where vehicle was approved, there is a risk of dazzling from the asymmetrical dipped beam.

To prevent dazzling of oncoming traffic, cov-er over headlamps with adhesive tape, fol-lowing the details issued by Mercedes-Benz.

iComply with national legislation when vehicle is operated in other countries and when used for international trans-port work.

The responsibility for vehicle lighting al-ways rests with the driver.

518

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9Self-produced adhesive strips for left-hand drive vehicles

519

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Left-hand-drive vehicles

1 H7 headlamp, right:covered area for use in countries where vehicles drive on left

2 H7 headlamp, left:covered area for use in countries where vehicles drive on left

3 Xenon headlamp, right:covered area for use in countries where vehicles drive on left

4 Xenon headlamp, left:covered area for use in countries where vehicles drive on left

520

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9Self-produced adhesive strips for right-hand drive vehicles

521

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Right-hand-drive vehicles5 H7 headlamp, right:

covered area for use in countries where vehicles drive on right.

6 H7 headlamp, left:covered area for use in countries where vehicles drive on right.

7 Xenon headlamp, right:covered area for use in countries where vehicles drive on right.

8 Xenon headlamp, left:covered area for use in countries where vehicles drive on right.

522

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The fuse box is in the electrical equipment compartment on co-driver's side.

1 Fuse box fastener

To open the electrical compartment

� Fold back floor covering in the direc-tion of the arrow.

� Unlock fasteners 1 by lifting up.

� Remove lid from the electrical com-partment.

To close the electrical compartment

� Insert lid of the electrical compartment in lower guide slot and close.

� Engage fasteners 1 and lock by fold-ing down.

� Fold down floor covering.

FusesRisk of fire GUse only fuses with the specified ampere rating. Do not fit fuses with higher ampere rating. This would result in damage to the electrical system or even burnt-out cables.

Do not re-wire fuses or bridge them out.

Do not replace a fuse until the reason for the fault has been traced and rectified.

!Before replacing a fuse, switch off all electrical consumers and disconnect the batteries' negative (–) terminals.

523

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To check/replace fuses

The individual electrical circuits are pro-tected by safety fuses or a circuit breaker.

� If an electrical circuit failure occurs, switch off electrical consumers and check the fuses.

� Pull fuse out of its module with the safety fuse extractor provided, and in-sert it into the test socket.

If the LED lights up, the fuse is in work-ing order.

If the LED does not come on, the fuse has blown or is defective.

� If necessary, replace the fuse.

� Insert the fuse.

Replacement fuses/fuse extractor

Replacement fuses and fuse extractor are located in module B in the electrical com-partment, see fuse assignment (� page 526).

1 Fuse extractor2 LED3 Test socket4 Spare fuses

iA faulty fuse can also be identified by the burnt out fuse wire.

524

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Circuit breaker

If a circuit breaker has tripped:

� Rectify the cause of tripping and reset the circuit breaker back on.

Circuit breaker

1 On2 Tripped3 To trip

!If a fuse blows repeatedly, have the cause of fault rectified in an authorised specialist workshop.


!If a circuit breaker trips repeatedly, have the cause of the fault rectified in an authorised specialist workshop.


525

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


The fuse for the hydraulic pump motor (5 amp safety fuse) is located in the hy-draulics box on the left of the chassis.


1 Fuse (hydraulic pump motor)

526

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Allocation of fuses, diodes, relays

527

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Fuse Rating Consumer Terminal

Base module A

F1 20 Driver's door 30

F2 20 Other I-CAN subscriber 30

F3 20 Co-driver's door 30

F4 15 Transmission control, Telligent® gearshift 30

F5 20 Trailer 30

F6 10 Switch panel 30

F7 30 Distribution terminal 30.2 30

F8 30 Distribution body terminal 30.1 30

F9 20 Trailer ABS 30

F10 30 Distribution body terminal 15.2 15

F11 15 Telligent® brake system 30.1

528

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Base module A


F13 10 Auxiliary heating time switch 30

F14 10 Drive control, ignition lock 30

F15 20 Blower 30

F16 10 Interior lighting 30

F17 10 Instrument cluster, tachograph diagnostic socket 30

F18 20 Sliding/tilting sunroof 30

F19 15 Telligent® brake system 30


F21 10 Engine control, alternator 15

F22 10 Trailer ABS 15

F23 15 Brake lamp, body 54

529

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Base module A

F24 15 Permanent+ distribution, body D+

F25 10 Diagnostic socket 15

F26 30 Distribution terminal 15 15

F27 10 Blower 15

F28 10 Drive control 15

F29 10 Telligent® brake system 15

F30 10 Instrument cluster, airbag 15

F31 10 Temperature sensor, audio device 15R

F32 10 Cigarette lighter 15R

530

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Module A1

F1 15 Battery heating 30

F2 20 Heated windscreen 30

F3 20 Heated windscreen 30

F4 10 Refrigerator 30

F5 10 Sun visor, loading tailgate 15

F6 10 Engine compartment lamp 15

F7 15 Socket 12 V 15

F8 10 Electronic rear axle additional steering 30

F9 10 Electronic rear axle additional steering 15

F10 10 Seat heating, belt checks 15

F11 10 Auxiliary air conditioning, reclining seat 30

F12 10 Auxiliary air-conditioning 15

F13 10 Audio device 12 V 30

F14 10 Lane Assist 15

531

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Module A2

F1 20 Flame-start system 30

F2 20 Cab tilting pump 30

F3 10 Telligent® distance control 15

F4 10 Retarder 30

F5 10 Anti-theft alarm system 30

F6 10 Rotating beacon lamp 30

F7 10 Transfer case oil cooler 30

F8 20 Transfer case oil cooler 30

F9 10 24 V sockets 30

F10 Free

F11 Free

F12 Free

F13 Free

F14 15 Load compartment light 30

Module B

Spare fuse

532

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Module location Designation Terminal

General module A (Relay)

K1 Trailer, body brake lamps 54

K2 Supply permanent+ signal :D+

K3 Supply terminal 15.2 15

K4 Supply terminal 15.1 15

K5 Supply terminal 15R 15R

Module A31 (Relay)

K1 Transfer case oil radiator

K2 Roller tipper/loading tailgate

K3 24 V socket

K4 Telephone fittings 15R

K5 Free

K6 Free

K7 Free

K8 Free

K9 Free

K10 Free

533

Practical advice

Electrical system

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Module location Designation

Module A32 (Relay)

K1 Heated windscreen/belt checks

K2 Heated windscreen/belt checks

K3 Transfer case oil radiator

K4 Battery heating

K5 Free

K6 Free

K7 Free

K8 Free

K9 Free

K10 Free

Module D (Diode withstand voltage)

D1 Loading tailgate

534

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Unlocking and locking in an emergency

A radio remote control with a flat battery can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle. Have the battery replaced by an authorised specialist workshop.


1 Battery2 Spring contact

Battery removal

� Lever up both sides of the radio remote control housing halves at key ring loca-tion.

� Push out old battery 1 from under spring contact 2 and remove it.


iWhen the radio remote control battery needs to be replaced, an event mes-sage appears in the multi-function dis-play.

Risk of poisoning and explosion GBatteries contain toxic substances. There-fore, keep batteries out of reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical at-tention immediately.

Batteries can leak or explode if you try to re-charge batteries that are not specially de-signed for re-charging.

Do not dispose of batteries in a fire and do not try to open them with force or there is a risk of explosion.

Environmental note HDo not dispose of used batteries with house-hold waste. Take discharged batteries to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or to an au-thorised collection point for used batteries.

535

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

To fit the battery

� Insert new battery 1 under the spring contact with the positive terminal up-wards 2 using a lint-free cloth.

� Press both halves of housing together until they engage.

The drive is located in rear area of the cut-out for the sliding/tilting sunroof.

1 Opening2 Allen key

� Remove the 5 DIN 911 Allen key 2 from vehicle document wallet.

� Pull the blind to opposite end of cutout and engage in position (� page 342).

� Pull blind further out of roller mecha-nism (arrow) until opening 1 is visible.

� Insert Allen key 2 into the opening and push upwards.

To close

� Turn the Allen key clockwise.

iObserve the terminal markings on the spring contact.

Batteries are obtainable from any spe-cialist workshop or from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof mechanically

536

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The drive is located in rear area of the cut-out for the tilting sunroof. The opening is closed off with a plug.

To close

� Remove a flat screwdriver (blade width 4 mm) from vehicle tool kit pocket.

� Remove plug.

� Insert flat screwdriver into the opening of the drive.

� Turn the screwdriver anti-clockwise.

� Replace the plug in the opening.

Closing the tilting sunroof mechanically

537

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing

If the starter batteries are discharged, a second vehicle can be used to jump-start the vehicle.

� Before jump-starting, disconnect mobile communications systems, e.g. telephone, radio equipment, fax, etc., from the electrical system.

� Check and make sure that the vehicles are not touching each other.

� Make sure that you have easy access to the batteries (� page 423).

Jump-starting

!Do not use quick charging devices for jump-starting.

A discharged battery can freeze at a temperature of –10 °C. Do not start the engine in these circumstances. First, thaw out the battery.

Jump-start only from batteries with same operating voltage (12 V/24 V).

Use jump leads with protection against polarity reversal, insulated terminals and a cross section of approximately 70 mm².

Before starting from a mobile charging station (batteries with a mains power stage), pull out the mains plug. Over-voltage can damage electronic compo-nents in the vehicle.

Risk of explosion and injury GThere is a risk that batteries may explode due to build-up of explosive gas. Avoid cre-ating sparks. Do not work with open flames or smoke in vicinity of the batteries.

Battery acid is caustic.

� There is a risk of injury from ejection of acid spray from batteries if you bend over them when jump starting the vehi-cle.

� Keep children away from batteries.

� Wash off acid spray from skin, eyes or clothing immediately with clean water. If necessary seek medical attention.

538

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


� Switch off all electrical consumers.

� Take off the battery covers.

� Begin with other vehicle's battery: Connect first the positive terminals, then the negative terminals with the jump leads.Do not swap the connection terminals.

� Run the engine of the assisting vehicle at fast idling speed.

� Turn the key in the ignition lock of the vehicle receiving assistance to position 3. When the engine has started allow it to run at idling speed.

� Disconnect the jump leads, first from the negative terminals, then from the positive.

� Have the battery examined in a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

iTractor vehicles with integrated batter-ies at the rear of the vehicle have a socket for jump-starting on the left side of the vehicle at fuel tank height. It is not necessary to uncouple the semi-trailer. It is possible to use this external starting socket for jump-starting. i

A description of the starting proce-dures for vehicles fitted with flame-start system can be found on page 129.

!When the jump leads are detached, the engine of the vehicle being started must only be running at idling speed.

iJump leads with protection against po-larity reversal can be obtained from any specialist workshop or from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Environmental note HBatteries contain lead. Do not dispose of used batteries with household waste.


Take empty batteries to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or to an authorised collec-tion point for used batteries.


539

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

You can have a towing coupling 1 retrofit-ted to end cross-member 2 of the chas-sis.

Towing coupling (example)

Information is available from any specialist workshop or your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Retrofitting the towing coupling

!In order to prevent damage to tail cross-member, you must only fit the towing coupling in conjunction with a reinforcing plate 3.

Using the towing coupling, you may only tow or manoeuvre vehicles with a total weight up to a maximum of 25 tonnes. You must not use the tow-ing coupling for trailer operation or for vehicle recovery purposes.

Loads in excess of 25 tonnes or trailer operation will result in damage to the end cross-member.

Observe the details on the type plate fitted to the towing coupling.

540

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicles fitted with Telma retarder:

The vehicle is equipped at the front with a coupling jaw to allow manoeuvring or tow-ing with the vehicle or for towing away.

Do not exceed a towing speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

The charge pressure display for brake cir-cuit 1 and brake circuit 2 must show a minimum charge pressure of 8 bar.

Tow-starting

Risk of accident GThe retarder can produce uncontrolled brak-ing of the vehicle. To deactivate the retard-er, remove fuse F 4 in module A2 in the electrical compartment (� page 526).

!Vehicles with towing coupling:

Loads in excess of 25 tonnes or trailer operation will result in damage to the end cross-member (� page 539).

!If the engine exceeds the permitted en-gine speed after the clutch is engaged, an alarm sounds.

To prevent damage to the engine

� select a higher driving gear or

� reduce the towing speed.

541

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Hydro-pneumatic gearshift



� Select 5th or 6th gear.

� Tow-start the vehicle.

� When a speed of approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) is reached, release the clutch pedal and slowly depress the accelerator.

Telligent® gearshift



� Select 4th gear.

The gear display shows 4th gear in the left-hand position.


� When a speed of approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) is reached, release the clutch pedal and slowly depress the accelerator.

Telligent® automatic gearshift


� Select 4th gear.

The gear display shows 4th gear in the left-hand position.


� When approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) is reached, depress the ac-celerator.

The Telligent® automatic gearshift en-gages.

iIf you depress the accelerator slowly, the Telligent® automatic gearshift en-gages slowly. If you depress the accel-erator quickly, the Telligent® automatic gearshift engages quickly.

542

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Depending on the cause of failure and the equipment fitted to your vehicle, you must perform a series of different measures be-fore towing your vehicle.

Towing

Risk of injury and accident G� The drive shaft can fall and injure you as

it is being removed. Before removal, se-cure the drive shaft against falling.

� When you start the vehicle moving, the traction control system (ASR) can pro-duce uncontrolled braking of the vehi-cle. Switch off ASR before you start to move the vehicle.

Risk of injury and accident GWhen the engine is not running

� On corners you may deviate from the carriageway or collide against the tow-ing vehicle. The power steering does not operate. You must apply a great deal of force to steer the vehicle. Arrange with the driver of the towing vehicle a system of unmistakable communication signals and adopt suitable driving behaviour.

!When the engine is not running

� and you are towing your vehicle, there is a risk of damage to the transmission. Transmission lubrica-tion does not function. Observe the "Towing vehicles with engine dam-age" section (� page 544)

� the brake system, gear selection and pneumatic suspension have no compressed air supply.

543

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicles with Telligent® stability control:

Switching off Telligent® stability control (� page 91).

Vehicles fitted with Telma retarder:When towing the vehicle, run the en-gine if possible or provide a secure compressed-air supply from the towing vehicle.

For short towing distances, you can charge the compressed-air system via an external compressed-air source (� page 486).

If the compressed-air system cannot be charged, you must mechanically re-lease the spring-loaded parking brake (� page 483).

iWhen towing a vehicle equipped with Telligent® stability control, you must also switch off the Telligent® stability control.

Risk of accident GThe retarder can produce uncontrolled brak-ing of the vehicle. To deactivate the retard-er, remove the fuse F 4 in module A2 in the electrical compartment (� page 526).

544

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Attaching the towbar

Front coupling jaw

� Swing cover 1 of the coupling pin up-wards.

� Swing cover 2 of the coupling jaw downwards.

� Release coupling pin 3, pivot it for-wards through approximately 90° and lift it out.

� Insert the towbar and allow coupling pin to engage in the lock.

Towing vehicles with engine damage

iFour-axle vehicles:

With the drive shaft fitted, the 2nd pow-er steering pump takes over power steering during the journey.

545

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Towing distance up to 1 km


All-wheel-drive vehicles:

� Switch transfer case into the position for road travel (� page 252).

Towing distance up to 60 miles (100 km) � Shift the transmission into neutral.


� Switch transfer case into the position for road travel (� page 252).

Vehicles with hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS):

Transmission

1 Locking plug

!Risk of transmission damage. When the engine is not running, transmission lu-brication does not function. You may tow a vehicle with engine damage at a maximum speed of 5 mph (10 km/h) and for a maximum distance of 0.5 miles (1 km).

Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift/

automatic gearshift:

If the vehicle's electrical power supply and/or compressed-air supply has failed, you must remove the driveshaft before towing the vehicle.

!Risk of transmission damage. When the engine is not running, transmission lu-brication does not function. You may tow a vehicle with engine damage and high range selected at a maximum speed of 25 mph (50 km/h) and for a maximum distance of 60 miles (100 km). You do not need to remove the driveshaft to the drive axle.

Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift/

automatic gearshift:

If the vehicle's electrical power supply and/or compressed-air supply has failed, you must remove the driveshaft before towing the vehicle.

546

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GP setscrew for high range

� Unscrew locking plug 1 on transmis-sion above drive shaft.

� Remove the GP setscrew from vehicle document wallet; screw it fully into the opening and tighten.


� Enable GS back-up function menu (� page 473).

� Activate GS back-up function (� page 474).

� Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is positioned on Towing.


The multi-function display shows Transmission control back-up mode – Towing.

!If the multi-function display shows Towing not possible – remove propel-ler shaft, you may tow the vehicle at a maximum speed of 5 mph (10 km/h) and for a maximum distance of 0.5 miles (1 km). Failure to comply will lead to transmission damage. For long-er distances or for higher speeds, you must remove the driveshaft.

547

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Towing distances greater than 60 miles (100 km)

� Remove driven axle driveshafts.

To be observed with transmission and transfer case damage

� Remove driven axle driveshafts.

To be observed with front axle damage

� Raise the front axle.

!Risk of transmission damage. When the engine is not running, transmission lu-brication does not function. If you want to tow the vehicle further than 60 miles (100 km) or at a speed higher than 25 mph (40 km/h), you must remove the driveshafts to the driven axles.

iTowing requirements are the same as with engine damage.

Risk of injury and accident GWhen you start the vehicle moving, the trac-tion control (ASR) can produce uncontrolled braking of the vehicle. Switch off ASR before you start to move the vehicle.

��

548

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


� Remove the propeller shaft between rear axle and transfer case.


� Set chassis height as required with control panel (� page 290).

Four-axle vehicles:

To be observed with rear axle damage


� Engage the differential lock (transverse lock).

� Remove both driveshafts.

� Do not raise the front axle.

Vehicles with two driven rear axles:

� Remove driveshafts at both rear axles.


� Remove the propeller shaft between front axle and transfer case.

Removing driveshafts, rear axle HL 7, HD 7

Rear axle HL 7, HD 7

1 Circlip

!If you raise the front axle of a laden four-axle vehicle, this will result in dam-age to chassis. Only raise the front axle of four-axle vehicles when the vehicle is in the unladen condition.

549

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Rear axle HL 7, HD 7

2 Special tool

� Unscrew and remove the oil drain plugs at the planetary hubs.

Catch the oil that runs out in a suitable container.

� Remove the planetary hub end covers.

� Pull out the circlips with pliers.

� Remove the drive shafts together with sun gear. For this, use the special tool or a M 8 x 120 mm bolt.

� Re-fit closure cap.

iIf vehicle is to be towed for more than 60 miles (100 km), add oil to the plan-etary hubs. Use clean oil only.

550

Practical advice


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Removing drive shafts, rear axle HL 6, HL 8

Rear axle HL 6, HL 8

1 Bolt connections on the wheel hub


� Engage the differential lock (transverse lock).

� Do not raise the front axle.

� Unscrew the bolt connections on the wheel hub.

� Remove the drive shaft at the wheel end.

Risk of accident GIn Germany, for instance, maximum vehicle height must not exceed 4 metres (13 ft 1 in). When transporting the vehicle on a low-load-er, the maximum permitted vehicle height of 4 metres (13 ft 1 in) must not be exceeded. Observe carefully the height of bridges and other structures on the route.

551

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Technical data

Vehicle type plates

Service products and capacities

Operating data

Tyre pressure table

Limiting-speed feature

Compressed-air reservoir


552

Technical data

Type plates

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Type plates

Information on the type plate

� Type

� Basic headlamp setting

� Flue gas coefficient

� Rear axle ratio

� Vehicle identification number (VIN)

� Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight

� Maximum permissible axle loads

The vehicle type plate is located on the door frame.

The vehicle identification number is locat-ed on the longitudinal member.

The type plate and the vehicle identifica-tion number are explained here using an example.

1 Vehicle type plate (example)2 Vehicle identification number on the

right-hand longitudinal member (exam-ple)

Vehicle type plate

553

Technical data

Type plates

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

Vehicle type designation

WDB 934.032 1 K 264253

WDB Vehicle manufacturer

934.032 Vehicle model designation number

1 Steering wheel (1 = left-hand-drive vehicles, 2 = right-hand-drive vehicles)

K Code letter or code number of manufacturer's works

264253 Vehicle identification end number

18 46

18 Maximum gross vehicle weight in metric tonnes

46 Engine power output in bhp (= x 10)

554

Technical data

Type plates

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vehicle type plate – explanatory notes

The model designation, vehicle design, axle version and number of wheels or pairs of wheels are given on the vehicle type plate. The meaning of the individual figures is explained here using the example (mod-el 934.03).

Vehicle type plate (example)

934.03

930 Model designation

4 Vehicle design 0 Platform trucks 2 Tippers/concrete mixers 4 Semitrailer tractor vehicle

03 Axle version 00...04 4x2 07, 08 4x4 11 6x21

20, 21 6x2 23 6x2/22

22 6x2/4 14/16/24/40 6x4 18, 41 6x6 30, 31, 42 8x4/4 32 8x6/4 33 8x8/4

8x8/4

1. Nummek trailing axle2. Hendrickson leading axle

8 Number of wheels or pairs of wheels

x8 Number of wheels or pairs of wheels

/4 Number of steered wheels

555

Technical data

Type plates

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1 Engine type plate 2 Engine type3 Engine number

Engine type plate

556

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Service products and capacities

Service products are all products needed to operate the vehicle such as:

� Lubricating products (oils and grease)

� Brake fluid

� Coolant

� Fuels

� Windscreen cleaning fluid

Mercedes-Benz achieves optimum com-patibility by ensuring that the service prod-ucts used in the vehicle conform to the materials used in the vehicle.

You should only use service products in your vehicle which meet the strict Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products. Only then is optimum compati-bility with the vehicle guaranteed.

Any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will provide information about Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products.

!Service products or special lubricant additives which have not been ap-proved by Mercedes-Benz could result in damage to the assemblies.

iMercedes-Benz reserves the right to re-strict your warranty rights if service products or special lubricant additives which have not been approved are used.

Risk of injury GService products constitute a health hazard.

� Always wear appropriate protective clothing and a breathing mask when handling service products.

� If possible, avoid inhaling vapours.

� Do not allow service products to come into contact with the skin, eyes or cloth-ing. Clean affected areas of skin with soap and water. Change out of soiled clothing without delay.

� If the service products come into con-tact with the eyes, wash them thorough-ly with clean water and consult a doctor if necessary.

� If any service product is swallowed, a doctor should be consulted immediate-ly.

Service products are highly flammable. For this reason, avoid fire and naked flames and refrain from smoking when handling service products.

Keep service products away from children.

557

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Engine oils

Only use engine oils complying with Sheet No. 228.5 of the Mercedes-Benz Specifica-tions for Service Products. These engine oils have a high standard of quality and have favourable effects on

� engine wear

� fuel consumption

� exhaust gas emissions.

Environmental note HUnless they are handled properly, service products can damage people's health and the environment.

Do not allow service products to enter

� the ground

� the sewage system

� surface water.

Observe the legal requirements.

� Service products

� Drums

� Parts which have been contaminated by the service products, such as filters or cleaning cloths

must be disposed of in an environmentally responsible manner.

Further notes on

� handling different service products

� storage

� disposal

are available from any Mercedes-Benz Serv-ice Centre.

558

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Oil change

Oil change intervals depend on vehicle op-erating conditions and on the quality of the oil used in the engine.

The driver information system automatical-ly shows the time for an oil change as an event message in the display.

Select the SAE class (viscosity) of engine oil in accordance with the outside temper-atures.

SAE engine oil classes

Single-grade oils

Multigrade oils

!Non-approved engine oils could lead to malfunctions and engine damage. The use of such oils could affect your war-ranty rights.

Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet. !

If oil for all-year-round operation is not used in the engine, change the engine oil in good time before the cold season commences, and add an approved en-gine oil of the specified SAE class.

559

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The following data on engine oils is pro-grammed in the "Adjusting service prod-ucts" menu of the driver information system:

� Sheet No. of the Mercedes-Benz Spec-ifications for Service Products.

� SAE class

Adding/topping up the engine oil

When topping up, DaimlerChrysler recom-mends that you only use engine oils of the same quality grade and SAE class as the oil filled at the last oil change.

Mixibility of engine oils

If in the unlikely event the

� engine oil type

� quality grade

� SAE class

filled in the engine are not available: top up the engine oil using another approved min-eral or synthetic engine oil.

Adjusting oil quality

!Mixing oils has a negative effect on the benefits of high-quality engine oils.

!If you top up the engine oil or perform an oil change using an engine oil of a lower quality, the quality of this oil must be adjusted in the "Adjusting service products" menu in the driver informa-tion system.

If you top up using the higher quality engine oil this quality should in no way be entered in the driver information system.

560

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Engine oils for use with bio-diesel fuel (FAME fuel)

Only use engine oils complying with Sheet No. 228.5 or 228.3 of the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products which are approved for operation

� with bio-diesel fuel which have not been mixed or

� mixed with standard diesel fuels

iThe

� quality

� SAE class

� if necessary, the approval in ac-cordance with Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, e.g. Sheet no. 228.5

can be seen from the drum designation on the oil reservoir.

!The engine oil change intervals must be shortened.

Environmental note HIf your vehicle runs on bio-diesel fuels, spe-cial precautions must be taken and national specifications complied with when dispos-ing of engine oils. Information is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

561

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Coolant

The coolant is a mixture of water and a cor-rosion inhibitor/antifreeze agent or water and a coolant additive without antifreeze properties. In order to maintain corrosion protection and to increase the boiling point, the coolant must remain in the cool-ing system all the year round.

Coolant mixing ratios

!The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor con-centration in the coolant should be checked every six months.

Renew the coolant every three years, since the level of corrosion protection gradually decreases.

Water alone is not permissible as a coolant, even if antifreeze protection is not required. The water in the coolant must satisfy the requirements speci-fied on sheet no. 310 of the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Prod-ucts.

If the water quality is not sufficient you must filter and/or treat the water.

Information is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Do not increase the concentration of corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze beyond 55% by volume (= maximum antifreeze protection). Above this concentration, antifreeze protection deteriorates and heat dissipation is less effective.

During the colder months, check corro-sion protection and antifreeze more frequently.

Water % by vol.

Corrosion/antifreeze % by vol.

Antifreeze protection to °C

50 minimum 50 –37

45 maximum 55 approxi-mately –45

Environmental note HUnless they are handled properly, coolant can constitute a risk both for people and for the environment. Coolant must not be al-lowed to get into the sewage system, sur-face waters, the ground water or the ground itself. Dispose of used coolant in an environ-mentally friendly manner. Observe the legal requirements. Further information on how to handle, store and dispose of coolants is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

562

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Coolant additives without antifreeze

No antifreeze protection is needed in coun-tries in which the temperature is always above freezing point. It is permitted in these countries to mix water with a coolant additive without antifreeze properties in-stead of a corrosion/antifreeze additive. Comply with Mercedes-Benz Specifica-tions for Service Products.

Diesel fuels

Only use standard automotive diesel fuels in accordance with DIN EN 590. Grades such as marine diesel fuel, heating oils, etc. are not permitted.

Adjusting the fuel grade

When the vehicle is delivered, the "Adjust-ing service products" menu of the driver in-formation system is set to the normal sulphur content (in %) in the fuel available in the country of delivery.

If you refuel the vehicle occasionally or predominantly in other countries, you must adjust the normal sulphur content of this country in the "Adjusting service products" menu in the driver information system. For an overview of sulphur content in % of fuel available in other countries, see (� page 567).

!Renew the coolant once a year.

Do not use fuel additives such as anti-corrosion protection oils for the cooling system.

!Filter the fuel before adding it when re-fuelling the vehicle from drums or can-isters. This prevents malfunctions in the fuel system as a result of impurities in the fuel.

Special additives must not be used as they could lead to malfunctions and en-gine damage. The use of such additives could affect your warranty rights.

563

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Diesel fuels at low temperatures

At low outside temperatures paraffin sepa-ration may reduce the diesel fuel's free-flowing properties.

To prevent operating problems, use diesel fuel with improved flow properties in the winter months.

In Germany, winter-grade diesel fuels are sold which remain reliable in operation down to approximately –20 °C. Winter-grade diesel fuel can normally be used without risk of malfunctioning at the out-side temperatures expected in the country where it is on sale.

Fuel additives

If summer-grade diesel fuel or winter-grade fuel with less resistance to low tem-peratures is in use, add a quantity of flow improver or kerosene, depending on the outside temperatures.

Add the additives to the diesel fuel at the appropriate time, before paraffin separa-tion reduces the diesel's flow properties. Malfunctions resulting from paraffin sepa-ration can only be removed by heating the entire fuel system, e.g. by stopping the en-gine in a heated area.

The vehicle is equipped with a fuel preheat-ing system. This improves the flow proper-ties of the diesel fuel by approximately 8 °C.

iDo not use additives in winter diesel fu-els. The fuel's flow properties could be impaired by any such fuel additive.

Risk of fire and explosion GAdding petrol lowers the flash point of the diesel fuel. This adds to the risk of handling this fuel mixture.

Do not add petrol to diesel fuel.

564

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Flow improvers

The effectiveness of flow improvers cannot be guaranteed with all fuels. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations.

The addition of flow improvers does not af-fect the cold stability of the bio-diesel fuel.

Kerosene

The addition of 5% by volume of kerosene improves the cold-resistance of diesel fuel by approximately 1 °C. The proportion of kerosene additive must not exceed 50%.

� Run the engine for a while to ensure that the additive reaches all parts of the fuel system.

If summer-grade diesel fuel or winter-grade fuel with less resistance to low tem-peratures is in use, add a quantity of flow improver or kerosene, depending on out-side temperatures.

Bio-diesel fuel (FAME fuel)

It is also possible to run the vehicle on bio-diesel fuel.

This results in

� a slightly higher fuel consumption

� a slightly reduced engine power output

� increased white smoke formation after a cold start

Please refer to the notes on Sheet No. 135 of the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products.

iAdd as little as possible, consistent with outside temperatures.

Risk of fire and explosion GAdding kerosene lowers the flash point of the diesel fuel. This increases the risk of handling this fuel mixture.

Mix kerosene with diesel fuel only in the fuel tank.

Add the kerosene first, then the diesel fuel.

Comply with the relevant safety regulations.

iIt is possible to mix standard diesel fuel with FAME fuel (fatty acid methylester).

For safety reasons, only mix bio-diesel fuel with diesel fuel in the vehicle's fuel tank.

565

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

!� The fuel filter and engine oil filter

must be replaced 600 miles (ap-proximately 1,000 km) after switch-ing to bio-diesel fuel.

� The fuel filter and engine oil filter must be replaced with every oil change.

� Bio-diesel fuel shortens the service life of conventional fuel filters. DaimlerChrysler therefore recom-mends fitting a special fuel prefilter. Further information is available from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

� When switching to bio-diesel fuel the "Service Products" menu of the driver information system is set to FAME (� page 198).

The intervals for oil changes and re-placing the engine oil filter are shorter.

� Only use bio-diesel fuel in accord-ance with DIN EN 14214. Special additives are not permitted. Fuels which do not comply with DIN E 14214 or which have had special additives added could cause malfunctions or even engine dam-age.

� Bio-diesel fuel corrodes painted surfaces. For this reason, they must not be allowed to come into contact with paintwork. Rinse off immedi-ately with water. Only use engine oils complying with Sheet No. 228.5 or 228.3 of the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products.

� If the vehicle is not used for long pe-riods of time, bio-diesel fuel could adhere to components of the fuel system. If the engine is not used for longer periods of time, use up the bio-diesel fuel and run the vehicle for a short time on conventional die-sel fuel and leave it in the fuel sys-tem. The use of bio-diesel fuels is not recommended for vehicles which spend long periods out of use (e.g. fire engines).

� Observe the manufacturer's operat-ing instructions on how to run the auxiliary heating on bio-diesel fuel.

566

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Mercedes-Benz will not accept any warran-ty claims for damage if

� such damage is in directly or indirectly caused by the use of bio-diesel fuels which do not comply with DIN E 14214

� the specifications in accordance with Sheet No. 135 of Mercedes-Benz Spec-ifications for Service Products for oper-ation with bio-diesel fuels are not observed

� malfunctions or consequential damage (e.g. paintwork damage) are caused by the handling or by operation with bio-diesel fuels.

Bio-diesel fuel (FAME fuel) at low tem-peratures

Bio-diesel fuels complying with DIN E 14214 remain reliable down to an outside temperature of approximately –20 °C.

The vehicle is equipped with a fuel preheat-ing system. This improves the flow proper-ties of the diesel fuel.

Flow improvers

The addition of flow improvers does not af-fect the cold stability of the bio-diesel fuel.

Environmental note HIf your vehicle runs on bio-diesel fuel, ask your disposal plant whether you must col-lect the engine oil separately. Not every manufacturer of two refined (lubricant man-ufactured from used engine oil ) can process bio-diesel fuel to produce enriched engine oil.

Special precautions must be taken and na-tional specifications complied with when disposing of engine oils. Information is avail-able from any Mercedes-Benz Service Cen-tre.

567

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Table showing fuel sulphur content

Sulphur content (% by weight)

0...0.1 0.1...0.3 0.3...0.8 0.8...

Europe Austria Italy Azores Armenia Albania

Belgium Lithuania Bulgaria Azerbaijan Andorra

Czech Republic Luxembourg Iceland Estonia Bosnia-Herzegovina

Denmark Netherlands Madeira Georgia Croatia

Finland Norway Poland Latvia Montenegro

France Portugal Russia Macedonia Romania

Germany Slovakia Malta Slovenia

Great Britain Spain Moldova Yugoslavia

Greece Sweden Turkey

Hungary Switzerland Ukraine

Ireland

568

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Sulphur content (% by weight)

0...0.1 0.1...0.3 0.3...0.8 0.8...

Australia Australia

Asia Hong Kong Indonesia India

Korea Israel

Japan

Singapore

Taiwan

Thailand

North America Canada

Mexico

USA

South America Argentina

Africa South Africa

569

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Series Capacity approxi-mately

Service product Sheet no.1

1 MB Specifications for Service Products.

Engine with oil filter

501 LA 541.9.. maximum 34 litres

Engine oil (� page 557) (228.0/1)

+ refrigerator block 541.9.. maximum 27 litres

(228.2/3)

502 LA 542.9.. maximum 38 litres

228.5

+ refrigerator block 542.9.. maximum 29 litres

570

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Series Capacity approxi-mately



Transmission2

2 G 210–G 260 with transmission oil cooler: only use transmission oil complying with Sheet No. 235.11.

G 231 715.5.. 15.5 litres Transmission oil SAE 75W-90 235.11

+ transmission oil cooler 1.0 litres

G 210 – G 260 715.5.. 15.5 litres Transmission oil SAE 80, 80W, 80W/85W

235.1

+ transmission oil cooler 1.0 litres Transmission oil SAE 80, 80W/85W 235.5

+ power take-off Transmission oil SAE 75W-90 235.11

NA 121 – 1b +0.4 litres

NA 121 – 2b; 121 – 2c +0.6 litres

NA 123 – 10b; 124 – 10b +0.6 litres

NA 123 – 11b/c; 124 – 11b/c

+1.0 litres

NA 125 – 10b; 125 – 10b/R

+0.7 litres

NA 125 – 11b/2c; +1.3 litres

NMV 150, NMV 200 +2.9 litres

571

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Series Filling ca-pacity ap-proximately


Transfer case VG 1700 750.86. 11.4 litres Hypoid transmission oil SAE 90, 85W-90 235.0, 235.6

Transmission oil SAE 80, 80W

80W/85W

235.1, 235.5

235.11

+ oil cooler +0.5 litres

Transfer case VG 2400 750.850 13.2 litres Transmission oil SAE 75W/85W 235.4

750.851 10.2 litres Transmission oil SAE 75W-90 235.11

750.852

+ oil cooler +0.5 litres

Retarder (Voith) 5.9 litres Single-grade engine oil SAE 10W, SAE 20W-20, SAE 30

227.0


572

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Series Filling capac-ity approxi-mately



Front axle Differential hub reduction AL7 730.108 7.0 litres Hypoid transmission oil SAE 90, 85W-90

235.0

Differential hub reduction AL7 730.109 7.0 litres Hypoid transmission oil SAE 90, 85W-90

235.6

Through-drive AD7 730.110 8.0 litres Hypoid transmission oil SAE 75W-90 235.8Planetary hubs each1.5 litres

Rear axle Differential hub reduction HL7, HD7

748.210, 748.211 8.0 litres Hypoid transmission oil SAE 90, 85W-90

235.0

748.220, 748.230 Hypoid transmission oil SAE 90, 85W-90

235.6

748.231, 748.240 Hypoid transmission oil SAE 75W-90 235.8748.214, 748.217 12.0 litres748.236, 748.239

Through-drive HD7 748.211, 748.231 2.5 litres748.215, 748.217 3.5 litres748.237, 748.239

Planetary hubs each3.25 litres

HL6 746.213 15.0 litres Hypoid transmission oil SAE 90, 85W-90

235.0

HL8 748.590 14.0 litres Hypoid transmission oil SAE 75W-90 235.8

573

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Series Filling ca-pacity ap-proximately



Power steering 4.5 litres Steering gear oil or transmis-sion fluid (ATF)

236.3, 236.6

+ Telligent® steering system

Cab tilting unit Tipper oil or hydraulic fluid or 236.2, 236.3

transmission fluid (ATF) 236.6, 341.0

Fifth-wheel coupling, trailer coupling

Multipurpose grease 267.0

Axle load compensation linkage


Propeller shaft universal joint, slide piece


Front axle king pin Multipurpose grease 267.0

574

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Series Filling capac-ity approxi-mately



Clutch – hydraulic section Brake fluid (DOT 4 plus) 331.0Hydraulic component of the hydraulic-pneumatic gear-shift:

Range change trans-mission

1.27 litres Brake fluid (DOT 4 plus) 331.0

+ NMV/WSK 1.37 litresBattery cable terminals Acid-resistant grease 350Fuel tank 300–

950 litresDiesel fuels (� page 562) 130

Cooling system 501 LA engine 541.9... 34.5–36.5 litres

Coolant (� page 561) 310

502 LA engine 542.9... 45.0 litres+ Retarder (Voith) +13.5 litres+ Retarder (Telma) +11.5 litres

Windscreen washer system, headlamp cleaning system

16.0 litres Water with windscreen washer concentrate S for summer or W for winter. Observe the correct mixing ratio.

371.0

575

Technical data

Operating data

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Operating data

Operating data – overview

Compressed-air system (reservoir pressure)

Service brake (constant pressure system) 10.0 bar

Brake circuit 1 minimum 6.8 bar

Brake circuit 2 minimum 6.8 bar

Brake circuit on trailer/semitrailer minimum 5.5 bar

Pressure regulator (activation/deactivation pressure) approximately 10.2/12.3 bar

Spring-loaded brake release circuit minimum 5.5 bar

External compressed-air source (charging the compressed-air system) maximum 10.0 bar

Gearshift at transmission minimum 7.0 bar

Auxiliary consumers minimum 5.5 bar

576

Technical data

Operating data

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Engine

Engine speed limiter (transmission in neutral) approximately 1,700/min

Engine speed limitation (emergency running mode) 1,300 rpm

Idling speed approximately 500 rpm

Minimum engine operating speed (vehicles with Telligent® automatic gearshift) approximately 550 rpm

Exhaust brake (operating range) 900 – 2,300 rpm

Engine oil pressure (idling speed) minimum 0.5 bar

Engine oil pressure (rated speed) minimum 2.5 bar

Rated speed approximately 1,800 rpm

Operating temperature (coolant temperature)

Normal operation approximately 80 – 95 °C

Arduous operation (automatically reduced engine power output) from approximately 105 °C

Maximum permissible coolant temperature 110 °C

Tyre pressure

Maximum permissible air pressure for inflating tyres (� page 579) 10.0 bar

577

Technical data

Operating data

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Wheel nut tightening torques (Nm)

Light-alloy wheels 600 ± 25 Nm

Pressed-steel wheel, hub centering by wheel hub 600 ± 25 Nm

Pressed-steel wheel, centring by spherical spring washers and wheel bolts 450 Nm

Wheel nut cover caps 50 – 70 Nm

Spring actuator

Spring-loaded brake release screw release torque maximum 70 Nm

Spring-loaded brake release screw tightening torque minimum 25 Nm, maximum 45 Nm

Release pressure (reservoir pressure in compressed-air system) minimum 8.0 bar

Release pressure (with outside source of compressed air) minimum 6.5 bar

Release pressure with tyre air pressure (spare wheel) minimum 8.5 bar

578

Technical data

Operating data

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Fifth-wheel coupling (low maintenance)

Tightening torque (Nm) for the friction lining of the securing bolts (see manufac-turer's operating instructions)


Filling the air-spring system via tyre inflator connection or front coupling head minimum 9.0 bar

Filler valve, red protective cap minimum 6.5 bar

Speed limiter

Limiting speed (there may be variations in certain countries) approximately 85 km/h

Steering wheel play

Maximum permissible steering wheel play (measured at the rim of the steering wheel with the engine running)

30 mm

579

Technical data

Tyre pressure table

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Tyre pressure table

Single tyres

Risk of accident GIf tyre pressures are too low, road safety and tyre life will both be adversely affected; fuel consumption and tyre wear will increase, and there will be an increased risk of tyre damage.

iTyre pressure changes by approximate-ly 0.2 bar for every 10 °C change in ambient temperature. Remember this when checking tyre pressures inside a building – particularly in winter.

Example:Room temperature = approximately 20 °COutside temperature = approximately 0 °CRequired tyre pressure:specified tyre pressure + 0.4 bar

!The tyre pressure on the front axles for Michelin tyres must be set in accord-ance with the values in the table +1 bar. Do not, however, exceed the maximum permissible tyre pressure of 8.5 bar. Exceptions to this are Michelin tyres which have a recommended tyre pressure of 9 bar.



580

Technical data

Tyre pressure table

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Tyre pressure in bar, axle loads in kg (see type plate)

Tyres LI 6,000 6,300 6,500 6,700 6,900 7,100 7,500 8,000 8,500 9,000 9,500 10,00012.00 R 20 154 6.5 7.0 7.25 7.51

1 Trailing axle +1 bar (maximum tyre pressure 9.0 bar)

7.75 8.0 8.5 – – – – –12.00 R 20 157 6.5 6.75 7.0 7.251 7.5 7.75 8.0 8.75 – – – –13.00 R 20 163 – – – – – – – 6.5 7.00 7.75 8.25 –13.00 R 20 164 – – – – – – – – 6.25 6.75 7.00 7.514.00 R 20 160 – – – – – – 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 – –14.00 R 20 164 – – – – – – – 6.0 6.5 6.75 7.25 7.512 R 2 2.5 149 7.25 7.75 8.0 8.251 – – – – – – – –12 R 22.5 150/152 7.0 7.5 7.75 8.01 8.251 8.51 – – – – – –13 R 22.5 154 6.5 6.75 7.0 7.251 7.5 7.75 8.5 – – – – –13 R 22.5 156 6.25 6.5 6.75 7.01 7.5 7.75 8.25 8.75 – – – –

581

Technical data

Tyre pressure table

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Tyres LI 6,000 6,300 6,500 6,700 6,900 7,100 7,500 8,000 8,500 9,000 9,500 10,00012 R 24 156 – 6.25 6.5 6.75 7.0 7.25 7.75 8.25 – – – –12 R 24 160 – – – – – 6.75 7.0 7.5 8.25 8.75 – –285/60 R 22.5 148 8.25 8.75 – – – – – – – – – –295/60 R 22.5 150 7.5 8.0 8.25 8.5 – – – – – – – –295/80 R 22.5 152 7.0 7.5 7.75 8.01

1 Trailing axle +1 bar (maximum tyre pressure 9.0 bar)

8.251 8.51 – – – – – –305/60 R 22.5 150 7.75 8.25 8.5 8.75 – – – – – – – –305/70 R 22.5 150 7.5 8.0 8.25 8.5 – – – – – – – –315/60 R 22.5 152 7.5 7.75 8.25 8.5 8.75 9.0 – – – – – –315/70 R 22.5 154 7.0 7.5 7.75 8.0 8.25 8.5 9.0 – – – – –315/80 R 22.5 156 6.25 6.75 7.0 7.51 – 7.75 8.25 8.75 – – – –385/65 R 22.5 160 – – – 6.5 6.75 7.0 7.25 8.0 8.5 9.0 – –425/65 R 22.5 165 – – – – – – – 6.5 6.75 7.25 – –

582

Technical data

Tyre pressure table

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Twin tyres



583

Technical data

Tyre pressure table

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Tyres LI 9,500 10,000 10,500 11,000 11,500 12,000 12,500 13,000 13,500 14,000 14,500 15,000 16,000 17,000 18,00012.00 R 20 150 6.0 6.25 6.5 7.0 7.5 7.75 8.0 8.5 – – – – – – –12.00 R 20 153 – – 6.5 6.75 7.25 7.5 7.75 8.0 8.5 8.75 9.0 – – – –14.00 R 20 157 – – – – – – – – 5.5 5.75 6.0 6.25 6.75 – –14.00 R 20 160 – – – – – – – – – – – 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.512 R 22.5 146 6.0 6.25 6.75 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.25 – – – – – – – –12 R 22.5 148 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.25 7.5 8.0 8.5 – – – – – – – –13 R 22.5 149 – – 6.25 6.5 6.75 7.25 7.75 8.0 8.25 – – – – – –13 R 22.5 150 – 6.0 6.5 6.75 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.25 8.5 – – – – – –12 R 24 153 – – – – 6.25 6.5 7.0 7.25 7.5 8.0 8.25 – – – –12 R 24 156 – – – – – – – 6.75 – – – – – – –285/60 R 22.5 145 7.0 7.5 7.75 8.25 8.75 – – – – – – – – – –295/60 R 22.5 147 6.0 6.25 6.5 7.0 7.25 8.0 – – – – – – – – –295/80 R 22.5 148 – 6.5 6.75 7.25 7.5 8.0 8.5 – – – – – – – –305/60 R 22.5 147 6.0 6.25 6.5 7.0 7.25 8.0 – – – – – – – – –305/70 R 22.5 148 6.0 6.25 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 – – – – – – – – –315/60 R 22.5 148 – 6.75 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.25 8.5 – – – – – – – –315/70 R 22.5 148 – 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.25 7.5 8.0 – – – – – – – –315/70 R 22.5 150 – 6.5 7.0 7.25 7.5 8.0 8.25 8.75 – – – – – – –315/80 R 22.5 150 – – 6.25 6.5 7.0 7.25 7.5 8.0 – – – – – – –

584

Technical data

Speed limiter

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Speed limiter

The vehicle's maximum speed is limited to 85 km/h. Variations may be permitted by legal requirements in all countries con-cerned. Once a road speed of 50 mph (ap-proximately 85 km/h) has been reached, the engine automatically regulates the speed. Caution is needed when overtaking.

Risk of accident GIf the driver exceeds the maximum speed of the vehicle, there is a risk of rolling for artic-ulated vehicles. You would also overload the vehicle's brakes and tyres. There is a risk that you could lose control of the vehicle, particularly if you are driving down long steep slopes with a loaded vehicle.

You are responsible for ensuring that the le-gal maximum permitted speed is not ex-ceeded.

Downshift and engage the engine brake ear-ly on to make full use of the engine braking effect on long downhill sections. Slow the vehicle down by braking if necessary.

585

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Compressed-air reservoir

for first-time buyers and other users

Accompanying documentation in accord-ance with Council Directive 87/404/EEC and EN 286-2

The reservoir is

DaimlerChrysler AG

Compressed-air reservoir information

a – only to be used for motor vehicle com-pressed-air systems and those of their trailer vehicles, and only for the supply of compressed air;

b – to be marked for identification with a works number and the reservoir manu-facturer's name together with the prin-cipal operating data and the EC mark – see type plate or engravings directly on the reservoir wall,

c – to be manufactured with a "declaration of conformity" in accordance with Article 12 of Directive 87/404/EEC.

d – to be secured to the vehicle by retain-ing straps (clamps). On buses, direct mounting at the threaded rings is per-mitted.

In the case of aluminium reservoirs, soft liquid-proof retaining strap inserts are to be used to prevent contact be-tween different materials. Securing straps are to be set in such a way that the base connecting seams are not touched and that the reservoir is not subjected to any strain that would im-pair operating safety.

Coatings applied to aluminium reser-voirs must not contain lead, and the top paint coating must only be applied on top of a suitable primer coat. Steel threaded unions for aluminium reser-voirs must have a corrosion-proof coat-ing,

– only to be cleaned using non-alkaline detergents (aluminium reservoir)

– to have the interior visible through the threaded unions.

– to be emptied at regular intervals suffi-cient to prevent the accumulation of condensation (drainage ring nut at low-est point of reservoir).

e – to require no maintenance if Item d is complied with.

f – No welding, heat treatment or other operation relevant to safety is to be performed on the pressure bearing walls of the reservoir (casing, base, ring nuts).

g – Internal reservoir pressure may exceed maximum operating pressure Ps by not more than 10% for a brief period.

586

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Type plate, aluminium reservoir (example)

1 SAG, AustriaSMA, Italy

2 MB part number3 Volume (litres)4 Testing establishment code number5 Year

Type plate, steel reservoir (example)

1 L&S, GermanyElesfr, FranceLMP, PortugalSilverton Engineering, South Africa

2 MB part number3 Volume (litres)4 Year5 Testing establishment code number

Aluminium tank Steel tank

587

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Aluminium tankVolume (litres) MB Part No. Volume (litres) MB Part No. Volume (litres) MB Part No.

4 004 432 1001 20 004 432 1401 35 003 432 9801

6.0 003 432 4601 20 004 432 4601 35 004 432 2701

7.5 004 432 1201 25 003 432 9601 35 004 432 4901

10 004 432 1301 25 003 432 9701 40 003 432 4001

15 003 432 3701 30 003 432 3401 40 004 432 0101

20 003 432 5201 30 003 432 3801 45 003 432 0101

20 003 432 5301 30 004 432 4401 60 004 432 4101

588

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Steel tankVolume (litres) MB Part No. Volume (litres) MB Part No. Volume (litres) MB Part No.

4 004 432 0501 20 004 432 1901 30 004 432 4301

6.0 003 432 0601 20 004 432 3101 35 003 432 9501

7.5 004 432 0701 25 003 432 9301 35 004 432 2601

10 004 432 0801 25 003 432 9401 40 003 432 3901

15 003 432 3301 25 004 432 4201 40 004 432 0001

20 003 432 1401 30 003 432 2001 45 003 432 9901

20 003 432 1501 30 003 432 3201 60 004 432 4001

589

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

� Radio remote control

Radio type approvals

Country Radio remote control trans-mitter MB Part no. 001 820 12 97

Control unit basic module MB Part no. 000 446 00 18

Immobiliser MB Part no. 020 545 39 32

Austria 1 1 GZ 100 243-ZB/97

Belgium 1

1 Application for radio type approval submitted

1 RTT/D/X 1443

Denmark 1 1 ALR 96129

Finland 1 1 G 750723 H

France 1 1 2

2 Not required

Germany 1 1 DL 0001 97

Great Britain 1 1 12462

Greece 1 1 EK 482

Hungary 1 1 1

590

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Country Radio remote control trans-mitter MB Part no. 001 820 12 97

Control unit basic module MB Part no. 000 446 00 18

Immobiliser MB Part no. 020 545 39 32

Ireland 1

1 Application for radio type approval submitted

1 IRL TRA 24/5/60/23

Italy 1 1 DGPGF/SEGR/2/FO/000197

Luxembourg 1 1 L-2431/10203-02H

Netherlands 1 1 NL 97021470

Norway 1 1 NO 96000845-R

Portugal 1 1 ICP-022TC-97

Spain 1 1 E D.G.Tel. 07 97 0641

Sweden 1 1 2

2 Not required

Switzerland 1 1 BAKOM 96.1106.G.P.

591

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Technical terms

ABS(anti-lock braking system)ABS is an integral component of the Telligent® brake system (->BS). This prevents the wheels from locking when the vehicle is braking. The vehicle thus remains steerable. It is operational from walking pace, regardless of road surface conditions.

ADR (Accord européen relatif au transport international des marchandises dan-gereuses par route)ADR is the European Agreement Con-cerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road. This corre-sponds to the German GGVS agree-ment.

AG(automatic gear selection) ->Control unit abbreviationSystem which automatically deter-mines and selects the best possible gear for the driving situation, accelera-tor pedal position, engine operating conditions, etc. The automatic gear se-lection is a monitored electronics sys-tem and forms part of the Telligent® automatic gearshift system.

AHKTrailer coupling

APU(air processing unit)Four-circuit safety valve with filter dry-er and tyre inflator connection

ART(distance-regulating cruise control) ->Control unit abbreviationDriving system which enables you to maintain a specified distance from the vehicle in front.

� If there is no vehicle in front, the system works like conventional ->cruise control.

� If a slower vehicle is detected ahead, the distance-regulating cruise control reduces your speed enough to allow you to maintain the set specified distance from the ve-hicle.

592

Technical terms

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

ASR(acceleration skid control)Function of the Telligent® braking sys-tem.Acceleration skid control prevents the drive wheels from spinning when the vehicle pulls away or accelerates, re-gardless of the road conditions.

Belt driveDrive connection from the engine to the engine accessories, such as the al-ternator, coolant pump or cold com-pressor.

BS(Telligent® brake system)->Control unit abbreviationElectronic braking system which com-prises the regulating functions for ->ABS, ->ASR, ->SR, continuous brake (engine brake/->retarder) and Brake Assist. Takes into consideration the current vehicle weight and any trailer/ semitrailer when distributing brake power. This always ensures that the vehicle/trailer combination is braked with optimum effect.

BTS(battery cut-off switch) ->Control unit abbreviation

BW(binary value)Stored binary values in the diagnostics menu serve only as information for service personnel. These values will help the Mercedes-Benz Service Cen-tre to diagnose and rectify malfunc-tions more rapidly.

CAC(Customer Assistance Center)DaimlerChrysler customer service cen-tre offering advice on all matters con-cerning the vehicle, and support in the event of a breakdown.

593

Technical terms

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CAN(Controller Area Network)Means that the control units are net-worked and exchange data with each other. Controls vehicle functions, such as the central locking system or wind-screen wipers, depending on the vehi-cle or environmental conditions and delivers information to the ->FIS. This system connects the vehicle's elec-tronic systems.

CODEChecks whether a person entering or driving the vehicle is authorised to do so, and forms part of the anti-theft sys-tem.

Control unitElectronic component that controls the functions of the engine or transmis-sion, for example.

Control unit abbreviationThe control unit abbreviation sorts an event message and information in the Diagnostics menu of the corresponding electronic system.

Cruise controlDriving system which makes it possible to store any speed above 10 mph (15 km/h).

Drive trainCollective term for all vehicle compo-nents which belong to the drive, such as:

� Engine

� Clutch

� Transmission

� Propeller shafts

� Transfer case

� Axle drive shafts

Driving mode selector switchSwitch with which the driver of a vehi-cle with Telligent® automatic gearshift can select automatic or manual operat-ing mode.

594

Technical terms

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

EAB(electronic trailer brake)Supplements the Telligent® braking system

EDW(anti-theft alarm system) ->Control unit abbreviationThe towing vehicle and trailer/ semi-trailer are protected against break in and theft by motion and sound sensors.

EHZ(additional electronic rear axle control) ->Control unit abbreviationTelligent® steering system

Engine numberNumber specified by the manufacturer and marked on the cylinder head, by which each engine can be clearly iden-tified.

Engine oil viscosityMeasurement of the inner friction (vis-cosity) of the oil at different tempera-tures. The viscosity is better the higher the temperature the oil can withstand without becoming too thin, or the lower the temperature the oil can withstand without becoming too thick.

EPS(electronic pneumatic gearshift)Transmission shifting which electroni-cally transfers the shift pulses to the transmission. The gears are shifted by pneumatic units on the transmission. ->EPS III S, ->EPS III optional

EPS III S(electronic pneumatic gearshift)Telligent® gearshift, third generation

EPS III SA(electronic pneumatic gearshift)Telligent® automatic gearshift, second generation with automated clutch.

FAME fuels(fatty acid methyl ester)FAME fuels are bio-diesel fuels which are based on fatty acid methyl ester.

595

Technical terms

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

FFB(radio remote control)The radio remote control can be used to:

� lock and unlock the driver's door first and then the co-driver's door

� centrally lock and unlock the driv-er's and co-driver's doors

� activate and deactivate the anti-theft alarm system

FIS(driver information system)The driver information system can be used to call up important information relating to the vehicle and to modify the vehicle's settings. The ->multi-func-tion display serves as the display win-dow for the driver information system. You can use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel to navigate in the ->driver information system menus.

FLA(flame-start system) ->Control unit abbreviationThe flame-start system is a cold-start aid for use at very low outside temper-atures (below –20 °C). The flame-start system is automatically activated be-low about –4 °C.

FM(front module) ->Control unit abbreviationElectronic control module, which is linked via the ->CAN to the base mod-ule ->GM and the rear end module ->HM.

FR(drive control) ->Control unit abbreviationElectronic control module; incorporat-ing the functions of ->AG and the clutch.

GGVS(German regulations for the transport of dangerous goods by road)Two EMERGENCY OFF switches (bat-tery cut-off switches) should be fitted in vehicles used for transporting dan-gerous goods. When the EMERGENCY OFF switch is operated, the engine stops running and all major electrical consumers are disconnected from the vehicle's electrical circuit.

596

Technical terms

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GM(base module) ->Control unit abbreviationCentral electronic module, which is connected via the ->CAN to the front module ->FM and the rear end module ->HM.

GS(gear control unit) ->Control unit abbreviationThe gear control unit is a monitored electronic system and is part of the Telligent® gearshift or Telligent® auto-matic gearshift system.

GSM(Global System for Mobile Communica-tions)The GSM standard establishes the guidelines for constructing a cellular digital mobile system. Thanks to this uniform standard, it is possible to use a mobile phone abroad. Within GSM there are approximately 300 network operators in 120 countries. The trans-mission method is digital.

HM(rear end module) ->Control unit abbreviationElectronic control module; which is connected via the ->Controller Area Network to the base module ->GM and the front module ->FM.

HPS(hydraulic pneumatic gearshift)Transmission shifting which transfers the shift movements to the transmis-sion hydraulically. Pneumatic units on the transmission shift the ->splitter unit and the range group.

HZR(heating control and air conditioning) ->Control unit abbreviationElectronic control module for the auto-matic air conditioning.

INS(instrument panel) ->Control unit abbreviationThe instrument panel is an independ-ent control unit. It controls the indica-tor lamps, needle instruments and the multi-function display.

597

Technical terms

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

KBClutch operation

KOM(communications gateway)Communications interface

KS(clutch control) ->Control unit abbreviationClutch control is a monitored electron-ic system which forms part of the Telligent® automatic gearshift system.

KSA(enhanced central locking system)The enhanced central locking system includes ->central locking for the driv-er's and co-driver's door, the electric power windows and electric sliding/tilting sunroof. When the vehicle is locked, the side windows and sliding/tilting sunroof close automatically if they are still open. If the sliding/tilting sunroof closing lock switch is activat-ed, the sliding/tilting sunroof will re-main open.

LIM(limiter)Driving system which makes it possible to limit the road speed from 10 mph (15 km/h) upwards.

LM rim(light metal rim)

Loading platform approach aidWhen reverse gear is engaged, the dis-tance from an obstacle behind the vehi-cle appears in the ->multi-function display.

M+S tyres (winter tyres)(slush and snow)Tyres which bear the marking M+S are intended for wintry road conditions. The rubber mix of these tyres contains special additives which prevent the tyres from becoming "hard" even at low temperatures. For safety reasons, M+S tyres should be fitted as soon as temperatures fall below +4 °C.

598

Technical terms

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

MBS(Mercedes-Benz item number)Diagnostics menu display

MenuThe displays in the multi-function dis-play of the ->driver information system (FIS) are arranged in menus. Several commands are in the menus.

MFD(multi-function display)Display in the instrument panel which has ->menus to show information and settings for the ->driver information system.

MR(engine control) ->Control unit abbreviationEngine control is a monitored electron-ic system which forms part of the Telligent® engine system. It controls the engine, e.g. the engine idling speed.

MSF(modular shift panel) ->Control unit abbreviation

MSSEngine start/stop function

Multi-function displayDisplay in the instrument panel which has ->menus to show information and settings for the ->driver information system.

Multi-function steering wheelSteering wheel with control buttons which control the ->driver information system.

MW(measured value)Stored measured values in the diagnos-tics and results menus serve only as in-formation for service personnel. These values will help the Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to diagnose and rectify malfunctions more rapidly.

599

Technical terms

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Network operator logoIdentifying symbol for the mobile net-work operator

NMV(power take-off, engine connected)

NOXTreatment of gas emissions (DeNOx)->Control unit abbreviation

NR(level control)The chassis frame can be lowered, raised or moved to the normal position (driving position) using the Telligent® level control panel.

Overrevving rangeSpeeds in the red area of the rev coun-ter at which the engine can only oper-ate for a short period.

PFA(particle filter system) ->Control unit abbreviation

PSM(programmable special module) ->Control unit abbreviationInterface for the connection of special-purpose bodies to the vehicle electrics/electronics system.

RAD(radio) ->Control unit abbreviation

RetarderThe anti-wear brake which acts on the propeller shaft. Supplements the con-tinuous brake.

RS(retarder control) ->Control unit abbreviation

Rumble strip noiseThe lane assist warning sound repro-duced over the vehicle audio system which informs you that you are driving across road lane markings on construc-tion sites.

SAE codeFault code specified by the Society of Automotive Engineers.

600

Technical terms

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

SMS(short message service)Mobile network service enabling small amounts of data to be sent and re-ceived. This can be data, text or even il-lustrations with up to a maximum of 160 characters.

SPA(lane assist) ->Control unit abbreviationLane assist is a convenience system which continuously monitors the posi-tion of the vehicle in relation to the roadside markings through a camera behind the windscreen.If the lateral lane markings are driven on or crossed, an audible warning in the form of a "rumble strip" noise will sound over the left-hand or right-hand cab loudspeaker.

Speed indexPart of the tyre designation; indicates the speed range for which a tyre is per-missible.

SR(stability control)In critical driving conditions, such as sudden swerving or cornering too fast, Telligent® stability control reduces the risk of skidding, jack-knifing or top-pling, regardless of the vehicle load or road surface conditions.

SRS(Supplemental Restraint System) ->Control unit abbreviationAirbag and seat belt control

Stand-by positionFunction of the Telligent® level control ->NR. With sufficient reservoir pressure in the compressed-air system, Telligent® level control maintains the chassis frame at the stored height for approximately five seconds.

TCO(tachograph) ->Control unit abbreviation

TELHands-free device (telephone) ->Control unit abbreviation

Telligent®

Telligent® systems are networked elec-tronic systems, which have been devel-oped specially for Actros. These systems control the engine, transmis-sion and brakes, for example.

601

Technical terms

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Tightening torque (Nm)Force with which bolt connections, e.g. wheel bolts, are tightened. Nm = Newton meters

TMB(co-driver's door module) ->Control unit abbreviation

TMF(driver's door module) ->Control unit abbreviation

TP(telematics platform) ->Control unit abbreviation

TractionForce which is transferred from the ve-hicle to the road via the tyres, and which describes the grip.

Vehicle identification no.Number specified by the manufacturer and affixed to the longitudinal member chassis, by which each vehicle can be clearly identified. ->VIN

VIN(vehicle identification number)Number specified by the manufacturer and affixed to the longitudinal member, by which each vehicle can be clearly identified.

WR(roll control)Telligent® roll control electronically regulates the damping effect of the suspension, automatically adapting it to the vehicle load, driving situation and road surface characteristics. Telligent® roll control is a monitored electronics system which forms part of Telligent® level control.

WS(maintenance system) ->Control unit abbreviationDepending on the vehicle's operating conditions, the Telligent® maintenance system calculates service due dates for:

� oil change (service work) in me-chanical assemblies (service points)

� general service work on other serv-ice points

WSK(converter and clutch unit) ->Control unit abbreviation

602

Technical terms

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Xenon headlampsAn electric arc in the front Xenon head-lamps generates light. A xenon lamp delivers twice as much light as a mod-ern bulb with a heating filament.

ZDS(central data accumulator) ->Control unit abbreviationIndependent component of the GM. Serves as a back-up memory for pro-grammable vehicle electronics data.

ZHE(auxiliary heating) ->Control unit abbreviation

ZL(auxiliary steering) ->Control unit abbreviation

ZV(central locking)When the vehicle is locked, the driver's and co-driver's doors lock at the same time.

603

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Index

AABS 76

ABS activation 87ABS deactivated 85ABS, event messages 79

ABS or Telligent® brake system event messages 79

Actros Info (menu) 160Actros Info menu 160Adjustable reading lamp 143Adjusting (seat) 41, 118Adjusting oil quality 202, 559Adjusting the driver's suspension

seat 41Adjusting the exterior mirrors 45Adjusting the steering wheel 44ADR/GGVS emergency-off switch 126After the engine has been started 50Air conditioning 75Air conditioning switch 325Airbag 70, 72

Air-recirculation mode 321Alarm 178Alarm menu 178Ambient lighting 142Anti-lock braking system 76Anti-theft alarm system 105, 111Applying parking brake 62Arrangement of fuses, diodes,

relays 526ART 280Ashtray 344ASR 87Attaching the towbar 544Audio and mobile communication

equipment 73Audio equipment 169, 359

Operating audio equipment 359Operating cassette player 364Operating CD player 363Regulating volume 360Selecting radio station 361

Audio menu 169Automatic air conditioning 315Automatic bulb check 379Auxiliary air conditioning 323Auxiliary heating 177, 327Auxiliary heating menu 177Axle load indicator 163

BBatteries 423

Battery care 427Charging 428Checking the fluid level 426Disconnecting 424, 425

Before starting the engine 40Belt tensioner 72Belt tensioners 70Berth 32, 121Berth access step 122Berth switch unit 32Bio-diesel fuels (FAME fuels) 564, 566Bleeding the fuel system 468Brake assist system 77Brake system 483

604

Index

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Brakes 371Brake system 77Braking with anti-lock protection 84

Breakdown assistance 540Breakdown equipment 39BS 77

CCab locking 453Cab stowage compartments

(exterior) 348Cab stowage compartments

(interior) 345Cab tilt lock 51Cab tilting system – checking oil level/

topping up 460Cables, compressed-air and hydraulic

lines 375Care 397

Cassette player 364CD player 363Central locking 103, 105Central locking system 34, 102Changing a wheel 494Changing gear

Hydro-pneumatic gearshift 216Hydro-pneumatic shifting 55Telligent® automatic gearshift –

Automatic mode 240Telligent® automatic gearshift –

Manual mode 245Telligent® gearshift 57

Charging the refrigerant accumulator 324

Checking anti-corrosion protector 415Checking compressed-air brake system for

leaks 412Checking compressed-air lines 412Chocks 39

Cigarette lighter 344Climate control 307Clock 148Clock menu 197Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof

manually 535Closing tilting sunroof manually 536Cockpit 14Cockpit switch units 22Combination switch 134Communication equipment 73, 74Compressed-air lines 375Compressed-air reservoir 585Compressed-air system 50

Charging compressed-air system via front coupling head 486

Charging compressed-air system via tyre inflator connection 487

Constant engine speed 260

605

Index

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Construction-site filter 326Construction-site mode 229Continuous brake 261Control unit abbreviations 208Converter and clutch unit 166Converter and clutch unit

temperature 166Cool box 347Coolant 561Coolant level 421Coolant temperature 162Coupling up 373Cruise control 275Cruise control sound 184Cruise control sound menu 184

DDeleting SMS 170Demisting 322Demisting windows 322Diagnostics 207Diagnostics menu 207Diesel fuels 562Differential lock 185Differential lock permanent display 185Differential locks 253Dipped-beam headlamps 59, 132, 507Direct gearshift

Telligent® gearshift 222Distance control

Telligent® distance control distance warning 288

Distance control (ART) 280Door release mechanism 104Driver information system 150Driver's vehicle checks 38Driving position (chassis) 294Driving safety systems 76Driving tips 368Driving with ASR 88

EEconometer 145Electro-hydraulic cab tilting system 457Electromagnetic fan clutch lock-up 467Electronic-pneumatic

gearshift 218, 231, 437Emergency equipment/

first-aid kit 39, 430Emergency gearshift (NMV) 481Emergency-off switch 127Engine brake 263Engine emergency running mode 462Engine oil consumption 370Engine oil grade 202Engine oil grade display 202Engine oil level 163, 418

Checking the engine oil level 418Engine oil viscosity 200Engine oil viscosity menu 200Engine oils 557

606

Index

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Engine oils for use with bio-diesel fuel 560

Engine start/shutdown with cab tilted 461

Engine tunnel shelf 347Engine type plate 555Engine-dependent power take-off

(NMW) 258Engine-resident power take-off 259Enhanced central locking system 106Entry access step lamp 504, 512EPS III S 214, 218EPS III S/EPS III SA 437EPS III SA 214, 231Event info menu 175Event menu (driver information

system) 175Events menu 210Exterior door release mechanism 104Exterior mirrors 302

FFAME fuels (bio-diesel fuels) 564, 566Fifth-wheel coupling (low

maintenance) 578Fire extinguisher 39, 430First-aid 39, 430First-aid kit 39, 430Flame-start system 49, 129Flashing light 504Flow improvers 564, 566Fluids and lubricants

Adjusting quality/viscosity 198Fluids and lubricants menu 198Foglamp 504, 509Fresh air filter 326Front foglamps 133, 504, 505, 507

Fuel additives 563Fuel consumption 369Fuel gauge 148Fuel grade 562Fuel level 40Fuel level and range 168Fuel prefilter 469Fuel sulphur content 199, 567Function check of brake systems 77Fuses 522

Checking/replacing 523Miniature circuit breaker 524

Fuses, Diodes, Relays 522, 526

607

Index

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GGear indicator 219, 231Gear lever 220, 232Gearshift 214

Telligent® gearshift 225Gearshift unit 26

Telligent® automatic gearshift 232Telligent® gearshift 220

Grab handles 36GS back-up function menu 473

HHands-free system 74, 350Hazard warning lamps 137Head restraint 120Headlamp

Headlamp setting 515Headlamp flasher 134Headlamp range control 133Headlamps 507

Checking headlamp setting, adjusting 516

Headlamp cleaning system 24, 136, 419

Headlamps partially covered – driving on left/right 517

Heating and heater-air conditioning control panel 309

Hendrickson leading axle 297High-pressure cleaner 397

High-pressure compressor 410Hillholder 130HPS 214, 215, 434Hydraulic lines 375Hydro-pneumatic

gearshift 54, 214, 215, 434, 470

IIdling speed 265Ignition lock 37

Ignition lock positions 37Immobiliser 125Indicating 40, 60Indicator lamps 20Inflating tyres with tyre inflator

connection 503Insect screen 342Instrument lighting 143Instrument panel 18

608

Index

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Instrument panel switch units, centre section 28

Interior ceiling lamp 504, 513Interior lighting 138, 504, 505

Switching off 140Switching on 139

Intermittent wipe 304Item number of control unit 209

JJack 39, 430Jump-starting 537

KKerosene 564Key 103

LLamps 504, 505Lane assist 96Language menu 182Leading axle 297Level control 186, 290

Permanent display 186Level control permanent display 186Light switch unit 135Light switches 59, 132Lighting 40, 132, 504Limiter 269Liquid load volume monitoring 194Load compartment light 135Load info 165Load monitoring 378Load pressure monitoring 192Load temperature monitoring 189Loading platform approach aid 379Locking the driver's and co-driver's

doors 34, 65Locking the driver's door 34, 65Locking using key 65Locking using radio remote control 65

MMain-beam

headlamps 60, 132, 134, 507Maintenance 171Maintenance menu 171Maintenance system 408Manual mode

Telligent® automatic gearshift 243MB item number 209Mechanical-hydraulic cab tilting

system 454Menu navigation 155Mirror heating 29, 303Miscibility of engine oils 559Monitoring info 161Monitoring info menu 161Multi-function display 156Multi-function steering wheel 25

609

Index

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

NNavigation system 73New SMS 169New SMS menu 169Nightlight 141Nummek trailing axle 489

OOccupant safety 68Oil change intervals 558Oil level in engine

Checking engine oil level 163Opening and closing doors 102Opening and closing roof hatch 343Opening and closing the side

windows 30, 338Opening and closing the tilting roof 342Opening the door from the inside 65

Opening the door from the outside 36Opening the maintenance flap 417Opening using the radio remote

control 35Opening with the key 34Operating temperature 576Outside stowage compartment

lighting 504, 514Outside temperature display 147Overview of lamps 505

PParking 371Parking brake 130

Applying 62Release 52

Parking vehicleTelligent® automatic gearshift 250

Particulate filter 326Perimeter lamp 509, 511Pneumatic suspension 290, 578

Charging pneumatic suspension via external compressed-air source 488

Poly-V-belt 462Power take-off 255, 257, 258, 259Preselected direct shift 223

610

Index

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Preselected gearshift with Telligent® driver's choice 227

Pressure 579Programmable special module

(PSM) 256Pull away

Telligent® gearshift 222Pulling away 52

Hydro-pneumatic gearshift 54, 216Telligent® automatic gearshift –


back-up function 476Telligent® automatic gearshift –

Manual mode 244Telligent® automatic shifting 57Telligent® gearshift 55Telligent® gearshift back-up

function 475Pump lever 39, 430, 433

RRadio 73, 359, 361Radio and mobile communication

equipment 74Radio mode arrow key menu 187Radio remote control 35, 109, 534, 589Radio type approvals 589Raised driving position 295Rapid change in direction 238Reading lamp 140, 504, 505, 514Rear foglamp 134, 504, 505Rear lamps 505, 510Rear-view mirror 302Reflective safety jacket 39, 431Refuelling 372, 562Reminder 160Removing a wheel 500Replacement fuses/fuse extractor 523Replacing a lamp 505

Reservoir pressure 162Reservoir pressure for brake

circuits 1 and 2 149Reservoir pressure in the compressed-air

system 50, 575Restraint systems 68Retarder 264Rev counter 144Reversing warning 99Rocking out bogged-in vehicle 230, 238Roll control 95Rotating beacon lamp 136, 504, 505Running the vehicle in 370

611

Index

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

SSafety regulations for air conditioning 75Seat belt 46, 69

Checking the seat belts 414Seats 41, 118Selecting events 210Selecting neutral 221

Telligent® automatic gearshift 236Telligent® gearshift 221

Selecting reverse gearHydro-pneumatic gearshift 218Telligent® automatic gearshift 237Telligent® gearshift 229

Semitrailer coupling 40, 373

Service due date 173, 174Service note 172Service products 556

Capacities 569Setting clock mode 206Setting language for driver information

system (FIS) 182Setting time 197Settings menu 183Side lamp/parking lamp 504, 508Side marker lamps 504, 505, 511Side wind deflector 384Single tyres 579Sliding/tilting sunroof

Opening and closing 340Sliding/tilting sunroof closure lock 108Sliding/tilting sunroof lock switch 341SMS text message 169Snow chains 394, 395

Spare wheel location 491Special tools 432Speed limiter 578, 584Split-shifter 217Spring actuator 577Spring-loaded brake

Releasing spring-loaded brake with an external source of compressed-air 485

Releasing spring-loaded parking brake if there is a failure of charge pressure 483

Stability control 90, 543Standby switch 293Starting and stopping the engine with cab

tilted 461Starting the engine 49Starting-off aid 296

612

Index

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

SteeringSteering wheel play 51, 578

Steering system/Telligent® steering system 490

STOP lamp 451Stopping

Hydro-pneumatic gearshift 218Hydro-pneumatic shifting 63Telligent® automatic gearshift –


Manual mode 249Telligent® automatic shifting 63Telligent® gearshift 228Telligent® shifting 63

Stopping the engine 64Stopping the engine – Telligent®

automatic gearshift 64Switching audio equipment on/off 359Switching off Lane assist 98Switching on Lane assist 98Switching on lights 59, 132Swivelling reading lamp 504, 505

TTachograph 45, 251Tail lamps 504Teach-in procedure 478Telephone 73, 74, 169, 350Telephone book 354Telephone menu 169Telligent® automatic gearshift 231

Gearshift unit 232Operating mode selector switch 233Selecting operating mode 233

Telligent® automatic gearshift automatic mode 239

Telligent® automatic gearshift modes of operation 232

Telligent® automatic gearshift unit 27Telligent® brake system 77Telligent® distance control (ART) 280Telligent® driver's choice

Telligent® gearshift 226

Telligent® gearshift 55, 218Gearshift unit 220Selecting neutral 221

Telligent® gearshift unit 26Telligent® level control 290Telligent® maintenance system 408Telligent® roll control 95Telligent® stability control (SR) 90, 543

Event message 93Switching off 91, 543Switching on 91

Telligent® stability control event message 93

Temperature regulator 316, 319The first 1,250 miles (2,000 km) 370Tilting the cab 453Timed heating 332Tipper body support 385Tipper operation 385Topping up the engine oil 418Topping up the windscreen washer/

headlamp cleaning system 419

613

Index

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Total distance recorder 144Towing 540, 542Towing and tow-starting 540Towing coupling, retrofitting 539Traction control (ASR) 87Trailer ID 165Trailer/semitrailer coupling 40, 373Trailer/semitrailer monitoring 378Trailing axle 298, 489Transfer case 252Transmission control back-up

mode 189, 207, 473Transmission control back-up mode

menu 189, 207Transmission oil grade 203Transmission oil grade menu 203Transmission oil quality 570

Transmission oil viscosity 570Transmission-dependent

power take-off 257Trip computer 166Trip computer menu 166Trip data 166Turn signal and brake

lamps 40, 60, 504, 505Twin tyres 582Two-way radio, fax machines,

telephone 74Two-way radio, fax, telephone 73Type plates 552Tyre inflator connection 502Tyre pressure 576Tyre pressure table 579Tyres 75Tyres and wheels 390

UUnderride guard 100Units menu 205Units menu, temperature unit 205Unlocking the driver's and co-driver's

doors 34, 35Unlocking the driver's door 34, 35Unlocking using key 103Unlocking using radio remote

control 103

VVehicle check using the driver information

system (FIS) 40Vehicle document wallet 432Vehicle jack 497Vehicle key 103Vehicle lighting, turn signal and brake

lamps 40, 504Vehicle tool kit and emergency

equipment 430, 432Vehicle tool kit pocket 431

Vehicle type plate 552Voltage transformer 358

614

Index

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

WWarning lamp 39, 431Warning triangle 39, 431Wearing seat belts 46Wheel – fitting 501Wheel nuts 370, 496

Tightening the wheel nuts 577Tightening wheel nuts 392Wheel nut tightening torques

(Nm) 577Wheel wrench 39Wheelbrace 430Wheels and tyres 491Wind deflector 381Windscreen cleaning platform 305Windscreen wipers 61, 304Winter driving 394Winter operation 394Wiping action 304Work-area lamp 135

Contact

Mercedes-Benz will be happy toanswer any queries you mayhave:

Mercedes-Benz contactTelephone: 00 800 1 777 7777International: +49 69 95 30 72 77

Internet

Further information aboutMercedes-Benz vehicles and DaimlerChrysler can be found on the following websites:

www.mercedes-benz.comwww.daimlerchrysler.com

Editorial office

You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have regarding the Operating Instructions to the technical documentation team at the following address:

DaimlerChrysler AG, HPC: R803, 70546 Stuttgart, Germany

As at: 30.07.2002

Title illustration number N00.01-2201-31

Not to be reprinted, translated orotherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission.

Print

W. Kohlhammer GmbH

Actros Kezelesi Konyv Angol

Documents

Transcript of Actros Kezelesi Konyv Angol